Slashdot Mirror


How Does a 9/80 Work Schedule Work Out?

cellocgw writes "My company is in the process of implementing a version of '9/80,' a work schedule that squeezes 80 hours' labor time into 9 business days and provides every other Friday off. I was wondering how this has been implemented in other companies, and how it's worked out for other Slashdot readers. Is your system flexible? Do you find time to get personal stuff done during the week? Is Friday good for anything other than catching up on lost sleep? And perhaps most important, do your managers respect the off-Fridays, or do they pull people in on a regular basis to handle 'crises?'"

1,055 comments

  1. feh by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0, Interesting

    I work from home, and as long as all the data gets processed, nobody gives a damn what I do. It's great.

    1. Re:feh by winkydink · · Score: 0, Offtopic

      pray tell, do you mean Claris?

      --

      "I'd rather be a lightning rod than a seismometer." -Ken Kesey

    2. Re:feh by v1 · · Score: 1, Redundant

      If the name "Clarus" means nothing to you

      Actually Clarus didn't mean much to me until a visit to Wikipedia. Maybe you meant Claris?

      (from Back to the Future 2 iirc, "You sound like a damn fool when you say it wrong"

      --
      I work for the Department of Redundancy Department.
    3. Re:feh by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      No.

    4. Re:feh by Hairy+Heron · · Score: 0, Offtopic
    5. Re:feh by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      Ditto. Its not the amount of time put in, its the quality of work put out. Doctors and lawyers figured this out a long time ago. ;)

    6. Re:feh by chrisxcr1 · · Score: 5, Funny

      Moof!

    7. Re:feh by Jarik+C-Bol · · Score: 1

      i've not needed to eject a floppy disk from an internal or external drive in ages. scupper off now.

      --
      I've decided to Diversify my Holdings. I've divided my cash between my left and right pockets, instead of all in one.
    8. Re:feh by beef+curtains · · Score: 1

      Bandwagon jumpers are not welcome among real Mac users. Keep your filthy PC fingers to yourself.

      I believe Steve Jobs would beg to differ.

      --
      Just once I'd like someone to call me 'Sir' without adding 'You're making a scene.'
    9. Re:feh by v1 · · Score: 1

      but have you ever heard it? It was an easter egg, I forget where. (about this mac or in appleworks or simpletext or something)

      It's a "mooooooF" Can't forget it once you've heard it.

      --
      I work for the Department of Redundancy Department.
    10. Re:feh by Creepy · · Score: 3, Informative

      Offtopic (see below for on topic),
      Originally the Dogcow was used for the Cairo font, and later it was printing alignment (amongst other places).

      Claris likely got its name from Clarus.

      On topic,
      My wife had a 9/80 workweek during the summers for several years and loved it. My workweek is more like 10/130 (10/120 if you subtract slashdot :D - and that's regular hours, not crunch, which has hit the upper 120s in a week without any slashdot breaks)

  2. I worked 9/80 for 4 summers by brian0918 · · Score: 5, Informative

    It was really nice, especially if you set it up so that one week you're paid, and the next you get the Friday off. They were also flexible about it and would let you switch occasionally, although that obviously depends on the company.

    1. Re:I worked 9/80 for 4 summers by DataBroker · · Score: 5, Interesting

      I've worked 9/80's for a couple of years. They're great! It's nice to have a weekday off because you can easily get through a weekend's errands in a day because of the lower crowds, and in my case, no kids to slow me.

      As for management respecting the day -- that's like any off-day. You have to enforce it yourself. I've been asked to work on my 9/80 day, and never had a problem agreeing to it. I just swapped it for a different day. Management loved my flexibility (in when I took a day off).

    2. Re:I worked 9/80 for 4 summers by txoof · · Score: 1

      My girlfriend works 9/80s at Shell and she really likes it. Sometimes she ends up working 10/90, but it usually works out really great. She tends to get a lot of stuff done on the Fridays she has off.

      --
      This one's tricky. You have to use imaginary numbers, like eleventeen... --Hobbes
    3. Re:I worked 9/80 for 4 summers by fishbowl · · Score: 3, Interesting

      I would always make plans well in advance and make sure that my supervisor knew not only that I had plans, but how much money I had invested in them. The implication was always there -- if your action deprives me of my ability to execute this plan, I am going to charge you the amount noted. I never had to play that card, but that's because I think the strategy worked to secure my days off, either when I had 9/80 or when I was simply planning vacation time.
      I'm seriously considering to write into my next contract, language that requires them to make reasonable compensation for travel or entertainment that I have to forego at the company's insistence.

      --
      -fb Everything not expressly forbidden is now mandatory.
    4. Re:I worked 9/80 for 4 summers by GizmoToy · · Score: 4, Interesting

      I agree, 9/80 is great. I hired on with a company about a year ago that had just switched to the 9/80 system. There were some issues as everyone adjusted, but it's been great since. I like it so much, I'd view a typical 5/40 as a negative for any future employers.

      I found that I didn't miss the extra hour during the week, and the Friday off is great for sleeping in, doctor appointments, or for random things that can't be done on the weekend.

      My employer doesn't typically pull people in on the off Friday, but I imagine it happens every once in awhile. Although, I'm sure this varies greatly by company.

      Overall, I'd say it's nothing to be scared of as long as the entire company embraces it. It's when portions of the employees are working regular weeks and some are on 9/80 that things tend to fall apart.

    5. Re:I worked 9/80 for 4 summers by Composite_Armor · · Score: 2, Insightful

      Extra days are for golf, biking, rest and friends/family. extra hour each day not a problem. Efficiency of work-group, same. [Teh company i worked for still laid-off ~1500 engineers, in these times.] I say, take the work where you can, and do the best with your days off.

    6. Re:I worked 9/80 for 4 summers by CrimsonAvenger · · Score: 4, Informative
      I worked at a place that did this. Very nice, really. Easier to schedule things like dentist appointment and whatnot without taking time off, since I had a three-day weekend 26 times a year.

      And I could make a nine-day vacation on 36 hours vacation time, as long as I picked an off Friday week for the vacation.

      I can only remember once I had to work on an off Friday in a couple years there. And I got the following Monday off that time.

      --

      "I do not agree with what you say, but I will defend to the death your right to say it"
    7. Re:I worked 9/80 for 4 summers by Fred_A · · Score: 1

      It was really nice, especially if you set it up so that one week you're paid, and the next you get the Friday off.

      You've got to be kidding. On top of this they even paid you ? Luxury !
      All we got was a handful of gravel every now and then AND WE WUS LUCKY !

      --

      May contain traces of nut.
      Made from the freshest electrons.
    8. Re:I worked 9/80 for 4 summers by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 1, Insightful

      I've never worked a 9/80, but I have worked nights and am currently a stay-at-home dad/aspiring novelist. Having free time during the weekdays is awesome.

      -One less commute. Saves a little gas, but can help immensely with sanity.
      -Less traffic/people when doing errands like grocery shopping.
      -Can get out earlier than everybody else for holiday travel (possibly cheaper fares, less traffic getting out of town, etc.)
      -Good for making dates with the missus while kids are in school.
      -Alone time in house (away from kids, wife) to work on hobbies, to do lists, etc.

      Honestly, if I were back to working 9-to-5, I can't think of anything (legal) that would improve my moral better than having every other (or every) Friday off.

    9. Re:I worked 9/80 for 4 summers by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      I'm not sure how this will work out in the current economic climate, unless you have god powers or some other very rare skill. I'm not saying you're wrong, but you know... if there's 10 people in line for a job, and one of them is making demands... I'm just saying.

      Then again, would you want to work for a company that seems to think of you as not much more than a tool...

    10. Re:I worked 9/80 for 4 summers by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      We just switched from everybody on 9/80 to a choice of 9/80 or 10 hour days. I don't see any serious problems. Because they need a programmer for support every other Friday I take off Wednesday one week and Friday the next.

      People with young children tend to want the 9/80.

    11. Re:I worked 9/80 for 4 summers by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      The company I work for has an optional 9/80 program. I'm not that fond of it, however, because of the way they handle holidays: every holiday is still charged as 8 hours, so during the week of a holiday you have to pull a 10 hour shift.

      It could also be because I really don't like my job, and staying that extra hour is torture compared to just getting my 8 hours done and getting the hell gone when 3 o'clock rolls around.

    12. Re:I worked 9/80 for 4 summers by thrillseeker · · Score: 1

      You had gravel? We were given a ball-peen hammer and a big rock ...

    13. Re:I worked 9/80 for 4 summers by Feynman · · Score: 1

      It's when portions of the employees are working regular weeks and some are on 9/80 that things tend to fall apart.

      This is the problem I see at my employer. My site is on a regular 5-day schedule, but another site, with which we interact daily, is on 9/80. Add to that a time-zone difference, and it can be tough to get time with them.

    14. Re:I worked 9/80 for 4 summers by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      I've worked for an American company with a 9/80 schedule for three years now. It sounds like a great idea at first - who wouldn't want to have every Friday off? - but what actually happens is an unofficial expectation from senior management that all supervisors and managers work on their off-Fridays as well.

      On top of that, as the 'culture' of the company adapts to the new schedule, it becomes very difficult to advance without proving you would be willing to work on your off-Fridays.

      You have been warned.

    15. Re:I worked 9/80 for 4 summers by b4dc0d3r · · Score: 1

      dentist appointment and whatnot without taking time off, since I had a three-day weekend 26 times a year.

      I guess it was different when I wasn't salary.

    16. Re:I worked 9/80 for 4 summers by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 1, Funny

      I'm seriously considering to write into my next contract, language that requires them to make reasonable compensation for travel or entertainment that I have to forego at the company's insistence.

      i heard a great line from someone at work the other day...

      "I get to choose when I go on holidays. My boss chooses whether I come back to work or not."

    17. Re:I worked 9/80 for 4 summers by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      The company i work for has a similar situation, its 76 hours over 9 days, and the way this works is fairly flexable, and rewarding. in the case that we go on a trip to a far destination (between 500-1000 KM or 312-630 Miles) we will work for the 9 days straight (with penalty rates on the saturday and sunday due to the inconvience), then have 5 days off. other wise it is generally 5 and 4, where the RDO can be moved to suit your self or the employer (in which case you get paid for it in this pay, and not in the pay you do take it, so it benefits yourself for it being lost) or the day is taken as overtime.

      from what i have seen of this structure, it works very well, due to the fact that you wont have people disappearing during the day to pay bills or post mail because it can be simply done on the day off.

      Although, i can see a problem with this structure if your company works on flex (a system where you don't get paid over time, you simple accrue time that can be used to take time off (kind of like holiday leave)), because i have seen this situation plenty of times where the employer simply forgets about the flex time, or makes it near impossible for the employee to use up the accrued flex, due to work load or another reasonable excuse.

    18. Re:I worked 9/80 for 4 summers by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 1

      kids does not slow you! They add value to your life.

    19. Re:I worked 9/80 for 4 summers by fishbowl · · Score: 2

      >I'm not sure how this will work out in the current economic climate

      We need trailblazers, we need more people willing to say "damn the torpeodes!"
      I'm sick and tired of everyone blaming everything on "the economic climate."

      --
      -fb Everything not expressly forbidden is now mandatory.
    20. Re:I worked 9/80 for 4 summers by pthor1231 · · Score: 1

      Amen. If people weren't so willing to believe the shit they have been brainwashed with from birth (more money on education CLEARLY means a better education, everyone NEEDS a college degree, buying a house ASAP is ESSENTIAL to being a good American - All of the following lead to massive debt early in life), they would have more flexibility in telling their employer to pack sand when they pull some bullshit, regardless of there being 10 people waiting in line for your job, or none.

    21. Re:I worked 9/80 for 4 summers by ryanov · · Score: 1

      Regardless of this idea that "there are 10 people in line," it's in reality a big pain in the ass to replace someone if they're doing the job well but refuse to take unreasonable shit from the boss.

    22. Re:I worked 9/80 for 4 summers by blitziod · · Score: 1

      You had a HAMMER! You Bastard...I dreamed of having a hammer of my own to break rocks to make my own gravel. I had to use a HERRING!

      --
      The only way to bust a doper--is when you yourself become a smoker!
    23. Re:I worked 9/80 for 4 summers by pipatron · · Score: 1

      If there's 10 people in line for a job, and only one of them is making demands, I think I know who to hire.

      --
      c++; /* this makes c bigger but returns the old value */
    24. Re:I worked 9/80 for 4 summers by infalliable · · Score: 1

      It is a very common work schedule in the US Federal Government. Most employees on that schedule seem to really enjoy it.

      It is not as common in the private sector in my experience.

    25. Re:I worked 9/80 for 4 summers by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      My girlfriend works 9/80s at Shell and she really likes it.

      I worked for Shell. To them 9/80 means 9 people working and 71 either in meetings or gone home because they have had enough.

      The number of good people I've seen just walk out of there was amazing.

    26. Re:I worked 9/80 for 4 summers by ByOhTek · · Score: 1

      My aunt does 4/40 and gets every friday off. I'd do it if I could, but sadly, I need to be here every day of the week.

      --
      Self proclaimed typo king, and inventor of the bear destroying coffee table (patent not pending).
    27. Re:I worked 9/80 for 4 summers by SQLGuru · · Score: 1

      I agree. I've worked the 4x9 (7:30 to 5:30) with either an 8 or an off and really enjoyed it.....especially when the off Friday lined up with a three day weekend (Memorial Day for example). If you were working an 8 hour day, it wouldn't be uncommon to work 9 or 10, so the 9 isn't bad (in fact, I found that with 9 hour days, there were fewer times that I actually had to work late....I just goofed off less during the day). The hardest part is when you are there on a Friday and the person you need to work with is off. So you have to manage collaborative work better.

      Another perk is that with the 7:30 to 5:30 hours, you miss the heavier traffic times of 8:00 and 5:00. There's still traffic, but it's not as bad.

    28. Re:I worked 9/80 for 4 summers by cornercuttin · · Score: 1

      How do the holidays work in this instance?

      Say that the second Friday is a national holiday. How does that work? Do you just lose out on that one, or does that time get shifted elsewhere?

    29. Re:I worked 9/80 for 4 summers by muellerr1 · · Score: 1

      A long time ago I worked 4/40 but the days off were staggered Monday/Friday such that every other weekend was a four-day weekend:

      M-T-W-Th + four day vacation + T-W-Th-F + regular weekend

      Knowing that I would only ever work four days in a row made it easier to get through the week, and having four days off in a row gave me plenty of time to nap. I really liked that schedule.

    30. Re:I worked 9/80 for 4 summers by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      I'm not sure how this will work out in the current economic climate, unless you have god powers or some other very rare skill. I'm not saying you're wrong, but you know... if there's 10 people in line for a job, and one of them is making demands... I'm just saying.

      Then again, would you want to work for a company that seems to think of you as not much more than a tool...

      Peacock's Tail

    31. Re:I worked 9/80 for 4 summers by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      I have been working 9/80s for 10 years and they are great. Rarely in the 10 years have I had to go in on an off Friday. Generally because a big project is happening. The extra hour doesn't hurt. I do eat a bit more lunch at my desk but other than that, I would hate to go back to a 5/40

    32. Re:I worked 9/80 for 4 summers by guardian-ct · · Score: 1

      I think the idea is, to let your boss know that if he cancels your time off, he will be costing you money. Some bosses are actually human, and won't want to directly reduce the money in your bank account.

      I wouldn't try to get it written into a contract though.

    33. Re:I worked 9/80 for 4 summers by suggsjc · · Score: 1

      Alone time in house (away from kids, wife) to work on porn.

      There, fixed that for you.

      --
      When I have a kid, I want to put him in one of those strollers for twins and then run around the mall looking frantic.
    34. Re:I worked 9/80 for 4 summers by Varmint01 · · Score: 1

      My company gave us the option of switching to 9/80 about a year ago, and while I hemmed and hawed about it for a while, I absolutely have no regrets about taking it. The Friday off is excellent because it frees you up for longer trips away without using vacation time.

      It can also make some really nice situations when coupled with holidays. For example, since this most recent Christmas was on a Thursday, and my company gave us the following Friday off, I got to apply my 9/80 day off to the day before Christmas. That meant that I had Wednesday through Friday off just naturally, so I only had to take Monday and Tuesday off as vacation days to score the entire week off.

      The days off are generally respected at my company, usually not more than a brief phone call in the event that something comes up that only I can take care of.

      I should caveat all of this by saying that I like my job, I'm good friends with most of my co-workers and really wouldn't mind getting a phone call from them on a day off anyway. I imagine that a lot of other people who aren't in that situation would be more uptight about their time being respected, but I personally don't mind giving a little extra time here and there.

      It also tends to make my evening commute a little easier since I'm leaving work at 6, and most of the people battling their way home at 5 have cleared off the road by then.

    35. Re:I worked 9/80 for 4 summers by drew · · Score: 1

      I'm not that fond of it, however, because of the way they handle holidays: every holiday is still charged as 8 hours, so during the week of a holiday you have to pull a 10 hour shift.

      I remember running into this at a past job, however, as I recall it wasn't much of an issue unless you were taking multiple days off. The thing is, technically in a 9/80 schedule, one of those days is still an 8 hour day, otherwise it would be 9/81. The place I worked, the convention was to have the Friday you were working be the 8 hour day, so Monday through Thursday were always 9 hour days and Friday was either an 8 hour day or off. However, if you were going to be taking a day off during the pay period, they would just move the 8 hour day to the day you were taking off, and you had to work 9 hours that Friday. If you were taking more than one day off in a pay period it became more of an issue, although if I was taking a longer break, I generally tried to work it so that one of the days off was the Friday I didn't work anyway.

      --
      If I don't put anything here, will anyone recognize me anymore?
    36. Re:I worked 9/80 for 4 summers by drew · · Score: 1

      Overall, I'd say it's nothing to be scared of as long as the entire company embraces it. It's when portions of the employees are working regular weeks and some are on 9/80 that things tend to fall apart.

      Interesting, I would have thought the opposite. When I had a 9/80 schedule, the place I worked allowed you to choose between standard 8 hour days, 9 hour days with a day off alternating weeks, and 10 hour days with a day off every week. I loved having the extra day off every other week, and in the middle of summer when I had a lot going on over the weekends and the days are long anyway, I would switch to 10 hour days. But there were a lot of people who worked there that didn't like waking up early or staying at the office late, and would just as soon put in their 8 hours and get out. If we were forced to go all one or the other, I'm fairly certain the people on 9/80 or 8/80 schedules wouldn't have won out.

      My wife used to work at a company where they would have mandatory "summer hours". They would work 9 hour days on Monday through Thursday and get a half day on Friday. While my wife enjoyed it, most of her friends there always complained about it. I got the impression that it was a decision the bosses made without consulting any of the employees so they could have their Friday afternoons for golf.

      --
      If I don't put anything here, will anyone recognize me anymore?
    37. Re:I worked 9/80 for 4 summers by GizmoToy · · Score: 1

      It probably depends on the employer. Depending on the holiday, we either get an "Observed" day for the Thursday before (like Christmas this year), or we get an additional floating holiday that can be used for any regular work day.

      That the way it should be, I think, but I wouldn't be surprised if many organizations didn't follow that.

    38. Re:I worked 9/80 for 4 summers by GizmoToy · · Score: 1

      Our company voted to make the move when we were purchased by a larger company that observed 9/80. The change was made partially in response to frustration that resulted from not being able to contact employees at the parent company on their off Fridays.

      A large company with various people who work every Friday, every other Friday, or no Fridays at all makes it difficult to organize and communicate at the end of the week.

      Of course, this probably varies significantly by the kind of work being performed.

  3. I did it by Knara · · Score: 1

    I worked a summer job that was 9/80 in... ummm, 1998. It seemed to work alright. Can't say it really helped or hurt, though I wasn't in an on-call position at the time, so YMMV.

    I think "buy in" will depend on how much the particular management team pushes it. If they really want to company to do 9/80, it will. If its change for the sake of change, it'll prolly be messy.

  4. it sucks by Dolphinzilla · · Score: 5, Informative

    My company does it - and yes frequently we get hosed out of our day off OR have to travel on our day off. It is inconvenient to many of our customers and I spend a lot of time on my off Fridays checking my e-mail for potential issues. It is not much of a day off. We USED to have a 4-9-4 work week, where we worked 4 nine hour days and half days (4 hours) on Fridays this was AWESOME and I loved it - 9/80 is bogus IMHO

    1. Re:it sucks by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      In our company, if you work on that off day you are paid for it or get comp time.

    2. Re:it sucks by Tokerat · · Score: 1

      Wow that sounds awesome! I'd have time to run errands or make appointments, and I'd still be out of work early enough to get home and maybe get ready and go out and do something? Man i need to find an employer that does that!

      --
      CAn'T CompreHend SARcaSm?
    3. Re:it sucks by Dolphinzilla · · Score: 1

      as a salaried employee it takes an act of God to get authorized to work non-standard days/overtime etc... So while I MIGHT be able to get compensated it would take a lot of effort on my part probably as much as I worked - as far as travel if you end up having to travel back from a business trip on your off day that is just tough luck at my company :-(

    4. Re:it sucks by fishbowl · · Score: 2, Insightful

      A half day Friday defeats the purpose for me. If I have a Friday off, I can leave on Thursday night and actually go somewhere interesting, be there for Friday morning, return Sunday night, and it's like a vacation. But then I'm pretty spoiled. I can pretty much take off whenever I want at my current job. I'm thinking about going to a new job as a contractor, for a really good rate, but I'm worried about the shock when I find out I have to actually work hours that someone else specifies. I have not had an experience like that since the mid 90s.

      --
      -fb Everything not expressly forbidden is now mandatory.
    5. Re:it sucks by Dolphinzilla · · Score: 1

      the great thing about half day Fridays was that if you NEEDED to take the whole day off you could burn HALF of a vacation day - that was great - and probably one of the reasons it was trashed....

    6. Re:it sucks by fishbowl · · Score: 2, Interesting

      I should not read *any* "workplace discussion" right now. I'm about to leave my very cushy, very low-paying job for a contract gig with an offer of money that I can't refuse. But I'm pretty sure I'll have to actually work, and worse, work for other people. I'm a little scared. But I *Really* need the money.

      --
      -fb Everything not expressly forbidden is now mandatory.
    7. Re:it sucks by kelnos · · Score: 3, Insightful

      I think this is really just about managing expectations. If your company has an official 9/80 policy, then *you* have to stick to it as well. That means not checking work email on your day off, and if your boss calls, you don't answer it. Or if you do, you tell him you're not at home, and it's not feasible for you to leave what you're doing. If your boss still somehow manages to get you to come in on your day off, then you ask him -- up front -- what you're getting in return.

      If you let your boss walk all over your schedule, he's just going to assume you don't mind and keep doing it.

      If I had this arrangement and my boss pulled this, I'd start looking for a new job, while cutting back my hours in general so losing the day off doesn't give the company more of my time than I'm supposed to be giving.

      But anyway, I question how this works if you're salaried. At my company we're just expected to get our work done, and for many people here that means working 9- or 10-hour days as a matter of course with a normal 5-day work week. I guess in a company where you -- for example -- do a lot of government contracts this might work, since you're usually expected to account for the time that you've worked on various projects for billing purposes.

      --
      Xfce: Lighter than some, heavier than others. Just right.
    8. Re:it sucks by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      You'll get over it, James. It's good for you. Builds character. :-)

    9. Re:it sucks by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      When your work is a hour away without traffic I wouldn't favor a 4 hour work day ... waste of gas and two hours.

    10. Re:it sucks by v1 · · Score: 1

      Travel time outside your ordinary work commute should be paid working time. If they're snookering you into using a day off to travel for them, you need to do something about that.

      --
      I work for the Department of Redundancy Department.
    11. Re:it sucks by whterbt · · Score: 1

      Parent's comments have everything to do with the parent's employer and nothing to do with the actual 9/80 schedule.

      I've been working 9/80 for over 5 years now. It's a great benefit for me. The extra hour isn't even noticeable after you've already been working 8 hours. And when you can bail an extra hour early on the on-Friday, you feel like you got a little bonus.

      Getting stuff done during the week isn't much of a problem. The grocery stores are less crowded in the evenings. Any "business hours" business can be conducted on the off-Friday, or during your extra hour on the on-Friday if you start early enough.

      Insist on flex-time, however, that goes for any schedule, not just 9/80.

      You will become spoiled by the 3-day weekends. 2-day weekends don't seem long enough.

      As far as management respect, don't work wherever the parent does, obviously. My customers don't care that I don't respond on an off-Friday, because they're off too.

      Questions/issues may include:
        * Will all employees be on the 9/80 schedule (and will they all be on the SAME one)? If some people are not allowed to do 9/80 (e.g. hourly employees), are they going to be resentful?
        * How is overtime handled on the off-Friday? For example, we have a certain number of hours of OT that are automatically unpaid if they are worked on an "on-day". But if they are worked on an "off-day", including an off-Friday, the mandatory window can be waived.
        * Can you switch on and off of the 9/80 schedule at will?
        * How will your timekeeping be handled with the different-length workweeks? Our work week is cut down the middle of the Friday to make each "week" 40 hours and makes time accounting complicated.

      tl;dr - 9/80 is great. Do it.

      --
      Too late to be known as Bush the First, he's sure to be known as Bush the Worst.
    12. Re:it sucks by fermion · · Score: 1
      I would say this is dependent on your company culture. In many cases, if the work can actually get done in 40-45 hours a week, and the company is set up to be pretty much closed on those fridays, then this is good. Since many of us work 9-10 hours a day anyway, the extra day off is good. It keep us from working too hard.

      I know people who work the half day on friday. For companies that are going to be open everyday, and active, and are not going to respect the full day off, it is a good compromise. Friday afternoon is still a better time to get personal stuff done than saturday.

      To be sure, both these are set up to minimize the number of days an employee is absent for personal reasons. If it seems that they will not respect the fridays off, then consider that they are asking you to work a couple extra hundred hours a year for the same pay, if you are on salary. Also consider that having a job is good thing, and we are in a employers market, so this is something you may have to deal with. Unles you firmly believe in the 40 hour work week for technical workers, this seems like a good idea. There is at least one day every two weeks that is supposed to be yours, which is convenient.

      --
      "She's a scientist and a lesbian. She's not going to let it slide." Orphan Black
    13. Re:it sucks by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      At my company we're just expected to get our work done, and for many people here that means working 9- or 10-hour days as a matter of course with a normal 5-day work week.

      At some point, this attitude that companies have that salaried, exempt workers who work only an average of 8 hours every weekday are "underperforming" has got to stop.

      Because my company officially prohibits telecommuting even though from home I can access 100% of the systems I work on (and have to be on call for 24/7), I start billing time when I get in my car to head to the office. Since their policy is making me waste 1-2 hours/day when I could be doing actual work, it seems reasonable.

      Add in the stupid policy of "you will be in the office between the hours of 9am and 6pm" (and still cover the 24/7 support) and it's not surprising the only other people they can hire are foreign nationals who quit exhausted after a few years to go back home and live like princes on their savings from this job.

      The only reason I stay is because I was hired for my 10+ years of Windows and Linux admin and design skills (which is a surprisingly rare combination) and am being paid at that level, even though I haven't used any of those skills in my official job duties.

    14. Re:it sucks by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      At first I read that as "Time travel outside your ordinary work commute..."

    15. Re:it sucks by Anonymous+Brave+Guy · · Score: 1

      My company does it - and yes frequently we get hosed out of our day off OR have to travel on our day off.

      Then, respectfully, your company doesn't do it. It's just a bad employer screwing you into doing unpaid overtime, with a different excuse for doing it.

      --
      If you disagree, post your argument. (-1, Overrated) isn't your personal censorship tool for views you don't like.
    16. Re:it sucks by whackco · · Score: 1

      Yeah, try running your own company, then you are always between 24/7 or 0/7...good and bad. Better money, but procrastination really is like masterbation: fucking yourself.

    17. Re:it sucks by Kjella · · Score: 1

      If friday was my day off, I'd treat being forced to work on friday like being forced to work on saturday. I sure as hell wouldn't check my mail. Abuse my phone and it's mysteriously out of range as I'm at my remote cabin (if anyone asks).

      --
      Live today, because you never know what tomorrow brings
    18. Re:it sucks by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      ...waste of gas and two hours.

      As opposed to EVERY OTHER day.
      That kind of commute is just stupid.

    19. Re:it sucks by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      as a salaried employee it takes an act of God to get authorized to work non-standard days/overtime etc.

      Then why do you work it? Why does it take an act of God to get paid, but something lesser to get you to work for free?

    20. Re:it sucks by internerdj · · Score: 1

      Absolutely. If they scheduled you for a 9/80 and are working you on your day off then go back to 10/80. If you aren't scheduled to work then either don't go in or match the days they are having you work. If you can't do that then they aren't offering you 9/80 they are offering you 10/88+ with no extra compensation. If the other bonuses to working their outweigh that then I guess you just have to deal with it, but if that is a major problem for you find something else.

  5. Lost sleep? by gilxa1226 · · Score: 3, Interesting

    I interviewed at a large defense contractor, the office I interviewed at did a 9/80, it sounded great at the time and still does. As for lost sleep... seriously... you work 9-9-9-9-8, 9-9-9-9-off. I doubt the extra hour a day will kill you. If it does, just eat through lunch.

    1. Re:Lost sleep? by Tokerat · · Score: 5, Funny

      If it does, just eat through lunch.

      Nonsense! Why would lunch be for eating?

      --
      CAn'T CompreHend SARcaSm?
    2. Re:Lost sleep? by Beyond_GoodandEvil · · Score: 1

      "Catching up on lost sleep?" Give me a break. It's only an extra hour of work per day, and in the end you get it back in the form of a 3 day weekend.
      Depending on ones locale that extra hour of work may equal 30-40 extra minutes of commute time.

      --
      I laughed at the weak who considered themselves good because they lacked claws.
    3. Re:Lost sleep? by jlarocco · · Score: 2

      That could go either way, though.

      I used to drive about 65 miles to work, 130 miles round trip. If I left for the day at 5:30 I would get home around 7:00-7:15. If I waited for traffic to die down and left at 6:15, I would still get home between 7:00 and 7:15. Lucky for me there was a similar effect in the morning and my employer wasn't too picky on the schedule.

    4. Re:Lost sleep? by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 1, Funny

      Agree. The lunch hour is reserved for mandatory training.

    5. Re:Lost sleep? by camperdave · · Score: 1

      Depending on ones locale that extra hour of work may equal 30-40 extra minutes of commute time.

      Also, depending on one's locale, that extra hour of work may equal 30-40 LESS minutes of commute time.

      --
      When our name is on the back of your car, we're behind you all the way!
    6. Re:Lost sleep? by pintpusher · · Score: 5, Funny

      I prefer to lunch through work myself, ymmv.

      --
      man, I feel like mold.
    7. Re:Lost sleep? by hansonc · · Score: 1

      or 30-40 minutes less commute time

    8. Re:Lost sleep? by dangitman · · Score: 5, Funny

      just eat through lunch

      This statement is baffling on so many levels.

      --
      ... and then they built the supercollider.
    9. Re:Lost sleep? by sandysnowbeard · · Score: 1

      I think a lot of people neglect the difference an extra hour makes. Staying at work an extra hour has implications on traffic, eating times, exercise schedules, and the sense of balance in one's life.

      It's nice to have flex-time and the OPTION of a 9/80, but my brains are on the floor if I'm truly working nine hours a day every week. Plus in the winter (right now), you're often inside for all the hours of daylight, which is rather depressing.

    10. Re:Lost sleep? by __aasqbs9791 · · Score: 1

      I used to work for a company that just cared that you worked close to 40/week (but not over). So I'd work 10 to 12 hours (if I could stand it) for a couple days and take a day or day and a half extra for the weekend. That was hard sometimes (because the work at that point was so boring as I was just doing data entry) but the extra time off was awesome. Then I took over programming and QC and couldn't do that anymore. :(

    11. Re:Lost sleep? by failedlogic · · Score: 1

      That's where my dream schedule of 0x7 is awesome!

    12. Re:Lost sleep? by Idiomatick · · Score: 4, Insightful

      not baffling, depressing. That working through lunch has become a standard...

    13. Re:Lost sleep? by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      I've been working at a "large defense contractor" with a 9/80 plan for the last 8 years. I think I've worked three "off" Fridays that whole time. It's a great schedule. Having a weekday off is great for running errands and such, especially in a large metro area. Lots easier to get an oil change when everybody else is at work...

    14. Re:Lost sleep? by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      If it does, just eat through lunch.

      gilxa1226, lunch is a sin. Taking a break is a sin. Bestiality is a sin. I'm not sure how that came up.

    15. Re:Lost sleep? by dangitman · · Score: 2, Funny

      But again, that doesn't make sense. It would if you said "working through your lunch break" - but "working through lunch" would mean that lunch somehow enables your work. Likewise, "eating through lunch" is bizarre. You "eat your lunch" - I'm not sure what "eating through lunch" would mean something like you only eat the center of your meal.

      The other odd aspect is; how does taking your lunch break to eat, make a longer working day any shorter?

      --
      ... and then they built the supercollider.
    16. Re:Lost sleep? by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      If it does, just eat through lunch.

      Is that anything like laboring through work?

    17. Re:Lost sleep? by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      Or that they treat their entire work day like a big lunch..

    18. Re:Lost sleep? by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      not baffling, depressing. That working through lunch has become a standard...

      it could be worse: you could be an investment banker and do the 7/80. Seven days a week and average 11-12 hours/day.

      I'm writing this from work :(

    19. Re:Lost sleep? by BigChiefMunkey · · Score: 1

      I make it a habit to eat through lunch. *(:=

    20. Re:Lost sleep? by D+Ninja · · Score: 1

      Nonsense! Why would lunch be for eating?

      I know you're joking, but it's kind of amazing how many people think lunch = the extra work hour.

      And by amazing, I mean kind of sad.

    21. Re:Lost sleep? by Idiomatick · · Score: 1

      Posting on /. ... then you aren't REALLY working are you... *pulls aside his coat so you can see the handle of the cat-o-9tails*

    22. Re:Lost sleep? by Muad'Dave · · Score: 1

      I prefer lunch working it's way through me, personally.

      --
      Tiller's Rule: Never use a word in written form that you've only heard and never read. You will end up looking foolish.
    23. Re:Lost sleep? by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      I prefer to lunch through work myself, ymmv.

      In this case that's actually the sound of pintpusher eating his paperwork.

    24. Re:Lost sleep? by SCHecklerX · · Score: 1

      It breaks down when you have a long commute, or social things to do in the summer when it's light outside. I, unfortunately, have both :-(

  6. 4/10 is easier by poet · · Score: 4, Insightful

    You get every friday or monday off depending on the stagger. The idea of 9/80 bothers me. There is a point of no return for employees. If you are going to work like that, you should make sure and take two one hour breaks a day.

    --
    Get your PostgreSQL here: http://www.commandprompt.com/
    1. Re:4/10 is easier by bughunter · · Score: 5, Interesting

      I did both 4/40 and 9/80, and I tell you, the first extra hour isn't that noticeable, but going from 9 to 10 hours a day sucked. It means either you arrive at 6am so that you can leave at 5. If you can't get there until 9am, have fun working till 8pm...

      I'm back to working 5/40 now, and do indeed miss the 9/80 schedule. One of the best things was the regular 4-day holiday weekends. The accounting calendar was usually arranged so that Fridays off fell before Monday holidays like Memorial Day, etc.

      --
      I can see the fnords!
    2. Re:4/10 is easier by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      There's no need to take 2x 1hr breaks. It's perfectly fine. If you go in early (7 instead of 8) there's no real need for another break. If you work something odd like 10-7 you might need another break, but that puts you at 10-8?

    3. Re:4/10 is easier by pete-classic · · Score: 2, Interesting

      I hate four tens. I always found that I got NOTHING done outside work and spent the whole extra day trying to catch up. Not fun.

      To each his own, I suppose.

      -Peter

    4. Re:4/10 is easier by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 3, Informative

      I have also done both 4/40 and 9/80. I came to the opposite conclusion. Living a fair distance from work, my day is pretty well shot working 9 hours. On top of that, my company wants everyone to start at either 7:00AM or 8:00AM. Consequently, we get to leave at either 4:45PM or 5:45PM. If I come in at 7:00AM it takes ~40 minutes to get to work and ~70 minutes to get back at 4:45PM (rush hour). Going in at 8:00AM and leaving at 5:45PM just swaps the drive time. When I was on a 10 hour schedule, I could avoid traffic both ways. So I worked an extra hour but only lost 30 minutes of my day. On the 8 hour schedule, I could also avoid traffic both ways. So I worked an hour less, but got back an hour and a half of my day.

      If you live close to work, or your company gives enough flexibility to avoid traffic, then 9/80 is probably pretty nice. However, if your situation is like mine, then it's worthless. Most people in my workplace have kids and consequently really hate 9/80.

      On a side note, I've only be forced to come in on an off friday when another company schedules a meeting that I'm involved in on friday (which was never before 9/80). Interestingly, shortly after the switch to 9/80, most such meetings somehow make their way to our off fridays. If possible, make sure you're involved in the scheduling process or they can take advantage of it.

    5. Re:4/10 is easier by trav242 · · Score: 1

      I agree completely. When my previous employer was doing 4 ten hour days, we always got Wednesday and the weekends off. Believe me, having a Wednesday off is really nice because you can get your errands done without all of the Friday rush.

  7. Also by brian0918 · · Score: 4, Informative

    Also, to answer your question, those off-days were always respected, and I never missed the lost hour each day.

    1. Re:Also by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      I work a 9/80 schedule and the off Friday is always respected. It's really nice having 3 day weekends. Some days the extra hour can get a bit tiring, and I've definitely felt it at times, but the off Fridays more than make up for it in the end. The off Friday is nice to sleep in on, but I would say its definitely not used for sleep. It is a good day to catch up on errands since most other people are at work so you can enjoy the rest of your weekend.

  8. Just a second, here... by IorDMUX · · Score: 5, Funny

    Wait-wait-wait-wait... Do you mean to say that you've found a job in the (non-government) tech industry that lets you work only 40 hours a week?

    ... Are they hiring?

    --
    >> Standing on head makes smile of frown, but rest of face also upside down.
    1. Re:Just a second, here... by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      That's what I was going to say. Back before I started working for myself it was normal to work 50/60 hour weeks and that extra time was unpaid time because I was salaried. Now that sucked.

      This 9/80 thing sounds sort of stupid because you know you will not actually get those Fridays off but at the same time many of us work longer hours than that and don't even get the chance of a Friday off so in that light it doesn't seem so bad.

    2. Re:Just a second, here... by diehard2 · · Score: 4, Insightful

      I work 40 hours, an hour lunch break included, and do .NET development work at a major company. This isn't to say that there aren't deadlines where you might work longer, but they're pretty rare. I find that I get more done with the 7 hour workday than I do with a 10 hour day. I'm more focused and not pissed about all the time I'm wasting at work.

    3. Re:Just a second, here... by Mannerism · · Score: 1

      Exactly. When we found out we were shifting to a variant of 9/80 that would mean working 8.5 hours a day, our comment was, "That'll be a nice change from 10 hours a day."

    4. Re:Just a second, here... by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      What are you talking about?? In Australia we work 38 hours a week. We work to LIVE here dudes.

    5. Re:Just a second, here... by DuctTape · · Score: 1

      I originally looked at 9/80 and thought to myself, I can see requiring 80 hours a week, but what does the 9 mean?

      At one employer, salaried people were expected to put in at least 9 hours per day. One (salaried) guy that did exactly 80 got canned when the boss put out a memo saying that extended weekday hours and a Saturday were required until further notice. When he didn't show up the first Saturday, the boss called it insubordination and thereby got around having to give him unemployment insurance.

      Nope, I'm no longer there, and tell everyone about that employer at the drop of a hat.

      DT

      --
      Is this thing on? Hello?
    6. Re:Just a second, here... by StarsAreAlsoFire · · Score: 1

      Yeah I was thinking of how cool this sounded. Then considered it from managments perspective:

      A: "Some of the Devs want to go to 9/80"
      B: "Aren't they all salaried?"
      A: "Of course"
      B: "Then... wait... won't that mean they work LESS, at the same pay"
      A: "Uhm."
      C: "If they think they can put in another hour a day, why did they say they couldn't get feature X done on time?"
      B: "Good point C. If feature X isn't completed on time, no bonus and no raises this year. Anything else A?"

      So, no. I don't think I'll raise the issue at my office.

    7. Re:Just a second, here... by Rakishi · · Score: 1

      I do and I'm salaried, well technically I work however long I want to as long as my manager(s) consider I get my work done. It average out to 40 hours or somewhat below that in the long run. Now if I worked 80 hours at some other company then I'd probably make a lot more money but I'm not greedy or masochistic.

      Some key ways to accomplish this I think are:
      -Have skills that make you worth more than a well bred monkey.
      -Interviews are a two-way process, pick your future workplace carefully.
      -Money isn't everything and more money will probably involve more expected hours, ask how long you're expected to work to make that money.
      -Say no to working absurd hours to get things done, the world won't end and next time you'll get less work. If you need to then work less the next week.

    8. Re:Just a second, here... by Seindal · · Score: 1

      A building site manager I spoke to a while ago told me that they planned for having 70% of the day's work done before lunch, as productivity plummeted as people got more tired - so according to him people were twice as efficient in the first 3-4 hours as in the next 3-4 hours. In such a context a longer workday would make absolutely no sense - productivity would be minimal.

      --
      René Seindal
    9. Re:Just a second, here... by shninja · · Score: 1

      While that post is funny, it is also true, aren't you probably already working 9 hour days anyway? I've worked "Crazy Nines" as they were called, alternating between 8 hour Fridays and Fridays off and found it to be nearly identical to the standard work week, but with an extra day off every 2 weeks.

    10. Re:Just a second, here... by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      My friend, let me introduce you to the wonders of the giant defense contractor. You get the perks of a corporate job combined with the comfort of a stress-free job in the government. Truly this is a match made in heaven.

  9. Crises by egcagrac0 · · Score: 5, Insightful

    If your manager pulls you in to cover a crisis, you need to demand flex time (a different day off next week) or overtime.

    Or, send them an invoice from your consulting firm for about six times whatever your daily rate is.

    1. Re:Crises by Spasemunki · · Score: 5, Funny

      Or, send them an invoice from your consulting firm for about six times whatever your daily rate is.

      Yeah, that way you'll have a lot of time to look for a new job.

    2. Re:Crises by mabhatter654 · · Score: 3, Interesting

      why is "more money for more work" such a taboo? really?

    3. Re:Crises by Spad · · Score: 1

      Because there are people willing to do "same money for more work" that you can be replaced with (regardless of those unimportant factors like experience or skill level).

    4. Re:Crises by JohnnyBGod · · Score: 1

      Because there's people who'll do "same money for more work", or even "same money for inferior work, which you won't know it's inferior until it's in your hands", especially in a recession.

    5. Re:Crises by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      (some) Salary work does not honor overtime. Therefore, asking for more money is changing the rules after you've agreed to them per the contract.

    6. Re:Crises by egcagrac0 · · Score: 1

      Yeah, that way you'll have a lot of time to look for a new job.

      If they're abusing you by taking away your time off, you need to be looking anyway.

      From time to time, I get called by work when I'm not there. They never demand that I show up to bail them out, but sometimes it's easier to go in than to talk someone else through the fix. As soon as they demand that I show up, then I count my travel time as time worked. Seems to work for all of us.

    7. Re:Crises by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      Damn, you're so right ... It always strikes me as a rather stupid thing to work overtime and NOT get paid.

      Lemme tell a secret for all techies - don't moan when you agree to do something for 6 hours and you do it for 8 - it's you who has agreed. If you can't defend the time it takes to do something, just quit the damned place.

    8. Re:Crises by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      More money for more work isn't so much a taboo as in this case "moonlighting", which would get you fired. Demanding flex time or overtime pay (if that is an option for you; for me as an exempt employee it, it isn't an option) is fine. But "double dipping" is really frowned upon.

    9. Re:Crises by Alinabi · · Score: 1

      because some people like to have a life outside work, and the day only has 24 hours.

      --
      "You can't allow somebody to commit the crime before you detain them." [Condoleezza Rice]
    10. Re:Crises by SparkleMotion88 · · Score: 1

      why is "more money for more work" such a taboo? really?

      I think the "taboo" is the fact that you run an outside consulting business in addition to your full-time job. Even if you didn't sign an agreement with your current employer that says you will not engage in outside money-making activities in your technical field, it will probably be "frowned upon."

    11. Re:Crises by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      so what? i'll look for a new job then... if you look hard you can find a job without that "long hours" crap.

    12. Re:Crises by lawpoop · · Score: 1

      Because, these days, there's someone who would be very willing to do that 'more work' for the same amount of money -- or even less.

      --
      Computers are useless. They can only give you answers.
      -- Pablo Picasso
  10. My experience by O('_')O_Bush · · Score: 5, Informative

    A friend of mine worked under 9/80 and loved it. He felt like he could be more productive staying later on the busy days and he took the extra friday off to take small trips with the family.

    I worked for the same company but different location under a flexible hour system where the only requirement was that I met the 40 hrs per week. It made things much more difficult to free up space on the weekends, but allowed me to be more available during the week.

    It's just preference.

    --
    while(1) attack(People.Sandy);
    1. Re:My experience by meeotch · · Score: 0, Redundant

      What is this "40 hour week" thing you speak of?

      Industry standard in my industry (visual effects) is 5 ten-hour days. I guess that's a "10/100"? I would give my left nut for every other friday off.

      I am curious, though - for folks who do work 8 hour days (and don't have families or whatever) - does the extra two hours at night make that much of a difference? I imagine I'd be just as defeated, and blow the surplus watching t.v., rather than writing a novel, inventing the Finglonger, or building a robot that would win me the love of Milla Jovovich.

    2. Re:My experience by Lukiano · · Score: 1

      Well, with 8 hours i can go swimming at the club after work

    3. Re:My experience by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      I used to work 4-11 with every Friday off . Some of the most productive time in my business life. Now I'm working 8or9 x 5, spending time in meetings and not getting a bleeding thing done -- actually that was last year. I'm taking Fridays at home --still working (phone, IM) but it reduces the numbers of "quick questions" people ask. If they have to actually formulate the questions into text, they often figure things out for themselves.

    4. Re:My experience by Hogwash+McFly · · Score: 1

      I work 8 hours, and while my evenings are pretty much wasted time - surfing the net, zoning out, etc. - at least it's my wasted time. So while it may not be productive from a novel-writing, model-building point of view, it's definitely good for my mental health.

      --
      Mother, do you think they'll like this sig?
    5. Re:My experience by Jarik+C-Bol · · Score: 1

      i spend it trying to get over the fact that i spent 8 hours doing manual labor worth 20+$ an hour for 12$ an hour.

      --
      I've decided to Diversify my Holdings. I've divided my cash between my left and right pockets, instead of all in one.
  11. MIB by Thelasko · · Score: 5, Funny

    The twins keep us on Centaurian time, standard 37-hour day. Give it a few months, you'll get used to it. Or you'll have a psychotic episode.

    --
    One of our competitors trademarked the term "hypothesis". From now on, we will call them "boneheaded ideas".
    1. Re:MIB by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      LMAO - having real twins the first time I read this I didn't realize it was from a movie, I just thought it was someone else with twins.

    2. Re:MIB by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      argh...take that extra ' out of your sig please, it burns me

  12. Get out now by BadAnalogyGuy · · Score: 4, Insightful

    While it is not a bad idea in and of itself, changing work schedules to some bizarre non-standard system is usually a sign that the company management is trying to squeeze more work out of you. First they change the schedule to give you more work per day, then they will ask you to work more days.

    In this economy, they know you don't have anywhere to go, so unless you fight back against this or leave for a new job altogether, you're going to get screwed. Ask them if they've been considering offshoring the IT department. I'd be willing to bet that within the next year they are looking to thin the local IT staff to a skeleton crew and then migrate the servers over to India where they can do your job for a third of the cost.

    1. Re:Get out now by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      i don't think it's weird/bizzare really. as other posts mention it's been done for many years now by many different companies, i know a friend of mine worked at a hospital and worked a 9/80.

    2. Re:Get out now by jrumney · · Score: 1

      While it is not a bad idea in and of itself, changing work schedules to some bizarre non-standard system is usually a sign that the company management is trying to squeeze more work out of you.

      Around here it is done to squeeze less out of you, with a corresponding pay cut. Many companies (factories especially) have gone to 4 day weeks, or even 3 days weeks to save money.

    3. Re:Get out now by elpostino · · Score: 0

      While it is not a bad idea in and of itself, changing work schedules to some bizarre non-standard system is usually a sign that the company management is trying to squeeze more work out of you.

      Really? This was give to me as an option for being a hard worker at my last employer. It worked out well for me because I was already putting in more than 8 hours a day (because I liked what I was doing - not because they demanded it), but every two weeks I got a three day weekend.

    4. Re:Get out now by ExpressTrain · · Score: 1

      I think that it would cost more in terms of accounting to deal with the complexity of carrying over 4 hours from the first week to the second week than they would gain in some nefarious extra labor benefit. However, I worked a 9/80 schedule for years, and LOVED it. However, it was successful largely because my manager was great about respecting the Friday off. Also, I didn't deal with customers outside of the company.

    5. Re:Get out now by thePowerOfGrayskull · · Score: 2, Insightful

      ...and then migrate the servers over to India where they can do your job for a third of the cost.

      And where they burn 4x as many hours in the process ;)

    6. Re:Get out now by joelgrimes · · Score: 1

      Working for a defense company doing 9/80 - they claim to be saving tons of money on power and other services that they can cut on 9/80 Friday.

      Personally, my productivity starts declining after lunch so it's difficult to make the case that they are squeezing more work out of me.

    7. Re:Get out now by DaFallus · · Score: 1

      It really just depends on the company. My father has been working 9/80 for years. He loves it so much he'll typically call me at work on his Friday off and brag to me that he's going to see a movie or something.

      --
      No one cares what your captcha was

      Houston TX, USA
    8. Re:Get out now by mabhatter654 · · Score: 1

      most offices deal on a two week pay period (or semi monthly) already. so this is just rearranging hours.

    9. Re:Get out now by Fulcrum+of+Evil · · Score: 1

      I'd be willing to bet that within the next year they are looking to thin the local IT staff to a skeleton crew and then migrate the servers over to India where they can do your job for a third of the cost.

      Usually, they keep the servers here and hire indians for a bit over half the cost. Of course, even talented indian staff is hard to work with due to the distance and time difference. That's for software development - outsourcing IT to india would be a disaster: if anything breaks during the day, you have to wait for the IT guys to get in.

      --
      "We returned the General to El Salvador, or maybe Guatemala, it's difficult to tell from 10,000 feet"
    10. Re:Get out now by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      ...and then migrate the servers over to India where they can do your job for a third of the cost.

      In the same way a Yugo does the same job as a Mercedes. Outsourcing has a quality cost unless it is managed very carefully, the management alone wipes out all cost benefits.

  13. Lobby for 10 hour days by insanecarbonbasedlif · · Score: 2, Insightful

    With 4 tens, I get every friday off. As far as being pulled in on other days, it depends on whether your manager is an ethical person who respects their employees or not. You are the only one who knows enough to tell that, and a bunch of slashdot pundits won't help.

    --
    Just because I doubt myself does not mean I find your position compelling.
    1. Re:Lobby for 10 hour days by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      Remember the Jetsons? George Jetson only worked something like five hours a day, and he only worked three days a week. I'll pass up the flying car if I could feed a family of four people, a robot, a dog, and a cat, with a 15 hour a week job.

  14. It will be easier by bugs2squash · · Score: 1

    to get the 9 days respected than the 80 hours

    --
    Nullius in verba
  15. Too much by dimethylxanthine · · Score: 0

    If this an attempt to resurrect the Mayan calendar, then negative. Everything they did was apocalyptical. The even managed to destroy themselves...

    I say, day in - day out. Nice and simple.
    ---

    Hard work never killed anybody, but why take a chance?

  16. I wish! by Roadkills-R-Us · · Score: 1

    I've usually worked long hours (too many startups and contract jobs). I've always wanted a 3x13 or 4x10 workweek, but would happily settle for 9/80. This works great for the way my body works, but I've never had an employer who didn't just want more hours.

    If the company would really do it, it would be great to have every other weekend be three days.

  17. The state of Utah is trying something out. by gandhi_2 · · Score: 1

    They just went to 4 10's. 80 hrs in 8 days. And pretty much everyone I know hates it. OTOH, statistically you get more done a couple hours after you get there up to a couple hours before you leave.

    1. Re:The state of Utah is trying something out. by timmarhy · · Score: 1, Informative

      care to explain why they hate having an extra day off???? i work a similar work week and i fucking love it.

      --
      If you mod me down, I will become more powerful than you can imagine....
    2. Re:The state of Utah is trying something out. by hansonc · · Score: 1

      try working with the state on anything. All government offices are closed on Fridays and they don't stay open later which would be actually helpful, instead they open earlier...

      Which makes more sense, having the DMV open at 6PM or 6AM, now guess which one is true.

    3. Re:The state of Utah is trying something out. by gandhi_2 · · Score: 1

      Well...for a lot of state employees it just means 4 10s and an unpaid 5 in the form of comp time that gets lost at the end of the fiscal year. Getting up earlier and it's not like you can run state government-related errands on that friday off...they are closed!

      Of course, some of them like it. But it really was Gov. Huntsman's idea to save $ on electricity / generate fiscal + environmental street cred. Works fine for office folk in SLC, not so well for wildlife biologists.

  18. Lost sleep? by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

    "Catching up on lost sleep?" Give me a break. It's only an extra hour of work per day, and in the end you get it back in the form of a 3 day weekend.

    If one hour more at work is enough to deprive you of an equivalent amount of sleep... you might want to figure out where those other 7 awake hours are going..

  19. I love it. by friedmud · · Score: 5, Informative

    I've worked for two consecutive companies with 9/80. At the first it was optional (but most people did it) at the second (current one) it is pretty much mandatory.

    Let me tell you.... it's awesome.

    Having a 3-day weekend every other week outweighs any perceived negatives. It gives you the ability to leave on a trip on a Thursday night... spend 3 days somewhere and still make it back for work without taking any vacation.

    To answer your questions:

    - I was wondering how this has been implemented in other companies.

    For both of my companies you work 9 hours a day except the friday you work you only work 8 hours. Then you get every other friday off.

    - Is your system flexible?

    At the first company it was... you could choose which friday you wanted to start your 9/80 schedule on... so half of the people were gone every other friday.

    At my current job it's not... everyone has the same friday off. I see the benefits of both. Personally, I really enjoyed fridays at my previous job... when (at least) half the people were gone I could get a lot of work done.

    Both places I worked for have been flexible in your start time in the morning... meaning I can go in early and still get off early to get stuff done... which leads to:

    - Do you find time to get personal stuff done during the week?

    Yes. If I really need to get something done after work then I'll go in early. If I'm there by 7:00 then I can get off around 4:00 to 4:30... leaving plenty of time.

    - Is Friday good for anything other than catching up on lost sleep?

    Yes. You can use it for weekend trips like I mentioned above. Also, it's a great time to catch up around the house (mending fences, etc.). Finally, it's also a great day to get grocery shopping (and similar) done because most people are working...

    I use the day a lot of different ways... and I do often sleep in a bit... but never sleep the day away!

    - And perhaps most important, do your managers respect the off-Fridays, or do they pull people in on a regular basis to handle 'crises?'"

    Has never happened to me. Like I said.. at my current job the friday off is mandatory. They actually turn out the lights and turn down the air-conditioning, etc. They really expect no one to be there.

    But... I know my jobs are normal (I'm a research scientist at laboratories) so YMMV.

    In conclusion... it can only be a good thing... go for it!

    Friedmud

    1. Re:I love it. by JoeLinux · · Score: 5, Interesting

      The only issue that has ever come up is:

      1) When a customer comes in, and we have to come in on our day off

      and

      2) Because of the increased rest on a three-day weekend, people use less vacation time, resulting in the office being virtually deserted in December.

    2. Re:I love it. by YrWrstNtmr · · Score: 1

      Let me tell you.... it's awesome.

      I do the same, and it IS awesome. A 3 day weekend twice a month? Minimum? Fold in federal/bank holidays?
      Oh yes.

      The main thing is, you HAVE to have a boss who respects the sanctity of your off Friday. No exceptions. And if you absolutely have to...the following Monday (or similar) is off.

    3. Re:I love it. by Amazing+Quantum+Man · · Score: 1

      I loved it too. For the reasons you specified. We were subbed to a major aerospace firm who was also on 9/80, so it actually worked out better for us, in that we didn't have to remember, "Is this the week they're off?".

      --
      Fascism starts when the efficiency of the government becomes more important than the rights of the people.
    4. Re:I love it. by soulsteal · · Score: 1

      I had a 9/80 for about 3 years when I worked for Lockheed-Martin. When I came on, we were a three man team, which eventually grew to four.

      The week was split into alternating weeks, A and B. Group A had the Friday on Week A off and Group B had the Friday on Week B off. Since I was new, I was on the same schedule as the team lead so he could show me the ropes and the other guy could cover the facility on our down Fridays.

      When we grew to a four person team, I was shifted to Week A and the new girl was put on Week B with the Team Lead. This way, every Friday was covered with two people and other weekdays had four total.

      This eventually gave way to the Team Lead taking his position part-time and we lost a team member to medical reasons. I stayed on Week A, The Girl took Week B and Team Lead was working 20 hours on a MWF schedule.

      Ridiculously complicated but we set up rules and made the schedules available to the customer so they knew who to call on which weekends. If you had the Friday off, then you weren't on call that weekend. The three years I worked that schedule, I was probably called in 3 times on my off weekends. The only deviance from this schedule was after Hurricane Katrina when FEMA/MEMA took over our facility as their headquarters for two months.

      I do miss the 9/80 schedule, but my current schedule is so flexible that I could recreate it if necessary.

    5. Re:I love it. by EdelFactor19 · · Score: 1

      We don't have that and our office is already deserted in december. You throw in a software release and the 'critical' time leading up to it where no one is supposed to be taking vacation, and it seems to end up the same way.

      --
      "Jazz isn't dead, it just smells funny" ~Frank Zappa
      EdelFactor
    6. Re:I love it. by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      I have to agree with the parent, I've been working 9/80 for the last 3 years and it's the absolute best. I've never been asked to work on my AWS day. Additionally, depending on the flexibility of your work center, if you have things that you have to take care of during the week you can make up the time (or take leave) on your extra day off.

      Overall I think that it offers even more flexibility to your work week.

    7. Re:I love it. by fprintf · · Score: 1

      At my former company I hated the Flex schedules because of how people accrued vacation time. If they were on a 9/80 schedule and took a work day off Monday - Friday on Week One, or Monday - Wednesday on Week Two I'd have to record 9 hours of vacation time. If they took the Thursday of Week Two off I'd mark down 8 hours (since (9*5)+(9*3)+8 = 80 and 9*9=81 hours). Furthermore we had a policy, I believe due to IRS rules, where compensation time for salaried employees was not permitted for anyone that had to work on their Friday off. If they had to work it, it was basically unpaid time. We tried to make it as easy as possible, and the folks on that schedule generally liked it very much. But as a supervisor it was a pain in the ass, and during our really busy times it actually contributed to more dissatisfaction at the levels of extra work (time over 40 hours worked) because it interfered with the earned "day off". Eventually we, the management team, decided to eliminate flex time during our busy time... we then eliminated the flex time during our slow time, because what the hell were people doing for 9 hours a day and then getting a day off every other week when we didn't have enough work for them in a standard work week. PHB move, for sure, but flex time from our perspective caused way more problems than it solved.

      We eventually went to a telecommuting option that solved our morale problems. The same people that were users of the flex time, were the ones that flocked to telecommuting. Out of sight, out of mind and if, during the slow time, they did laundry, surfing porn or whatever, it didn't matter. And then during the busy time they were the same ones that worked extra long, typically starting earlier than the office workers and staying later - I think they justified the lack of commuting and signed on/off about the same time they would have left/arrived at home.

      --
      This post brought to you by your friendly neighborhood MBA.
    8. Re:I love it. by friedmud · · Score: 1

      Both of these companies actually shut down for close to two weeks around Christmas / New Year. It's called "winter shutdown".

      If you have the leave (which everyone does) you can use it... otherwise you have to take time off without pay (or work something out with your manager). Note that I've never heard of anyone having to take time off without pay.

      So basically they realize that everyone is going to take off... so they might as well just shut the place down.

      Again... these are research laboratories though... I don't really see this happening in the "normal" customer driven world...

      Friedmud

    9. Re:I love it. by QuantumPion · · Score: 1

      Other benefits to 9/80 are that you can take a week vacation on the friday off week if there is a monday holiday (like the upcoming MLK) and only use three days of vacation. And if a holiday is on your friday off, you get a floating holiday which is just an extra vacation day you can use whenever you want.

    10. Re:I love it. by SeaFox · · Score: 1

      2) Because of the increased rest on a three-day weekend, people use less vacation time, resulting in the office being virtually deserted in December.

      Is it that hard for your company to simply limit the number of people who can be on vacation at any one time?

    11. Re:I love it. by LordKronos · · Score: 1

      1) When a customer comes in, and we have to come in on our day off

      Well what do you do if a customer tries to come in at 3AM and finds you are not there? I'm guessing you just say "sorry, but that's not part of our regular hours". What do you do if the customer comes in during regular hours and you were out with pneumonia, or are busy all day dealing with another customer who happened to come in the same day? I assume your company says "sorry, but he's not available today...can I get someone else to help you, or would you like him to call you tomorrow?"

      2) Because of the increased rest on a three-day weekend, people use less vacation time, resulting in the office being virtually deserted in December.

      Simple solution....limit how many people can be off at once (first requested, first granted). When I want to take off a popular time like Thanksgiving or Christmas week, my manager checks the schedule to see whos off, makes sure my absense won't leave a gap in covered services, and then grants or rejects accordingly.

      The truth is, I'm very rarely rejected in my request (in fact, I don't think in all the years that I have actually had a request rejected). We get tons of vacation time...about 5 weeks/year, and we are allowed to carry over up to 10 weeks. That's a lot of time, but it usually doesn't result in everyone taking off those times despite a number of people carrying over the max. Instead, what you will find is that people take off random entire weeks throughout the year, to sit home and relax. Or they will take off every other friday. Or maybe a monday/tuesday once per month. The problem really does mostly solve itself, but you can still put those limitations in place anyway, just in case.

  20. As long as you DO get the days off... by timmarhy · · Score: 1

    it's great as long as those days off ARE your days off and the company doesn't try to find some sneaky way to steal them. i currently work a 100 hour 8 day week, but then i get 6 days off. I find it's fantastic for productivity because longer days are better than lots of short days. it leaves more time to consult with peers and test things. lets face it, 9 - 5 days are a waste, those few extra hours aren't effective as lesure time. on my 6 days off i can really get out and enjoy myself.

    --
    If you mod me down, I will become more powerful than you can imagine....
  21. Seriously... by afabbro · · Score: 5, Funny

    ...this is what Ask Slashdot has been reduced to? Asking how a rather small change to a weekly schedule might work out?

    Future Ask Slashdots We Can Look Forward To:

    • "I'm thinking of switching from a soft toothbrush to a medium-soft. How has that worked out for you?"
    • "I'm considering moving my sock drawer from the top right to the top left drawer. Can anyone tell me the pros and cons of each arrangement?
    • "We're moving to a new home and are having a family meeting this Thursday to evaluate hanging toilet paper so that the next sheet is over versus under on the roll. I was wondering how other readers have approached this decision?"
    • "I'd like to set my USB to automount to a fixed drive letter when I plug it into my Windows XP laptop. I'm considering J:, P:, and possibly Q:. What do you all think? Should I look at M: as well?"
    --
    Advice: on VPS providers
    1. Re:Seriously... by BadAnalogyGuy · · Score: 5, Funny

      * "I'm thinking of switching from a soft toothbrush to a medium-soft. How has that worked out for you?"
      A: You should really try one of those electric toothbrushes.

      * "I'm considering moving my sock drawer from the top right to the top left drawer. Can anyone tell me the pros and cons of each arrangement?
      A: Have you considered moving the sock drawer to a closet in the bathroom? This would allow you to put on your socks while you are still warm instead of having to freeze your toes off on the way back to the dresser.

      * "We're moving to a new home and are having a family meeting this Thursday to evaluate hanging toilet paper so that the next sheet is over versus under on the roll. I was wondering how other readers have approached this decision?"
      A: Under. What kind of barbarians do you live with?

      * "I'd like to set my USB to automount to a fixed drive letter when I plug it into my Windows XP laptop. I'm considering J:, P:, and possibly Q:. What do you all think? Should I look at M: as well?"
      A: Hello, McFly! Use the U: drive.

      Sheesh!

    2. Re:Seriously... by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      Your post would have been funnier if you just said one of the things you listed.

      Also you should always use a soft-bristled brush, never a hard or medium one, to keep your gums from receding.

    3. Re:Seriously... by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      Oy vey.

      1. whichever is more comfortable as long as you floss. Actually since this is slashdot, as long as you FLOSS
      2. depends on your handedness -- wasted effort if you have to cross your hand over. That's just inefficient. lefty, top left. righty, top right.
      3. over, specially if you have pets. They usually paw downward and you don't want them undoing the roll.
      4. the other guy suggested the U: drive which seems intuitive if it's USB. Or maybe R: for removable media?

      And for the others you were probably too reluctant to ask...yes, 4, not after dinner, and lastly "are you kidding? of course!" Thank you, that is all.

    4. Re:Seriously... by camperdave · · Score: 1

      I keep my left socks in my bottom left drawer, and my right socks in my bottom right drawer. Top left and right drawers are for mittens and gloves.

      --
      When our name is on the back of your car, we're behind you all the way!
    5. Re:Seriously... by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      "I'm thinking of switching from a soft toothbrush to a medium-soft. How has that worked out for you?"

      I tried this once but it turns out that some toothbrushes are not compatible with some mouths, make sure you read the packaging that comes with your medium toothbrush before you attempt to put it in your mouth, it could cost you thousands upon thousands in dental bills.

      "I'm considering moving my sock drawer from the top right to the top left drawer. Can anyone tell me the pros and cons of each arrangement?"

      Are you right handed or left handed?

      "We're moving to a new home and are having a family meeting this Thursday to evaluate hanging toilet paper so that the next sheet is over versus under on the roll. I was wondering how other readers have approached this decision?"

      http://www.freepatentsonline.com/D406975.html
      I constructed this so that everyone could have exactly what they wanted, strangely enough no one is happy...

      "I'd like to set my USB to automount to a fixed drive letter when I plug it into my Windows XP laptop. I'm considering J:, P:, and possibly Q:. What do you all think? Should I look at M: as well?"

      I didn't know you could set USB itself to automount to a drive letter, I always thought this was something you did with drives you plugged into the USB port. I would seriously consider U: as it reminds you of USB itself!

    6. Re:Seriously... by Enderandrew · · Score: 1

      * What is a toothbrush?
      * You own more than one pair of socks?
      * I recycle toilet paper and do my best to use both sides. Anything less would be disrespectful of the environment.
      * What is this Windows XP that you speak of? Does it run Linux?

      --
      http://blindscribblings.com - Tasty pop-culture in conceptual fashion.
    7. Re:Seriously... by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      Where do you keep your condoms?

    8. Re:Seriously... by fm6 · · Score: 1

      How is this a "small change"? I don't know what kind of schedule you work, but getting a day off every two weeks would be a big deal for most of us. As would working longer hours for no extra pay. Both are possible with this kind of schedule gimmick, and neither would have the same impact on your life as using a different kind of toothbrush.

      I'm usually the one writing the "why is this an Ask Slashdot"? And that authorizes me to tell you your post is kinda dumb.

    9. Re:Seriously... by gsmalleus · · Score: 1

      Future Ask Slashdots We Can Look Forward To:

      * "I'm thinking of switching from a soft toothbrush to a medium-soft. How has that worked out for you?"
      * "I'm considering moving my sock drawer from the top right to the top left drawer. Can anyone tell me the pros and cons of each arrangement?
      * "We're moving to a new home and are having a family meeting this Thursday to evaluate hanging toilet paper so that the next sheet is over versus under on the roll. I was wondering how other readers have approached this decision?"
      * "I'd like to set my USB to automount to a fixed drive letter when I plug it into my Windows XP laptop. I'm considering J:, P:, and possibly Q:. What do you all think? Should I look at M: as well?"

      Now seriously I have come into contact with all of these questions in the past 6 months. Let me also add my opinion on such matters.

      1. Medium-soft tooth brushes are not ADA approved. Stick with the soft.
      2. I recently moved my sock drawer to the top right and I could not be happier. I also recently switched from tighty whiteys to briefs and would recommend them highly. Those are kept in my top left drawer.
      3. I recently moved to a new home, all bathrooms have the toilet paper hung in an over-the-top fashion. I am the man of the house and will not have my toilet paper hung any other way.
      4. I felt something was missing when floppies were no longer needed. I mount mine as the B: drive. Also consider T: for Thumdrive, U: for USB or F: for Flash. Avoid Q: at all costs.

    10. Re:Seriously... by Aladrin · · Score: 5, Insightful

      Under!? Over! It's closer and easier to get to! When it's under, it's right against the wall and harder to grab at. Plus, it's easier to roll down than up, so if you can't see the end, you can get it easier.

      Seriously, what's this world coming to?

      --
      "If you make people think they're thinking, they'll love you; But if you really make them think, they'll hate you." - DM
    11. Re:Seriously... by palndrumm · · Score: 1

      the other guy suggested the U: drive which seems intuitive if it's USB. Or maybe R: for removable media?

      I usually use B: these days. Since USB drives have pretty much taken over from floppies, it makes sense to have them take over their drive letters as well.

    12. Re:Seriously... by daybot · · Score: 1
      • Ask your dentist first, but I'd go straight to medium.
      • It'll confuse you for months. Don't do it!
      • There's only one way: over.
      • Name the drive after what you'll put on it - so 'P' for 'Porn'.

      That was fun. Any more?

    13. Re:Seriously... by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      Seriously, what's this world coming to?

      It's being run by really short people who can't see the top of the roll while sitting down?

    14. Re:Seriously... by John+Hasler · · Score: 1

      > Under!? Over!

      Not if you have cats.

      --
      Warning: this article may contain humor, sarcasm, parody, and perhaps even irony. Read at your own risk.
    15. Re:Seriously... by ishobo · · Score: 1

      1) Consult your dentist. My recommendation is stay soft, switch to electric. When you first get started on the electric, you will still attempt to brush from side to side as it is an ingrained habit. Keep a manual around for power outages and travel needs.

      2) Shelves and baskets are all you ever need. Never have any furniure that cannot be moved by one person.

      3) Over!

      4) Z:

      --
      Slashdot - The great and glorious cluster fuck of Internet wisdom.
    16. Re:Seriously... by Xerolooper · · Score: 1
      • "I'm thinking of switching from a soft toothbrush to a medium-soft. How has that worked out for you?"

      • This is slashdot don't use but carry this one.
      • "I'm considering moving my sock drawer from the top right to the top left drawer. Can anyone tell me the pros and cons of each arrangement?

      • I don't know ask this guy... or not.
      • "We're moving to a new home and are having a family meeting this Thursday to evaluate hanging toilet paper so that the next sheet is over versus under on the roll. I was wondering how other readers have approached this decision?"

      • There's already a site about that. Here. Not that I recommend it.
      • "I'd like to set my USB to automount to a fixed drive letter when I plug it into my Windows XP laptop. I'm considering J:, P:, and possibly Q:. What do you all think? Should I look at M: as well?"

      • Use this. 'USBDLM is a Windows service that gives control over Window's drive letter assignment for USB drives.'
      --
      "The stupid neither forgive nor forget; the naive forgive and forget; the wise forgive but do not forget." -Thomas Szasz
    17. Re:Seriously... by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      "I'd like to set my USB to automount to a fixed drive letter when I plug it into my Windows XP laptop. I'm considering J:, P:, and possibly Q:. What do you all think? Should I look at M: as well?"

      Always go with the ones that are emoticons. O:, X:, etc

    18. Re:Seriously... by euxneks · · Score: 1

      Seriously? Ever hear of a door? Or maybe... I dunno... training your cat? Contrary to popular belief you can train your cat.

      --
      in girum imus nocte et consumimur igni
    19. Re:Seriously... by alklein · · Score: 1

      * "We're moving to a new home and are having a family meeting this Thursday to evaluate hanging toilet paper so that the next sheet is over versus under on the roll. I was wondering how other readers have approached this decision?" A: Under. What kind of barbarians do you live with?

      No! Toilet paper belongs over the top, not under the roll.

      --
      -- Adam L. Klein
    20. Re:Seriously... by nEoN+nOoDlE · · Score: 1

      Wow. You're modded up as funny but your answers to those joke questions are pretty insightful. Too bad I don't have mod points. Now if you'll excuse me, I have to move my sock drawer.

      --
      Don't trust a bull's horn, a doberman's tooth, a runaway horse or me.
    21. Re:Seriously... by Nimey · · Score: 1

      Electric toothbrushes suck. I can't use them because they tickle, and besides, the vibrations make it feel like I'm sucking on a sex toy.

      --
      Hail Eris, full of mischief...

      E pluribus sanguinem
    22. Re:Seriously... by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      Under!? Over! It's closer and easier to get to! When it's under, it's right against the wall and harder to grab at. Plus, it's easier to roll down than up, so if you can't see the end, you can get it easier.

      Seriously, what's this world coming to?

      You clearly don't have kids... they naturally love spinning the toilet paper roll and they always spin down...

    23. Re:Seriously... by Trillian_1138 · · Score: 1

      Electric toothbrushes suck. I can't use them because they tickle, and besides, the vibrations make it feel like I'm sucking on a sex toy.

      Undoing some moderation to post this but I felt I should reply to the one post in this discussion I could comment knowledgeably on...

      Yes, they tickle at first. For about a week, for most people. After that, you stop noticing it. When I first switched from a normal toothbrush to a cheapy electric, it took a week or so for me to be able to do it without cringing horribly. Likewise, when I switched from the cheapy to a nicer one (recommended by my dentist) it took another week or so until it didn't feel tickly and obnoxious. But now I actually like it - it makes my mouth feel cleaner than non-electric brushes ever did - and my dentist says my teeth are better.

      -Trillian

      PS - I love slashdot precisely because a discussion on work schedules leads logically to a discussion on electric versus non-electric toothbrushes.

      PPS - Can't help you with the sex toy issue. That's one you'll have to deal with on your own. Or with a consenting partner.

    24. Re:Seriously... by mabhatter654 · · Score: 1

      do we avoid the Q: drive as the "queer drive"...(opposed to strange or charmed... not homosexual) or are you making an IBM joke that on IBM systems you never name anything with a Q because it's "special".

    25. Re:Seriously... by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      Ahhh, but you overlooked the ability to control the rate of release better with under... one hand throttling the release rate of the roll, and the other pulling down...

      This should be in a separate thread. It would probably elicit more opinions than the joys of Vista.

    26. Re:Seriously... by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      Actually, I'm really glad this is here. We're discussing this at my office right now. I like to see what other Slashdotters who've dealt with this have to say about it.

    27. Re:Seriously... by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      Under? Over? Neither! Set it on the counter and pick it up when you want TP.

      Bonus: You'll never accidentally pee on the roll when you come in drunk (unless you have a habit of peeing in the sink).

      Seriously...

    28. Re:Seriously... by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      I have wondered why somebody prefer under vs. over. For the reasons you stated, I've always liked it over. However, after having small kids, I realized how easy they could bat it and have the whole roll empty in record time (fun, fun, fun!). Still keeping it over though.

    29. Re:Seriously... by blantonl · · Score: 1

      What about wiping?!?

      Hell, who gives a crap how you pull the sheet of paper off the roll, how do you use it?

      • Do you reach under?
      • Do you reach around?
      --
      Lindsay Blanton
      RadioReference.com
    30. Re:Seriously... by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      I don't care how you pull the paper off the roll, but my pappy always taught me to eat 3 squares/day, so I don't ever have to wipe.

    31. Re:Seriously... by gsmalleus · · Score: 1

      Frankly, I suspect that it may lead to Q-Fever.

    32. Re:Seriously... by machine321 · · Score: 1

      Under!? Over! It's closer and easier to get to!

      You obviously do not own a cat.

    33. Re:Seriously... by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      Last I checked, you can roll the tp "down" no matter which way it hangs. I pity you and your strange universe, it must be hard fighting gravity on such a regular basis.

    34. Re:Seriously... by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      I'm thinking of switching from a soft toothbrush to a medium-soft. How has that worked out for you?

      I switched from soft to medium and liked the results so much that I prematurely skipped to the only "firm" I could find... and never looked back!

    35. Re:Seriously... by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      The Hitachi Magic Wand is for external use only.

    36. Re:Seriously... by LordKronos · · Score: 1

      Or maybe it's being run by people who just reinstalled their toilet paper hold up really high because the idea of turning the roll around never occurred to them.

    37. Re:Seriously... by Aladrin · · Score: 1

      I do own a cat, actually. Used to have 2. Neither have ever messed with my toilet paper.

      --
      "If you make people think they're thinking, they'll love you; But if you really make them think, they'll hate you." - DM
    38. Re:Seriously... by LanMan04 · · Score: 1

      Ha! We have 2 cats and they've never unrolled the TP.

      On the other hand, we used to have a miniature schnauzer who was notorious for unrolling half the roll, stuffing most of it in his mouth, transporting it under the dining room table, and eating most the wad. Stupid dogs, cats FTW.

      --
      With the first link, the chain is forged.
    39. Re:Seriously... by Drogo007 · · Score: 1

      Truly spoken like someone who's never had an 18-month old toddler in the house (or a cat for that matter)

      Over results in lots of wasted toilet paper as that's the easiest direction for the toddler or cat to turn it.

      Under FTW :)

    40. Re:Seriously... by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      Regardless of personal preference, parents with toddlers choose "under".

    41. Re:Seriously... by frank_adrian314159 · · Score: 1

      And when we're done tackling this and the Israel-Palestine issue, we'll move on to emacs-vi.

      --
      That is all.
    42. Re:Seriously... by Jarik+C-Bol · · Score: 1

      wait, you have left and right socks? are they the ones with the individual toes?

      --
      I've decided to Diversify my Holdings. I've divided my cash between my left and right pockets, instead of all in one.
    43. Re:Seriously... by Hognoxious · · Score: 1

      hanging toilet paper so that the next sheet is over versus under on the roll.

      At work we avoid that argument because we have those where the axle sticks straight out from the wall. So we argue about front vs back instead.

      I'd like to set my USB to automount to a fixed drive letter when I plug it into my Windows XP laptop

      If there's a way to get a particular device to always mount as the same letter, rather than in the sequence you connect them I'd like to know it.

      --
      Confucius say, "Find worm in apple - bad. Find half a worm - worse."
    44. Re:Seriously... by Hognoxious · · Score: 1

      On the shelf at the pharmacy. Don't we all?

      --
      Confucius say, "Find worm in apple - bad. Find half a worm - worse."
    45. Re:Seriously... by afabbro · · Score: 1
      • Right-click on My Computer and click Manage
      • Select Disk Management on the left
      • Right-click on the volume in the lower-right panel and select "Change Drive Letter and Paths"
      --
      Advice: on VPS providers
    46. Re:Seriously... by ivan256 · · Score: 1

      For the entire decade of the '80s, my grandfather alternated the direction of the toilet paper, and kept a graph of how long each roll lasted. He asserted that if you used the "under" method you took one fewer sheet each time, and thus saved paper. What he proved was that he was a little nuts.

    47. Re:Seriously... by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      Seems at least they have not yet tried switching the toilet paper and the toothbrushes. I imagine the hard bristles would hurt.

  22. "Summer Hours" by gEvil+(beta) · · Score: 2, Informative

    My employer implemented a schedule like this last summer. They're planning on doing it again for 4 or 5 months starting in March or April. It's really pretty nice. Basically, while they're in effect you need to work an extra hour each day. How you do this is up to you. I ended up splitting the difference--get in 30 minutes early and stay 30 minutes longer. Since it was company-wide all the meeting schedules were adapted pretty quickly. It's worth it to have a 3-day weekend every other weekend. Makes setting up trips/vacations a whole lot easier.

    --
    This guy's the limit!
    1. Re:"Summer Hours" by ziah · · Score: 1

      Flame fish catcher - I thought it was a very valid question to ask.

    2. Re:"Summer Hours" by ziah · · Score: 1

      haha sorry wrong comment to respond to, meant this for one comment up

      Feel free to delete both of them moderators.

    3. Re:"Summer Hours" by gEvil+(beta) · · Score: 2, Funny

      Feel free to delete both of them moderators.

      Wow! You really are new here, aren't you?

      --
      This guy's the limit!
  23. Works Great! by dukeluke · · Score: 1

    My father-in-law does this for the Seattle Parks Department. He still winds up taking a few crisis phone calls. But, he manages to do all the coordination via cell phone and only in an extremely rare occasion does he have to go in himself. The way I see it, and him, it's very hard to just put in 8 hrs a day. And since you probably aren't paid overtime, being rewarded with a day off for putting in 9 - 9's is pretty nice.

  24. I work that. by Ouchie · · Score: 2, Interesting

    I work the 9/80 schedule but if you can get them to let you take every other Monday or better yet every other Wednesday. You can get a whole lot more done on a Wednesday. No lines at the bank, grocery store, etc. Unless you decide to just stay up all night Tuesday playing Halo then sleeping till 4 in the afternoon.

    --
    "Of all the things I've lost, I miss my mind the most." ~Ozzy Osborne
  25. Three day weekends!!! by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

    It is really nice to have every other Friday off, however, if you have to work overtime to get your regular job functions done than it is probably not so great. You'll be really worn out by the time your three day weekend rolls around. It is a three day weekend though!

    You should check the detail of what happens when a holiday falls on your off day though.

    Good Luck!

    1. Re:Three day weekends!!! by LVSlushdat · · Score: 1

      What's nice is when your friday off falls before a monday holiday... Like the upcoming MLK day, that since I work for a gov contractor, we get, and since the friday before is my friday off!!!! Can you say 4 DAY WEEKEND??? (I knew you could!!)

      --
      THANK YOU, Edward Snowden!! Americans owe you a debt of gratitude (whether they know it or not..)
  26. Sound better then 5/80 by colinmcnamara · · Score: 2, Insightful

    Seriously though, does anybody actually work only 40 hours a week?

    --
    Colin McNamara - CCIE #18233 "The difficult we do immediately, the impossible just takes a little longer"
    1. Re:Sound better then 5/80 by seebs · · Score: 2, Informative

      Most of the time. (Not including extracurricular stuff, I do some consulting.)

      I'll push it a bit for a release date, but apart from that, I don't do much over 40 hours of work. I might spend an evening logged into IRC in case anyone needs anything, but then, I might take an hour off to play with my cat.

      The work gets done, we meet turnaround time commitments, the managers are happy.

      --
      My blog: http://www.seebs.net/log/ --- My iPhone/iPad app: http://www.seebs.net/seebsfrac/
    2. Re:Sound better then 5/80 by fm6 · · Score: 1

      People who are paid by the hour do. Or if they don't, they get overtime.

      But you mean, "people like us". But what "us" do you mean? I'm sure there are a lot of hourly workers on Slashdot.

    3. Re:Sound better then 5/80 by YrWrstNtmr · · Score: 4, Insightful

      Seriously though, does anybody actually work only 40 hours a week?

      Apparently, your job sucks.

    4. Re:Sound better then 5/80 by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      not without being paid more ;)

    5. Re:Sound better then 5/80 by sctprog · · Score: 1

      Just because you work more than 40 hours a week doesn't mean your job sucks.

      My company would revolt if we switched to a 40 hour work week.

      As an electrician, we're mostly paid for what we know, not what we do and it's just too lucrative to work 10-12 hour days in the oil patch.

    6. Re:Sound better then 5/80 by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      Can't tell if this is a joke, but if you're serious, you should consider finding a new job. I work 35-40 hours a week and would be burnt out pretty fast if I had to do more on a regular basis. I once left a job because they expected a minimum of 50 (without actually mentioning that requirement to me before hiring me).

    7. Re:Sound better then 5/80 by yabos · · Score: 1

      I work 37.5/wk and make about $50K Canadian per year sitting at a desk all day.

    8. Re:Sound better then 5/80 by arth1 · · Score: 1, Troll

      In many countries, 37.5 hours per week is standard, and anything over that has to be paid overtime for, even if you're salaried. These countries largely overlap with the countries that have higher productivity per worker than the US.

    9. Re:Sound better then 5/80 by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      In many countries, 37.5 hours per week is standard, and anything over that has to be paid overtime for, even if you're salaried. These countries largely overlap with the countries that have higher productivity per worker than the US.

      Source?

      I'm curious what other countries have a higher productivity per worker and a shorter work week.

    10. Re:Sound better then 5/80 by aristotle-dude · · Score: 1

      Seriously though, does anybody actually work only 40 hours a week?

      No, I work about an average of 37.5 hours a week as a salaried developer and have 5 weeks of vacation a year.

      Of course, I live in Canada where they have laws against slave labour.

      --
      Jesus was a compassionate social conservative who called individuals to sin no more.
    11. Re:Sound better then 5/80 by glitch23 · · Score: 1

      Seriously though, does anybody actually work only 40 hours a week?

      For the latter half of last year I was working anywhere from 45-60 hours a week and around the October timeframe I hit 70 a couple times in a single week. Since the second week of December I am now working 40 hour weeks again and sometimes less than that (I fill in with personal time to still get a steady 40 hr worth paycheck). I'm a gov't contractor. The projects for the main contract typically end on fiscal year boundaries (FY ends September 30) and last year the contract itself was supposed to end on October 1 but scope creep on a few projects caused the contract to end in December which still required massive OT. With the next contract's projects' RFPs not coming out that fast so far, work has been back to normal (and yes, there is still work, like documentation). However I'm sure this isn't the case for all gov't Departments.

      --
      this nation, under God, shall have a new birth of freedom. -- Lincoln, Gettysburg Address
    12. Re:Sound better then 5/80 by YrWrstNtmr · · Score: 1

      This is true.
      But the tone I got from the GP was "what??? someone in IT works less than a zillion hours a week? How is that possible?"

      If I got more $$$ for doing 60-70-80 hours a week, I'd probably do it (for a while). As that isn't the case, I'll take the 9/80 and love it.

    13. Re:Sound better then 5/80 by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 2, Funny

      Yeah, stupid American's. I mean the GDP of the US is the same as what ... Ghana. They are all over worked, lazy, and I have never met a productive American. And lastly when is the last time the US has done anything productive. They hardly win any Nobel Prizes anyway. Stupid Americans.

      Viva La [fill in your European Country].

      ---
      Productivity is measured by GDP/Population:
      US GDP: 13.8T / 306M = $45,098
      EU GDP: 16.9T / 491M = $34,419

      Compare the US to EU, do not pick some random country in order to boost your numbers. Otherwise you include North Dekota into the mix and reduce the numbers on the US side.

      Based on this US workers generate more than 25% more per person than Europeans. You do have an extra 2.5 hours to spend every week.

    14. Re:Sound better then 5/80 by theJML · · Score: 1

      Good question.

      I know personally, 44 is what's expected where I am, and where most of my friends are working in the area. (I guess they assume we all need to give 110% of 40). What I've found is that if I come in at 9, I make the managers happy with face time, and everyone else leaves at 5... I end up staying until 7-8 anyway, but I get SO much more done in those last 2-3 hours than I do between 9 and 5 that I almost don't mind. In my case, working a 9/80 would be PERFECT because that's what I do now, just without the friday off. The management would never go to it due to their "Face Time" requirements, even though we're all software coders, and would end up doing a better job working from home anyway.

      But I'm not bitter...

      --
      -=JML=-
    15. Re:Sound better then 5/80 by Nimey · · Score: 1

      Aye. 8a to 4:30p, Monday through Friday, with an hour for lunch each day. Only downside is the hour-long commute, each way.

      --
      Hail Eris, full of mischief...

      E pluribus sanguinem
    16. Re:Sound better then 5/80 by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      I do. Both in my current position, and my last position. In my last position I was an applications programmer, hated the job because it was simply different versions of the same app each time, and so I worked no more than 40 hours per week.

      In my current position, it's possible I'll need to work more than 40 hours at some point, but they've got things set up so well -- and so admin friendly -- that the only time it's going to be an issue is when hardware fails.

      Don't accept that you must work some large number of hours per week every week. Maybe in this economy, yeah, I guess, simply because unless you're in a very large city it's going to be difficult to find a decent and stable job. But there are companies out there who respect employees and understand that working OT constantly isn't good for either the employee or the company in the long run.

    17. Re:Sound better then 5/80 by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      Seriously though, does anybody actually work only 40 hours a week?

      I used to be on "5/40" schedule, but I would typically get in around 9:30am and leave around 4:30pm... now I'm on a "9/80", still get in around 9:30am, and leave at about 5:30pm.

      So now, I almost work 40 hours, every other week.

    18. Re:Sound better then 5/80 by W2k · · Score: 1

      I'm a software developer at a smallish dev shop in Sweden. I work for 40 hrs/week, period. There is occasionally overtime, but so far it's always been voluntary, and we get paid for it (or compensated with additional time off). I've five weeks paid vacation each year.

      Based on what I read on Slashdot in threads like these, these seem like great working conditions, though I've always had the impression they're pretty standard. OTOH, we don't get time to work on our own projects or anything like that, which I've always wanted to have.

      --
      Quality, performance, value; you get only two, and you don't always get to pick.
    19. Re:Sound better then 5/80 by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      The vast majority of IT workers* I have met in the UK only work 37.5 hours a week.

      This includes me unless I am on call, but I do get paid an on call allowance for the period & overtime if I actually get called out.

      *Except contractors, the hourly charging money grabbing buggers :)

    20. Re:Sound better then 5/80 by m50d · · Score: 1

      GDP is not a fair measure to compare with, because it assumes everything not paid for is worthless. Enjoy paying for your healthcare.

      --
      I am trolling
    21. Re:Sound better then 5/80 by sakari · · Score: 1

      My average work week is ~35 hours, sometimes longer, sometimes shorter. Made possible by no time tracking, boss on a different continent and getting the job done when needed and not hanging around the office when nothing to do.

      At my last job I used to work 8hrs everyday with timetracking etc, but that really sucked also counting the 2 hours I travelled everyday with public transportation to my job.

      Currently I like my job as I can leave when I feel like it and come when I feel like it.

    22. Re:Sound better then 5/80 by Ingcuervo · · Score: 1

      do you mean that my 5/80 is not the world wide standar as my boss told me? I tought he was happy about something when he opened a good wine bottle an cheered with CFO just after I signed my contract!!!

    23. Re:Sound better then 5/80 by arth1 · · Score: 1

      Productivity is measured by GDP/Population

      That's one way of calculating it, but unfortunately not a very good one. The GDP includes income that wasn't created by work. For some countries, that's a quite large part of the GDP.

      Also, monetizing productivity can be misleading. Obligatory car analogy follows:
      If an American factory needs 5,000 people to produce 1000 cars in a month, and a factory elsewhere can do the same with 3,000 people, you'd think that the latter has higher productivity. But the American car might /sell/ for twice as much, and thus the "productivity" figures gets inflated.

    24. Re:Sound better then 5/80 by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      Hourly employees when the overtime budget is tight....

      But seriously, I work close to 40, sometimes a bit over (depends on the week). But there are people who do leave after 8 hours, no matter what.

      Anonymous because I should be working!

    25. Re:Sound better then 5/80 by thesandtiger · · Score: 1

      I do, but I'm in academia, so that's not unusual. Actually, it's unusual for me to work more than 35/wk now that I'm done with the student grind. Add to that the ridonkulous vacation and benefits (why, yes, I *do* have over 40 paid days off per year, fully employer funded health-care, matched retirement funds, and I get free travel to some pretty nice locations every month or two [Puerto Rico in December, this month New Orleans, Alabama in February which is nice because I'm in Illinois and it'll be fucking cold then] and so on).... And, of course, there's getting to spend a lot of my time working on things I find really interested in and getting to work with (often) very intelligent people to try to figure out things that nobody else knows.

      On the other hand, the pay is about what you'd expect for a job that gives you essentially 2 work-months of vacation a year, I have to deal with some incredibly huge egos, upward mobility requires advanced degrees/ass kissing/massive genius/absolute ruthlessness/incredible luck/a combination of all the above, and the work I make *must* be of very high quality all the time because it's under huge scrutiny and once you get a reputation for being a fuck-up it's not very easy to undo it even if you move to a different university.

      For me it works because the plusses are what I want and the minuses are things I seem to be constitutionally suited to dealing with.

      Sorry, I got carried away :) I just love my job!

      --
      Since I can't tell them apart, I treat all ACs as the same person.
  27. It was great by Jastiv · · Score: 1

    My spouse had a work schedule like that. It was great, him actually being home and eating right instead of keeping weird hours, coming home at 3 am and eating junk food at work. I remember having Friday off as being a great day for him to run errands and go to doctors appointments. The down side is the company he had that work schedule at had a very mainstream sort of culture and didn't appreciate his unique ways of thinking. They eventually got rid of him when they got rid of a whole bunch of people due to not getting a contract.

  28. Kinda O/T but... by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

    I remember one job where, despite being salaried, I got docked 1/2 day pay for leaving at noon... the fact that I worked the whole previous day and through the entire night to avert a crisis of someone else's making and meet a deadline was irrelevant.

    At some point you WILL work WITHOUT being paid for it.

    1. Re:Kinda O/T but... by timmarhy · · Score: 1

      really, so how many hours of /. time should the company dock you for? seriously as long as there is give and take flexible working hours are the way to go.

      --
      If you mod me down, I will become more powerful than you can imagine....
  29. 9x80's are nice by Grendol · · Score: 1
    It definitely has it's nice points. With the three day weekend every other week, usage of vacation time is more efficient. It gives a weekday during which you can run business hour errands , and if a project is in an emergency, you can squeeze in some extra time to complete things. It is also a nice thing for me as a parent to use the time to go on a lunch date with my wife while the kid is at daycare. Since I consult, I see several schedules, and I like the 9x80s better than most. 4x10's seem too long some days and the regular 8 hour day schedule lacks the nice 3 day weekend.

    I hope this schedule works out for you, as everybody's life is different, but I suspect you will find it a nice change.

    At my first exposure to the 9x80's schedule the company split into two shifts with half of the company having one Friday off, and the other half having the other. While this may complicate holiday with vacations sometimes, having Fridays with only half the people there made for a more peaceful and productive Friday. But not all companies will split like that.

  30. No complaints here by Colem · · Score: 1

    Our company is on a "nine nine's" system for IT, where we work 9 9-hour days, and have the 10th off. Combined with a telecommute day in the same time period, it works quite well.
    In my group, this seems to be very well respected...Good luck!

  31. 3x12.5 is even better! by Sandman1971 · · Score: 4, Interesting

    I once worked a job that was 3x12.5, and it was great! It was overnight, and the boss didn't mind if we slept during the downtimes. The staggered schedule also made it that we had a full 7 days straight off every third week (followed by 6x12.5 in 7 days, that was a bit of a killer). Though being overnight in made family life hell for 3 days, the time off more than made up for it.

    --
    It's better to burn out than to fade away
    1. Re:3x12.5 is even better! by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      Life in a call center, priceless.

    2. Re:3x12.5 is even better! by smaddox · · Score: 1

      Were you a pilot? That's pretty much the schedule.

    3. Re:3x12.5 is even better! by spiracle · · Score: 1

      In my day, we did 2 by 18! And we were grateful if we were given a rock to chew on at break times!

  32. 9/80 works really well by GIL_Dude · · Score: 3, Informative

    I've worked 9/80 for the last 13 years or more. I also recently became a supervisor and am still working 9/80 and most of my employees do as well. In our company (68,000 employees total), it is generally implemented as schedule a, b, c, d (where a and b are opposite Friday's and c and d are opposite Monday's. Way back when I did LAN Admin work (Novell back then), Monday's were "password reset day" so I chose one of the Monday off schedules. On my "Monday on" I work from home - so I only drive in 4 days a week.

    I don't think I would ever want to go back to a 5 day a week schedule - 9/80 is just so much better.

    You also asked about whether the company respect those days off. In general they do really well with it. It is normally the employee that makes most decisions about "oh, we have some vendors coming in Monday - I will come in and just take the following Monday instead." There is almost never a "we need you to give up your day off" (I have rarely ever even heard of this happening and it certainly never happened to me).

    1. Re:9/80 works really well by bipbop · · Score: 1

      68K employees, eh? My company settled for the cheaper 6502 employees, but they just don't work as hard ;-(

  33. 90% of the employees voluntarily choose 9/80 by EMB+Numbers · · Score: 4, Interesting

    My employer offers optional 9/80 schedules. I estimate that 90% of the employees voluntarily choose 9/80. It is great to have at lest 26 three day weekends every year. When holidays fall on Monday, you may get a 4 day weekend.

    The off-Friday is well respected by management. The managers generally don't come in either.

    An off-Friday is a great time for banking, appointments, the start of vacation, volunteering in your kids' school, etc.

    Most people who choose the 5/40 schedule do so because they need to be home early to meet kids at the school bus or because the spouse works a regular schedule and they want to match schedules.

    Flexibility is always good. We have core hours from 10:00 to 3:00. Some people come in very early and leave at 3:00 to minimize the time kids are home alone. It can save a lot of child care costs. Others like me regularly come in at 10:00 and leave at 7:00.

  34. Go for it. by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

    I work a 9/80 schedule at my current job and I like it overall. My company definitely honors the day off (it's a company-wide 9/80 policy, so everyone is out of office on off-Fridays). The nice thing about my company that helps to curb manager abuse in such a situation is that we get paid overtime for anything more than five hours in one week. It does a lot to keep the managers in check so that they only call you in when it's crunch time and they direly need you.

    During the week I've found that losing an hour (between 4:30 and 5:30 for me) has not really affected my daily life. I still have plenty of time after work. The off-Friday on the other hand is like a god-send. I get all of my errands done on off-Friday when all normal businesses are still open. It's also very nice having a three-day weekend every other week. Like another poster mentioned, the Fridays that I do work are paydays, so it makes that 44-hour week (plus whatever overtime) a little sweeter.

    Trust me though, the nine-hour day will feel much longer than the eight-hour day. If you're already consistently working overtime you might not notice a big difference, but sometimes I feel like the day just drags on a bit. All-in-all though, I would suggest that you go for it. I'm loving it.

  35. It was fantastic by Slop121 · · Score: 1

    I wish I could still have the schedule. It was well known that it wasn't a day that you were going to be there, so no one interfered. They knew if you had to come in that it would likely be repaid in the near future.

  36. Federal Gov't? by whitelabrat · · Score: 1

    A lot of Federal employees have a 9/80 option. It works well because it puts less stress on the mass transit and roads in the area. I always notice that its easier getting around town on Fridays here in DC.

    For IT folks I don't think its a good option. Even though I have a 9/80 option and a telecommute option, my work culture where I am prefers warm bodies in chairs. I'm a sysadmin though, and people expect me to be able to yank out parts and cables or whatever on a moments notice.

    1. Re:Federal Gov't? by Neanderthal+Ninny · · Score: 1

      Like being an active duty personnel in the Armed Forces.
      Also firepersonel (nee firemen) have the same type of schedule.
      If you have an family this will suck.

  37. Programmers can only work 5 hours a day by presidenteloco · · Score: 1

    And the rest is either d*f*ing or sl*shd*ting, or informal socializing sometimes called status meetings, no matter what your punch clock says. It's connected to the levels of neurotransmitter chemicals in your brain, which run down throughout the day and faster with more or deeper thinking (also faster with coffee or jolt.).

    I for one would dread the quality of design or software produced by regular 10-hour day programmers.

    I was pleased to see 37 signals uses 4 days a week. Maybe you could recuperate enough on that schedule to work slightly longer productive cores of your creative day (maybe 6 or 7 hours?)

    --

    Where are we going and why are we in a handbasket?
    1. Re:Programmers can only work 5 hours a day by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      I call bullshit. Source?

    2. Re:Programmers can only work 5 hours a day by BertieBaggio · · Score: 1

      d*f*ing

      Dwarf Fortressing?

      --
      If all you have is a grenade, pretty soon every problem looks like a foxhole -- MightyYar
  38. 9/80 costs me MORE in gasoline by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

    ... because of all the road trips we take on 3-day weekends. But that's a lot more fun than commuting on that 10th day.

    I very much like 9/80. It gets complicated with holidays...

  39. It depends, but mostly good. by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

    It depends on the work being done and the company culture.

    Doing four nine hour days with fridays being alternately eight hour days and days off is nice. If you are in an area where many people have long commutes it puts them a bit more out of rush hour for the drive and people have one less day of commuting. I worked one place where we did this and it was great for people because they had long long commutes, that they were able to get out of once every other week.
    It is also very nice for planning vacations since you have a lot of three day weekends. It makes it very easy to schedule doctor/dentist/car appointments too.
    On the downside if there is something you need to do that requires input from someone else you are out of luck on Fridays. If you have a lot of team-based projects it may not work so well. Similarly you can't have meetings for one fifth of the work week (on the upside your friday on is meeting free typically). The extra hour is rough, and there may be some hard trade offs there depending on when you get home and what you need to get done.
    There is also potential for bad moral if one 'team' thinks that the other 'team' has better friday off schedules because of holidays.

    Essentially it is a nice feature, but be aware of how it impacts you.

  40. Trade-offs of a 9/80 work week by shdragon · · Score: 4, Informative

    The company I work for just switched to a 9/80 a few months ago. We're a little different since we have a schedule A and a schedule B, so only 1/2 the people are at work any given Friday. It's had some ups & downs.

    Here's what I see as the positives:
    1. Having a 4 day work week every other week rocks!
    2. Getting paid on the Friday where I work 5 days makes it all the more bearable.
    3. Easier to get chores, errands done since everyone else is at work.
    4. I get more work done during the last hour of every 9 hour day than any other hour.

    Here's the negatives:
    1. It's a PITA to schedule meetings.
    2. Sometimes I travel and it seems to always fall on a week where I'm supposed to be off that Friday.
    3. Customers are annoyed because they're not on the same schedule and aren't understanding that it won't be until Monday before I get back to them.
    4. I feel like I have less time to get work done since every other week I only work 4 days.
    5. More free time means I spend more money.
    6. Getting to work while it's dark & leaving when it's dark is depressing.

    --
    "...we dont care about the economics; we just want to be able to hack great stuff."
    1. Re:Trade-offs of a 9/80 work week by Feynman · · Score: 1

      6. Getting to work while it's dark & leaving when it's dark is depressing.

      In the upper Midwest, this seems to be par for the course during the winter.

    2. Re:Trade-offs of a 9/80 work week by DreamsAreOkToo · · Score: 1

      6. Getting to work while it's dark & leaving when it's dark is depressing.

      In the upper Midwest, this seems to be par for the course during the winter.

      And here in Minnesota, it's depressing, too.

    3. Re:Trade-offs of a 9/80 work week by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      6. Getting to work while it's dark & leaving when it's dark is depressing.

      LOL, welcome to anywhere north of Kansas...

    4. Re:Trade-offs of a 9/80 work week by ivan256 · · Score: 1

      Getting paid on the Friday where I work 5 days makes it all the more bearable

      You're the second person in the thread to say this.

      Why does it matter which of the Fridays you get paid on? As long as ((money in) >= (money out)) over any reasonable length of time greater than two weeks, shouldn't it all come out the same at the end?

    5. Re:Trade-offs of a 9/80 work week by shdragon · · Score: 1
      Why does it matter which of the Fridays you get paid on? As long as ((money in) >= (money out)) over any reasonable length of time greater than two weeks, shouldn't it all come out the same at the end?

      It's not a function of payables vs. receivables. It's a function of happiness. Seeing more money in your account than the day before should make one happy. ;)

      --
      "...we dont care about the economics; we just want to be able to hack great stuff."
  41. I work 9/80 by tknd · · Score: 4, Insightful

    Pros:

    • On the short weeks you can get away with only charging 36 hours of vacation if you want to take the week off.
    • The off friday is convenient for getting errands done (dry cleaning) or appointments (dentist) that normally can't be done outside of business hours.
    • You save some money and time commuting 9 days instead of 10
    • For certain holidays you end up with really short weeks or really long weekends
    • If you find that you're consistently working more than 8 hours, you will actually work less since M-Th is usually 9 hours so you're not always getting screwed by being at the office late as much as you would with only 8 hour days.
    • Every other thursday feels like friday.
    • The off friday is a good excuse to not show up because you can always say "well no one is going to be at the office so I can't get work done."

    Cons:

    • The off friday is a good excuse to have you come in and do things that normally can't be done when everyone else is in the office (might be a pro in some cases since you wouldn't have to come in on the weekend.)
    • Though you have friday off, most other people are at work so you can't just "hang out" during the day.
    • The extra hour for M-Th takes some getting used to; you may find you have zero time left over to do anything on 9 hour days.
    • If you have regular schedules synced with schools (pick up kids and such), the off friday can be awkward.
    • The long weeks feel really long.
    • If you need a random day off, you'll end up charging 9 hours instead of 8.

    9/80 is best when paired with a flex time schedule so that you can move around hours when you need to. The off friday gives you an option to tell your boss "i'll work more these days or just come in friday" if you want to take a different day off instead of the off friday. Coming in on the off friday usually means the office is dead. That can be good and bad. Some people like not having anyone around because they normally get interrupted too much when people are at the office. Other people hate it because there's nobody else to kick the bucket with.

    If you find you are normally working more than 8 hours everyday, 9/80 is actually a good option because you will have a decent excuse for not coming in on the off fridays and you will have to work 9 hours most days anyway. If you find you are working even on the weekends, 9/80 will have no impact on your hours.

    As a single guy, I prefer 9/80. But I do know some family types that prefer the 5/40 since they really need the consistent 8 hour days to keep their family schedules synced. At first you will loath the 9 hour days because that extra hour is bigger than it looks. After a while though 9 hours will seem like nothing and the working fridays will seem really short.

    1. Re:I work 9/80 by DwySteve · · Score: 1
      I work a 9/80 and have for 1.5 years. My reactions:

      Pros:

      • On the short weeks you can get away with only charging 36 hours of vacation if you want to take the week off.

      I have not been so lucky - almost every vacation I've taken has worked out to not occur on an off-week.

      The off friday is convenient for getting errands done (dry cleaning) or appointments (dentist) that normally can't be done outside of business hours.

      This is true UNLESS you work in an area where lots of people work a 9/80 - places will be packed on the off Friday (good luck getting doctors appointments as everyone had the same 'good idea' you did...)

      For certain holidays you end up with really short weeks or really long weekends

      YMMV, my company has a 9/80 and that has occurred, but they've also scheduled us to work on a Saturday to offset the holidays.

      Every other thursday feels like friday.

      Yeah, this is truly awesome

      Cons:

      • The extra hour for M-Th takes some getting used to; you may find you have zero time left over to do anything on 9 hour days.

      This is key: Be prepared to choose between working out and eating well and sleeping past 6AM. Chances are you will only be able to do two of those at best (it helps not to be single).

      The long weeks feel really long.

      If you need a random day off, you'll end up charging 9 hours instead of 8.

      Also a big problem. For some reason, of the three weddings my wife and I went to last year, no one saw fit to schedule them on a weekend with an off Friday. That didn't work well for my vacation balance.

      9/80 is best when paired with a flex time schedule so that you can move around hours when you need to.

      Massive agree, I'd even say that the 9/80 schedule isn't very useful without this.

      My general impression of the 9/80 for 1.5 years is that it's good but the main detriment is that your weekdays aren't very long and you can't fit a lot into them. Sometimes it can be awkward with scheduling to have Thursday be your 'Friday' one week and Friday the next, but it's generally good.

      --
      http://angryee.blogspot.com
    2. Re:I work 9/80 by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      The only negative I have found with the 9/80 schedule is when everyone discovers that you have every other Friday off you become targeted as errand guy. Others love to fill your schedule for you. =)

    3. Re:I work 9/80 by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      Other people hate it because there's nobody else to kick the bucket with.

      I'm pleased to not work with you.

    4. Re:I work 9/80 by jedwidz · · Score: 1

      > Other people hate it because there's nobody else to kick the bucket with.

      If you're all feeling like topping yourselves, best to take the day off!

  42. Started last March... it is awesome by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

    I took a new job back in March at a company on the 9/80 schedule. It's really awesome. It's hard to imagine going back to a company that doesn't do it -- it would definitely take a lot to lure me away from my current job.

    That said, I worked pretty much every "off-Friday" between October and December, although I probably only worked one or two the earlier part of the year. It's largely dependent on budget and schedule for us. My wife is having a baby in May, so I will have a built in excuse to not work on them. ("Sorry... I don't have day care scheduled for tomorrow.")

    Whether the Fridays off are respected depends mostly on your direct supervisor and your peers, and how staunchly you're willing to defend it. (You don't want to be "that guy" who refuses to show up when everyone else does.) I've been there less than a year, so I'm not one to rock the boat. Some people seem to work all of them while other pretty much refuse to show up unless there's some dire personal deadline they'll miss if they don't show up (which is probably the better way to look at it).

    On the plus side, we got comp time for any off Fridays that we worked which made it easier to deal with on the times that we did have to come in.

    To avoid working on your off Fridays, it's probably good to over-schedule them. "Oh, I wouldn't mind working this Friday, but 4 months ago I booked a long weekend to Cancun since it was supposed to be a day off..." I never got hassled if I didn't show up because I had already made important plans based on the off-Friday schedule (family in town, long weekend trip, etc.)

    Most of the time I don't get too much done on my Fridays off, but it's a great time to handle errands that can only be done during business hours, like trips to the bank or do some tours in the city. Plus it makes it easy to schedule long weekends. (Unfortunately my wife's schedule does not match up with mine, so I have not taken advantage of this aspect as much as I would have liked.) If I had been on this schedule 5 or 10 years ago or had more buddies on the same schedule, I'm sure I'd be out partying on Thursday nights a lot more often.

    I used to get so excited about the occasional long weekend... Memorial Day and Labor Day... now I get two long weekends a month.

  43. I'd rather have 4/36 by trolltalk.com · · Score: 5, Interesting

    I'd rather have 4x9hour days, a 10% cut in pay, and 3 days off every week. (Hey, most of the last 10% is taxes anyway, right). If everyone did this, we could avoid tons of layoffs nationwide, lower energy costs (4 days commuting instead of 5), and 3-day weekends every week ...

    1. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Enderandrew · · Score: 4, Interesting

      The best schedule I ever worked was 12 hour days. I'd work 3 days one week, and 4 days the next week. I always had either 3 or 4 days off.

      A buddy of mine worked a variant of 9/80 schedule. They worked 9 hour days M-Th, and then worked a half day every Friday. Frankly, I'd rather have a full day off every other week.

      --
      http://blindscribblings.com - Tasty pop-culture in conceptual fashion.
    2. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by John+Hasler · · Score: 3, Insightful

      Right. That worked so well in France.

      --
      Warning: this article may contain humor, sarcasm, parody, and perhaps even irony. Read at your own risk.
    3. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      Right. That worked so well in France.

      Oui!

    4. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Opportunist · · Score: 2, Insightful

      That's nice for everyone who's not already working two or even three jobs just to make ends meet. And, surprise, surprise, most of the layoffs are also in the fields where you have unqualified people (who just happen to be also the ones that earn the least).

      --
      We used to have a Bill of Rights. Now, with the rights gone, all we have left is the bill.
    5. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 4, Funny

      My father did the 12 hour 3on/4off/4on/3off for years...He said 12 hour days consisted of...He would show up at 9...Take a 2 hour lunch, well that adds up to 11 and leave at 1...and that adds up to 12!

    6. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Der+PC · · Score: 4, Funny

      I remember working a schedule like that when I was in my teens..

      3 work, 2 off, 2 work, 3 off... something like that...

      *SIGH* the time flew while flipping burgers.....

      --
      This signature is DRM protected. By the DMCA, you are not allowed to counteract or oppose to it.
    7. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by DudeFromMars · · Score: 5, Interesting

      >>(Hey, most of the last 10% is taxes anyway, right)
      Not Right.
      The idea that at a certain point, the govt takes most of your earnings in taxes is an urban legend.
      For anybody working by the hour, there is no "tipping point" where the govt keeps most of each additional dollar - it is just untrue.

      >>If everyone did this (4x9hr days), we could avoid tons of layoffs nationwide.
      A company can avoid layoffs by cutting hours and pay.
      If everybody at every company had their hours and pay cut, their bills remain the same, so the workers' spendable income after covering expenses is either gone or greatly reduced - You have just created a recession.

    8. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      My wife used to work 3/36 - and then 2 days off. (3 days on, 2 days off)

      It was shift work, and she raved about all the days off she got....

    9. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by trolltalk.com · · Score: 3, Interesting

      (Hey, most of the last 10% is taxes anyway, right)

      Not Right.

      Depends on where you work, what deductions you have, and your tax bracket. Come up to Kanuckistan and you'll see just how much higher your marginal tax rate is on the last few hours income each week.

      Also, which is more economically efficient - to pay people a marginal amount to sit around (unemployment - which comes out of taxes, remember), or for everyone to get some extra time off? I'd love a 9/36 w.a 10% pay cut. Between the lower taxes and the cost savings and sheer convenience and higher quality of life, who wouldn't?

    10. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Average · · Score: 4, Informative

      There is no doubt that, cutting back to necessities (as the country may finally be lurching toward), we have a surplus of working capacity. If people *really, really* cut back to needs (rice, beans, 100 warm square feet), we'd have 75%+ unemployment. Tech, mech, and automation meant that we had enough surplus to have more hairdressers and marketers than farmers. The flip side is that we don't need more farmers, even if millions wanted to go back to it.

      As for me, I'm lucky as hell. I'd found the ability to work 30 hours or so a week, with some vacation flexibility, in my nice cheap midwest small town, for slightly under $30k a year. Lucky as all hell to have it, for now. With my degrees and training, I 'should' make $80k or maybe $100k+ on the coasts. Instead, I get time to garden, volunteer, cook, and jam with friends. Awesome and a half. But, of course, it's far less efficient for most companies. Hiring 6 people and pushing them 50 or 60 hours a week is, sadly, much more efficient than having 10 people work 30 to 35. Perhaps shifting certain fixed costs (health care) off the employer might help this become an option for more people?

    11. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Petaris · · Score: 1

      During the summer I switch to working four ten hour days. Its nice as it gives me Fridays off and have a long weekend. :)

      --
      ~Petaris "The world is open. Are you?"
    12. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Libertarian001 · · Score: 1

      I'm currently working 12-hour shifts (plus lunch, so allegedly 13 hours total), 3 days one week and 4 days the next. Anything over 8 is time-and-a-half. I love it. And on the off-chance that I'm asked to work an additional day, well, I'm wage, not salary. I work in semiconductors.

    13. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 5, Funny

      I'm a firefighter. I work 24 on, 48 off. As long as there aren't calls during the night, I get paid to sleep. Relevant to your question? No. Friggin' Awesome schedule anyways? Yes.

    14. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by PitaBred · · Score: 2, Insightful

      And if we started cutting asinine executive compensation for selling off the company's capital to turn a profit that quarter while driving the company into the ground, you wouldn't even have to take that 10% cut.

    15. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by EvanED · · Score: 5, Informative

      If it can knock you down into a lower tax bracket you can come out ahead.

      You will never decrease your tax liability by making less enough to compensate for making less, all other things being equal, even under a system as complex as the US tax code. If you think it can, tax brackets don't work the way I suspect you think they do.

      For instance, suppose in a hypothetical universe the brackets were set up so that $0-$50000 was taxed 0% and $50000+ was taxed 50%. If you made $60,000, people would say they fall into the upper bracket, but that doesn't mean they are paying $30,000 in taxes (which would imply that getting a $10,001 pay cut would increase take home pay by 20 grand). Rather, they pay 50% of the amount of money they make in excess of $50,000, meaning they will pay $5,000.

      Continuing the analogy, if there was another bracket starting at $100,000 with 75% tax, someone making $200,000 would pay:
      * 0% of the first $50,000
      * 50% of the next $50,000 (or $25,000)
      * 75% of the next $100,000 (or $75,000)
      giving a total tax liability of $100,000, rather than the $150,000 they would have to pay if they were paying 75% on everything.

      Now, there are changes to your employment state that can have big consequences. I am a grad student, and am taking up a teaching position this semester. Before I was a research assistant. RAs are exempt from FICA taxes (this is at least true in my state, and I think is common) but as an instructor I won't be, so even though I will be getting a nice raise, I'll also essentially be taking an instant 7.5% pay cut too. There may be something similar going from part time to full time or something like that which would apply. But in any case, if taking a pay cut actually increases your take home pay, it is definitely not because it puts you into a different tax bracket.

    16. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Antony-Kyre · · Score: 1

      That sounds like a good idea. But, it really depends on the business, does it not?

      3 day weekends? So the business would be closed every Friday? Well, another idea might be to mix it up a little. Allow employees to choose between having Mondays or Fridays off. Those days could be "light" days, in which the business doesn't operate to it's full capacity, but Tues-Thurs would be the core days. Or would that be a flawed idea?

    17. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Lost+Engineer · · Score: 1

      I'm not quite sure what you mean (or what the OP meant for that matter). If I make 50 extra dollars where it would take 25 extra to put me into a higher tax bracket, only the last 25 is taxed at the higher rate. The benefit to me of earning the last half is less than the benefit of earning the first half, but I still make more money than if I only earned 25 to start with.

      Bonuses are actually what's taxed most stupidly. If I make twice as much money in December as June due to a year end bonus, the official scales require my employer to withhold as if I made that much every month. I get it back when I file my taxes, though.

    18. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by joocemann · · Score: 1

      I'd rather have 4x9hour days, a 10% cut in pay, and 3 days off every week. (Hey, most of the last 10% is taxes anyway, right). If everyone did this, we could avoid tons of layoffs nationwide, lower energy costs (4 days commuting instead of 5), and 3-day weekends every week ...

      Your plan basically sounds like a European lifestyle.

    19. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by the_B0fh · · Score: 4, Informative

      Are people really that stupid? A simple google search turns up:

      For single filers (this is slashdot after all):
      (Tax Rate Schedule X)

              * 10% on income between $0 and $8,025
              * 15% on the income between $8,025 and $32,550; plus $802.50
              * 25% on the income between $32,550 and $78,850; plus $4,481.25
              * 28% on the income between $78,850 and $164,550; plus $16,056.25
              * 33% on the income between $164,550 and $357,700; plus $40,052.25
              * 35% on the income over $357,700; plus $103,791.75

      Do you understand what the fuck that means? If you make less than $8025, you get taxed 10%. If you make between $8025 and $32550, that means you pay 10% on the first $8025, and 15% on the rest. That means the effective tax rate at $32550 is 13.77%.

      At which fucking point can you come out ahead while making less money?!

    20. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by aliquis · · Score: 1

      Or 6 hours working days which gives enough time over to LIVE to.

      The only problem I assume is that people in the poorer countries are willing to work much more and harder for less, so if you're afraid of losing some living standard it's not that great.

      (In the case that what was earlier unemployed people get the additional 33% of work-time your country will probably get a higher work output though since people are more well rested and enjoy life more. Since the unemployed (atleast here) just leech from the system sharing the work benefits everyone, but obviously it would be better for the economy of 100% of the people worked as many hours as needed. But imho life is important to.)

    21. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by trolltalk.com · · Score: 3, Insightful

      A lot of people don't "get" the idea that we don't "need" a lifestyle supported by huge mountains of debt. That's what started this whole problem - people (and countries) piling on more and more debt as they over-leveraged themselves. If you have no debts, and your work hours and pay are both cut 10%, you'll probably be okay. If debt payments represent half your net income, a 10% pay and hours cut is going to mean you don't "make your nut" each month. It's not the lower income, but the high debt level that leaves NO room to maneuver.

      When you take into account that as many as 1 in 2 mortgages (and even the most conservative estimate now puts it at 1 in 4) will be under-water over the next 5 years, now is the time to be shedding debt, not taking on more.

      The debt that is being incurred in everyone's name for all the bailouts isn't free money - every $ the government borrows is one buck less that consumers can borrow (or, if the government just revs up the printing presses, the excess currency forces the value of the consumers' dollars down by an equal amount).

      Depending on who you talk to, the dollar has lost between 93% and 97% of its' value in 40 years - the typical "generation". Why should anyone lend you money for 40 years if history shows that in terms of real purchasing power, it's worth less? The answer is, they won't lend, so watch for the US Dollar to continue to fall in value.

      Propping up the banks pretty much guaranteed a Japan-style "lost decade", unfortunately. Bail-outs don't put money in the consumers' pocket - they suck it out to prop up an inefficient system or create an artificially-high floor price.

      But that's another story http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Pduy96-kES4&NR=1

    22. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Average · · Score: 3, Insightful

      You are correct. That's why they're called *marginal* tax rates. This lack of understanding, along with the inability to understand that businesses are taxed on net profit, not revenue, is why Joe The Plumber was such a target of mocking, and such a totem of economically-illiterate America.

    23. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by garett_spencley · · Score: 4, Insightful

      I'm self employed and have often worked 12 hours / day. While the idea of taking 3 days / week off is appealing (and I've done it), I find that when I work 12 hours / day my productivity goes down the drain incrementally with each hour. I get extremely tired by the end of the shift and my brain turns to mush.

      I get way more work done doing a standard 8 hour work day with weekends off. Of course that's just me, though.

    24. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by trolltalk.com · · Score: 1

      The police force here has been working 4/10s for at least a couple of decades ... and they seem to have everything covered in a city of a couple million.

      Since many businesses no longer do the 9-5, Mon-Fri thing anyway (open 7 days a week), split shifts (2 on, 3 off, 2 on, 2 off for some, 4 on, 4 off for others, etc.) can meet a lot of people's desires for more free blocks of time while creating less need to lay people off to reduce labour costs.

    25. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by dgatwood · · Score: 4, Funny

      If I could, I'd gladly shed 20% of my pay for a 4-day workweek. I might even be persuaded to shed more than 20% to get a four-day work week. :-) I would not, however, want to lose time in my evenings to work more hours to get the same or similar pay. Well, some evenings it would be okay, but other days I'd have to make it up on the front end because of evening activities, and I wouldn't much like making it up on the front end. (Wait, there's a 7:00 in the morning? Why didn't anyone tell me!?!)

      --

      Check out my sci-fi/humor trilogy at PatriotsBooks.

    26. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      You're still going to be taxed 10% regardless of how much you earn, you won't be saving anything.

    27. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Average · · Score: 5, Interesting

      Japan's 'lost decade' (and continuing) also has a lot to do with lack of population growth. Sadly, interest-based capitalism goes hand-in-hand with growth. Japan has gone into negative population growth territory. Much of the west will follow in our lifetimes. From a green or even moderately sane perspective, the cessation of growth and consumption is a blessed and long-hoped-for event. But, economics as we know it stagnates. People get money, but they don't lend it. They don't because lending entails some risk, but, whatever you might invest in is unlikely to grow in a steady or shrinking economy.

    28. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by wpc4 · · Score: 1

      "lower energy costs (4 days commuting instead of 5), and 3-day weekends every week ... "

      This is assuming everyone stays at home and does nothing...

    29. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by CDMA_Demo · · Score: 5, Funny

      do you work 9/11 days?

    30. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by rudedog · · Score: 1

      There are many "tipping points" called tax brackets. If it can knock you down into a lower tax bracket you can come out ahead.

      You have absolutely no idea how the US tax code works.

    31. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by smaddox · · Score: 2, Insightful

      A large number of people seem to be confused on this issue. For some reason people think a bracketed tax screws over the people making more money, when in actuality it is designed based on the idea of decreasing returns on income utility.

      On the other hand, businesses do come out ahead (tax-wise) for making less money. If they put all their profits back into the business, they pay fewer taxes. Kinda odd if you think about it, but it has the benefit of promoting growth.

    32. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Hordeking · · Score: 1

      >>If everyone did this (4x9hr days), we could avoid tons of layoffs nationwide. A company can avoid layoffs by cutting hours and pay. If everybody at every company had their hours and pay cut, their bills remain the same, so the workers' spendable income after covering expenses is either gone or greatly reduced - You have just created a recession.

      Of course, if a company doesn't avoid layoffs, those laid off workers find their pay and hours cut a lot more, but their bills stay the same. They have no spendable income or it is greatly reduced, forcing them to draw on their savings and settle for positions where their skills potentially wither. Viola. You have just created a recession and welfare recipients.

      --
      Disclaimer: The opinions and actions of the US Gov't are in no way representative of those held by this author or its ci
    33. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by QRDeNameland · · Score: 4, Interesting

      Excellent post. I can't tell you how many people I know who misunderstand tax brackets and think they can be substantially penalized for earning an extra $1 if it puts them into a higher bracket.

      Another factor I would add that even further detracts from that myth, since I saw you mention it, is FICA. (For non-US residents unaware of FICA, it is a separate federal payroll tax which funds Social Security and Medicare.) For 2008, an employee pays 6.2% up to $102,000 for FICA. If you compare to the US income tax brackets, any money you earn over that $102,000 up to $164,550 is being effectively taxed at 6.2% less than the $78,850 to $102,000 earned (considering Fed Income Tax plus FICA, the vast bulk of most payroll tax). The $164,550-$357,700 bracket raises the rate 5% on additional dollars earned, which still leaves you paying 1.2% less and only when you enter that top bracket are your additional dollars effectively taxed at a whopping 0.8% more than you were taxed for $78,850 to $102,000.

      Bottom line, under the US federal tax system you never lose money by making money. In fact, it really doesn't look so progressive when you spell it out like that.

      --
      Momentarily, the need for the construction of new light will no longer exist.
    34. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Farmer+Pete · · Score: 1

      My boss is trying to push us to go to a 9 hr day 4 days a week, and then have us work from home for half a day on the 5th day. The idea is that we could increase our coverage hours, but he doesn't want us to have to sit in an office late at night. I don't think it's a bad idea, but I'm not all that fond of having to work till 8pm once a week.

    35. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by pavera · · Score: 1

      we'd also immediately eliminate 10% of our economy.... but yeah otherwise great idea

    36. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by stdarg · · Score: 1

      As for me, I'm lucky as hell. I'd found the ability to work 30 hours or so a week, with some vacation flexibility, in my nice cheap midwest small town, for slightly under $30k a year. Lucky as all hell to have it, for now. With my degrees and training, I 'should' make $80k or maybe $100k+ on the coasts. Instead, I get time to garden, volunteer, cook, and jam with friends. Awesome and a half. But, of course, it's far less efficient for most companies. Hiring 6 people and pushing them 50 or 60 hours a week is, sadly, much more efficient than having 10 people work 30 to 35. Perhaps shifting certain fixed costs (health care) off the employer might help this become an option for more people?

      Sounds like you have a nice setup! Question though. If those 10 people were working 30 hours a week, wouldn't they be considered part time and ineligible for benefits like health care? I thought Microsoft (or some tech company) got sued a few years ago because they *purposely* hired more people than they needed, then kept them at part-time status so they could save money?

      I guess it depends on the industry, but for programmers I bet you anything that the 10 people working part time would save the company money (assuming no benefits) PLUS they would be way more productive than the 6 people. My best coding is only a few hours each day. After that I'm less productive. Imagine if my company could pay me only for my most productive hours.

    37. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by mog007 · · Score: 0, Troll

      My father works 16 hours a day, 6 days a week. And he's been doing it for the past year at his new job. But there's no other jobs available in his field, so he can't quit and get a job that pays him more than the 2 bucks an hour he's earning.

    38. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      You misunderstand.
      The first $8,025 you make is taxed 10%, then any money you earn beyond that up do $32,550 will be taxed 15%. Any money you make after that up to $78,850 will be taxed 25%....and so on.

      You will never come out 'ahead' you will just pay more taxes on the extra money you earn.

    39. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Belial6 · · Score: 4, Interesting

      I have to tell you, that I fell into that misconception for a lot of years. It is poorly described almost universally. On the plus side, it did give a pal of mine who I have frequent friendly rivalries with, a good chance to be right.

      Honestly, that isn't even the worst misconception people have about taxes. Many people (most?) don't even realize that the taxes that come out of their paychecks are "withheld". They think that they have to pay one set of taxes through the year, and a seperate set of taxes at the end of the year. Just look at the tax preparation commercials that are now running where they are bragging that "95% of our customers receive a refund". They say it like it is their great service that gets the government to give you money and that the fact that you have been overpaying throughout the year has nothing to do with it.

      Scarier yet are the commercials that ran last year by H&R Block. Their commercial boiled down to telling people that they should trust them with their money because they were holding a lottery.

    40. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by hosecoat · · Score: 1

      i would recommend becoming a consultant, sleeping in, charging 3-5 times per hour what you would have made, then leaving early. Also advised, taking any day off and scheduling vacations whenever.

    41. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by bigsteve@dstc · · Score: 2, Funny
      You will never decrease your tax liability by making less enough to compensate for making less, all other things being equal, even under a system as complex as the US tax code.

      Yes you can, but first you will need two SSNs ... :-)

    42. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by tompaulco · · Score: 4, Funny

      any money you earn over that $102,000 up to $164,550 is being effectively taxed at 6.2% less than the $78,850 to $102,000 earned
      Which is why I encourage my employer to pay me more than $102,000. Not only do I get taxed less, but so does my employer. Alas, they didn't see the logic in my argument, nor in the charts which showed the average person with my experience in my position earning $120k in my locale.

      --
      If you are not allowed to question your government then the government has answered your question.
    43. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Average · · Score: 1

      My employer (a school district) has a fairly helpful health plan for part-timers. I pay more premium than a full-timer. Helps that my wife and I are fairly young, healthy, and have savings, so get by with high-deductible.

      You're right, though, in that I think I'm pretty productive with my 25-30 hours a week of sysadminning. Compared to having worked full-time-plus, I spend less time goofing off online. I have plenty of time to do that (like Slashdot) at home.

      I wonder if this will become more common in countries with socialized medical care (which, as you might guess, would benefit me). Of course, to also allow physicians to benefit from 30-hour-weeks, we'll need to convince a lot more people to become physicians.

    44. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by cayenne8 · · Score: 1
      "I don't think it's a bad idea, but I'm not all that fond of having to work till 8pm once a week."

      Why would you work so late at night? 9 hours is easy...work 8am till 5pm...eat at your desk through lunch while working and bam...9 hours billed.

      I mean, sure, if you leave for lunch, you gotta stay till 6 or so for that hour missed at lunch, but, reallly...how often do you do that. Just don't take an lunch our..and the day goes quickly.

      --
      Light travels faster than sound. This is why some people appear bright until you hear them speak.........
    45. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Arrakis+Dv8r · · Score: 1

      Except not everybody spends their 3 days off hermitting, people go places - potentially further than driving to work.

    46. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 5, Insightful

      You have absolutely no idea how the US tax code works.

      Nobody knows how the US tax code works.

    47. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Fluffeh · · Score: 1

      ow much higher your marginal tax rate is on the last few hours income each week.

      And if you knocked off the last few hours of each working week, you could then apply the same logic to the last few hours of your new shorter week and say that you pay most tax on the last few hours - and so on and so on.

      To put short, I would much prefer to earn an extra few figures on my salary and pay a higher rate on that last bit than not get it at all and pay no tax on it.

      --
      Moved to http://soylentnews.org/. You are invited to join us too!
    48. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by mgblst · · Score: 3, Interesting

      It takes a while for the layoffs to hit the higher paid/more qualified people but it will. Unless things improve quickly, which they won't.

      It is called the trickle up effect. The lower paid jobs can react to this quickly, because they have less money in the bank, and their employees are protected less by law.

    49. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by mgblst · · Score: 1

      Anybody who is spending all their money, so they have no leeway is screwed anyway, even more so if they are let go.

      A recession is already here, how we react to it decides how long it is going to go on for. Short term solutions will make it last longer. But doing stuff like reducing pay/hours is actually a good response to this.

    50. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by mgblst · · Score: 1

      So in your first analogy, someone earning $60,000 gets cut down to $50,000, they are only losing $5,000. This is the point the grandparent was making.

    51. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by QRDeNameland · · Score: 4, Informative

      I just wrote a post below about tax brackets and rates, and it just so happens that I'm a dual US-Canadian citizen, living and working in Canada now but most of life was in the US. Out of curiosity I wanted to compare US vs. Canadian income tax rates, I was surprised to find that Canadian income tax rates are slightly lower across the board than the US.

      Canada 2009:
      - 15% on the first $38,832 of taxable income, +
      - 22% on the next $38,832 of taxable income (on the portion of taxable income between $38,832 and $77,664), +
      - 26% on the next $48,600 of taxable income (on the portion of taxable income between $77,664 and $126,264), +
      - 29% of taxable income over $126,264.

      US 2008:
      - 10% of $0 to $8,025
      - 15% of $8,025 to $32,550
      - 25% of $32,550 to $78,850
      - 28% of $78,850 to $164,550
      - 33% of $164,550 to $357,700
      - 35% of $357,700 and up

      The US figures do not count FICA which is 6.2% up to $102,000. My additional taxes on my Canadian payroll check do not come close to matching FICA plus other non-Federal taxes that I paid in the US.

      The place where I feel overtaxed in Canada in comparison to the US is not on my income, but with the GST/PST, and the slew of fuel, booze, etc., etc., taxes which contribute overall to higher cost of living here.

      --
      Momentarily, the need for the construction of new light will no longer exist.
    52. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by mabhatter654 · · Score: 1

      typically those working 2-3 jobs are because those 2-3 only add up to 60 or so.. scattered around weird hours so that the 2-3 employers don't have to pay benefits and the employees are always sick from undisciplined sleep schedules. But hey if we take all those new "service" jobs everybody brags about and divide by 2/3 we'll have the actual number of people being employed.

      I think the poster is talking about salary/office positions, where there is a set amount of work to be done and an hour extra a day would add real work time versus a whole extra day when you have to have meetings, phone interruptions, lunch, naps, breaks, etc. If you figure taking all that into account you only get 4-6 hours of real nose to the wheel work in office/technical positions... that's why so many IT people like to work over.. because the interruptions go away and they can get all the work they need in. Hence a 9/36 actually nets the company 1 hour of "real" work per day that would be filed until tomorrow, so the 4 hours "lost" is really a wash because you'd lose Friday to all that other stuff distracting from work. And the company gets to keep the office close 1 day saving on utilities/janitorial/etc.

    53. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Delwin · · Score: 1

      Unless you trip up the Alternative Minimum Tax. Then working less (to get back below it) can indeed net you more money.

    54. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Delwin · · Score: 1

      When you trip up the Alternative Minimum Tax

    55. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by EightBits · · Score: 2, Informative

      I understand this was about taxes, but from a non-tax point of view, you can actually come out ahead by other benefits qualifications.

      A single mother where I used to work was making a certain wage. Because of how low her income was, she was able to get child care subsidy from the state. She was told she was going to get a raise of $0.25/hour. It was going to put her total annual income over the limit and disqualify her for the subsidy which was worth about $2.00/hour. She asked to only be given an $0.11/hour raise so she would not go over the income limit. $0.25/hour was the maximum annual pay raise for her position and she was going to nursing school part time. She was going to be out of there in a couple of years making more money as a nurse so she came out ahead by making less money.

      While reducing income will not help with lowered taxes, it can help with other things and this should not be forgotten.

    56. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Fallen+Kell · · Score: 1

      The way to convince more people is to increase their wages, or drop the entry level barriers.... (at least in a capitalist society that is how it works). Now I for one would not welcome the second option, but the health care industry is having a hard time with the current wages and trying to make a profit (which is why you are seeing more and more hospitals not adding services like heart cathaterization and maternity wards, and instead dropping services due to the high liability involved when things go wrong. So instead of having hospitals which can do these things which can save lives, you are seeing fewer and fewer places with the service which requires either patient transfers to hospitals with the services or less quality services being used as alternates, or at worst loss of patient life because it takes too much time to transfer the patient to a hospital which still does offer the service).

      --
      We were all warned a long time ago that MS products sucked, remember the Magic 8 Ball said, "Outlook not so good"
    57. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by im_thatoneguy · · Score: 5, Insightful

      This is simple.

      Person A makes $50k a year. Let's say they pay 15%. They pay $7.5k per year.
      Their apartment costs $800 per month. Their car costs $400 per month. Their food costs $300 per month.
      At the end of every month they have about $500 left over for spending money.

      Person A gets a 50% raise. They now make $75k. Let's say their total tax burder is now 20%. They now pay $15k in taxes a year.
      They buy a house with their new found fortunes with a $1800 a month mortage. They ea tout more and their food costs $500 a month. They get a nicer car and their lease is now $500. Now they have a net debt of $200 a month.
      Suddenly they're broke. Obviously the government is holding them down. Before their raise they had money to spare. After their raise they are out of money. Taxes are to blame.

    58. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by youknowjack · · Score: 5, Informative

      Research suggests that while 12 hour shifts can make people happy and psychologically healthy, they can introduce long term health effects due to fatigue (accrued sleep debt).

      Also, people make more errors towards the end of long shifts (particularly dangerous in industrial work environments). An 8 or 9 hour shift as suggested can mitigate this risk.

      http://pt.wkhealth.com/pt/re/oeme/abstract.00022707-199804000-00001.htm

    59. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Average · · Score: 1

      I am pretty strongly in favor of the latter (lowering entry level barriers). Or, at least, encouraging more nurse practitioners, PAs, etc. Seven years of hell, massive debts, vindictive residencies, etc, for small-town family practice wages? Of course there's going to be a shortage.

      Tort reform and licensing-board reform are also needed, which would help with things like maternity wards. Sometimes things aren't perfect in this world.

    60. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      I'm a firefighter. I work 24 on, 48 off. As long as there aren't calls during the night, I get paid to sleep. Relevant to your question? No. Friggin' Awesome schedule anyways? Yes.

      Shut up Dummy!

    61. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      Unfortunately, it doesn't quite work that way. I'd be willing to cut down on hours and take the pay cut too. However, cutting down the numbers of hours that an employee works and increasing the number of employees reduces productivity and in the end hurts the economy.

      (However, when an employee works extreme numbers of hours, and a person approaches their limit, cutting down their hours and hiring more people can increase productivity.)

      So, if your concern is to help an employee's quality of life, it might be a good idea. But it certainly doesn't help the economy.

    62. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 1, Funny

      As long as there aren't calls during the night, I get paid to sleep.

      Yeah but there's always some dweeb comes along who's all "wah wah wah save my house it's burning. wah wah wah come put out the flames"

    63. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      I'm on a 4/10 schedule and love having 3 days off every week. Another group here is on a 8/6 schedule - 10 hours/day, on for 8 days, off for 6.

    64. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by WCLPeter · · Score: 1

      I'd rather have 4x9hour days, a 10% cut in pay, and 3 days off every week.

      I've been trying to convince people that we should switch to the "Eight Day Week". With the eight day week we have four days on, four days off. You can work either 10 hours every day and get paid the same as now (assuming a 40 hour work week) or, work a standard eight hour day, lose a day's pay, but still gain two extra days off.

      We'd have four eight day weeks per month for eleven months, with the remaining 13 days as a "Statutory / Religious Holiday" month that would grow to 14 days during a leap year. If you have to work during this time, as I imagine people in some service industries would, you would be able to append those days to your holiday the following year. Not including the days you potentially worked in December (Stat Month) everyone would get 16 days off per year, the equivalent of 4 weeks, which could allow some people to take at least an entire month (32 days) off.

      It would give everyone flexibility; work the front four, the back four, or in some cases, the middle four. It would provide consistency for employers, October 4th would always be on a Thursday. Throw in no "weekends", as people would be working one of the "fours", planning could be simplified, more consistent, and allow greater efficiencies.

      Socially it would also reduce traffic congestion, and likely road maintenance costs, by halving the daily commuters. In addition we could save electricity by reducing the early morning peaks as people tend to sleep in, or at the very least defer their usual morning routine, on their days off.

      Families would benefit because they could spend more time together, something sorely lacking in today's society. With one parent working the front four and the other working the middle or back four, couples could reap the benefits of a double income while still being able to take an active role in raising their children. Obviously single parent families would likely continue to make use of day-care but, with fewer two parent families needing to make use of it, the day-care should be smaller and able to devote more one on one time with a child during their formative years.

      When it comes to school, half the kids would take classes during the front four, the other half the back four. This reduces class sizes without spending funds to build ever larger schools, or having to resort to potentially unsafe portables.

      Now I'm rambling, but I think you get the idea.

    65. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      You stopped reading at the semicolons, didn't you?

    66. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by internewt · · Score: 1

      The best schedule I ever worked was 12 hour days. I'd work 3 days one week, and 4 days the next week. I always had either 3 or 4 days off.

      That reminds me of an old job where the management fucked up my holiday time, but in my favour. I got 23 days a year off, and I knew I had used 20+ days because I had been keeping my own records. The days off had to be used by the end of the year, and at the start of November my manager told me I had a lot of holiday still to use. Of course, I kept schtum about my records, and proceeded to book off every Monday in November and December, and every other Friday.

      Alternating 3 and 4 day working-weeks for 2 months with no Mondays. It was fucking sweet.

      --
      Car analogies break down.
    67. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by grossvogel · · Score: 1

      why, that sounds like class warfare!!!

      just kidding. great post.

    68. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by EvanED · · Score: 1

      So in your first analogy, someone earning $60,000 gets cut down to $50,000, they are only losing $5,000.

      They will be cut down to $55,000, not $50,000. (I suspect this is what you meant by saying they are only losing $5K.)

      This is the point the grandparent was making.

      What the parent said is "If it can knock you down into a lower tax bracket you can come out ahead" but this isn't true. The person making $60,000 will still have $5,000 more in take-home pay then someone making $50,000, it's just not proportionally larger. Again, all other things being equal (people making more may be able to pay someone better for tax advice or something), someone in the higher tax bracket will always have more than someone in the lower tax bracket.

      (The US's AMT, which Delwin mentioned, is an exception, but it's kind of a special case.)

      About the only way what the grandparent said could make sense is if you're looking at your hourly rate rather than total pay.

    69. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by PCMeister · · Score: 1

      Also, which is more economically efficient - to pay people a marginal amount to sit around (unemployment - which comes out of taxes, remember)

      In an effort to correct that bit of misinformation, see: U.S. Unemployment Program

      For those that don't have a moment to waste, below is a clip of the wiki entry:

      ----- Snippet -----

      "Unemployment insurance is a federal-state program jointly financed through federal and state employer payroll taxes (federal and state UI taxes)"

    70. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by bnenning · · Score: 1

      You will never decrease your tax liability by making less enough to compensate for making less, all other things being equal, even under a system as complex as the US tax code.

      True in general, but there are cases where the working poor have effective marginal tax rates of over 100%, because they lose benefits as their income increases.

      --
      How to solve most of our problems: 1.Lots of nuclear plants. 2.Cure aging.
    71. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by QRDeNameland · · Score: 2, Informative

      Replying to myself... Sorry! Scratch that...I didn't see the additional provincial taxes below. I thought there was missing taxes somewhere. Still, when it comes down to it my overall payroll taxes on, I'll just sat between $50-$100K, seems to be pretty much the same as the US.

      --
      Momentarily, the need for the construction of new light will no longer exist.
    72. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      I work 2 12hr day get a day off work 2 12hr nights get 4days off.

    73. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      I have 3 kids. I get 3k in child tax credits, after everything else is figured in. Meaning it's not 28% of 79k, it's (28% of 79k) - 3k.

      When those child tax credits get phased out from making too much money, I lose.

      Last time I played with the numbers, unless the numbers were just right, I didn't lose money by making more. However, I gained so little actually into my pocket, it wasn't worth the extra "layoff target" attention.

    74. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      It only didn't work in France because they were competing against countries that have been brainwashed into thinking they have to work lots of hours.

      I know that I would rather shop at a store that is open on Sat & Sun by a guy working Sat-Mon and then another guy working Tues-Fri. Or something like that. Instead of retiring or unretiring back to full-time, a three day a week job would probably work out great, and a 4 day per week job would allow people to have a life outside of work.

      With technology, machines and machines learning macros from humans to do repetitive tasks, I bet we could go to a 4/32 work week or a 4/24 one and be just fine... Or maybe people need to learn how to live cheaply so they earn twice as much as they spend. I have plenty more money than time at this stage of my life, and I would be able to live my life better if I had more time.

    75. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      I'm a paramedic - I have to work when I go to work.

    76. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      If his company designed this whole system to retain an average 40 hours of work per week, I have to assume he's salaried and not working "by the hour". Nice attempt at making an innocuous, droll joke your personal soapbox, though.

    77. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by vancbc · · Score: 1

      Thank you! It drives me nuts how many people have this concept completely wrong and probably are losing themselves money by not going for pay increases, etc.

    78. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by zach_d · · Score: 1

      I would say that opinion of canadian taxes is a bit misguided.

      yes, when you work overtime the portion of taxes coming off your cheque is higher, but you get most of that tax back when you file your return. (unless you work overtime all the time, and that's just the way it goes with a progressive income tax, you'd see the same increase in taxes if you worked straight time, but got an increased pay rate)

    79. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by mrboyd · · Score: 1

      The French government did that. It's called "35h week". It was supposed to make everyone happy and create tons of job. It was not really respected by any small to medium size company who obviously were already silently expecting 40 to 50+ hours of their employees.
      It worked fine for government employees who were not doing 40hours worth of work in the first place.

      All in all and despite the fact that I liked the concept I have to admit it was a failure job creation wise.

    80. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by farrellj · · Score: 1

      I'm also a dual CAN/US citizen...and have worked in both countries...and I found I had less money in the US after taxes because I had to pay close to $500 a month for the medical insurance, and they had all sorts of extra taxes like a city tax on my car,and having an emissions test every year. Sure, the GST gets you in Canada, but it only really hurts in large purchases.

      All in all, unless you are in perfect health and never get sick, it is much cheaper to live in Canada.

      ttyl

      --
      CAN-CON 2019 - Ottawa's only book oriented Science Fiction Convention! October 18-20, Sheraton Hotel, Ottawa, Canada h
    81. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Weaselmancer · · Score: 1

      And, I might add, for that exact reason the near-perfect frontman for the Republican party. It is no accident they gave him the spotlight.

      "Hey everybody - believe this!"

      It's bizarre how many times I've heard someone in some context say they're worried about being in a higher tax bracket. As a kid I always assumed that the tax was applied to the entire net, not the new margin so there were points on the curve of diminishing returns. Once it was explained to me how it actually worked I was shocked at just how positively stupid that statement is. Me, I'd love to be in a higher tax bracket. I'd have *more money*.

      It's an ideal way to drive a wedge between the wealthy and the not-wealthy though, isn't it? Plant the idea that there are some intermediate levels of success are not desirable. Insidious, isn't it? The way they're trying to remove all the middle rungs from the ladder?

      Also, please don't assume I'm a Democrat from the anti-Republican slant to my post. Democrats are running their own game. It's just as lousy. Just in different ways.

      --
      Weaselmancer
      rediculous.
    82. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by ktappe · · Score: 2, Insightful

      Come up to Kanuckistan and you'll see just how much higher your marginal tax rate is on the last few hours income each week.

      Unless the tax rate is greater than or equal to 100%, you're wrong--it will always benefit you to work more hours than fewer. Yes, the per-hour benefit will decrease at higher brackets but the benefit will never completely go away.

      --
      "We can categorically state we have not released man-eating badgers into the area." - UK military spokesman, July 2007
    83. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by bradorsomething · · Score: 1

      You need to find a rural service. I used to whittle on duty I was so bored.

    84. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by sanyasi · · Score: 1

      > All in all, unless you are in perfect health and never get sick, it is much cheaper to live in Canada. Unless you are in perfect health, and are 100% confident enough of it to not insure yourself, its still going to cost you insurance money in the USA.

    85. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Hal_Porter · · Score: 1

      Yeah, that's wrong. You can only stop reading when you encounter a // or a /*

      --
      echo -e 'global _start\n _start:\n mov eax, 2\n int 80h\n jmp _start' > a.asm; nasm a.asm -f elf; ld a.o -o a;
    86. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by blitziod · · Score: 4, Funny

      yea but firemen get LAID all the time.. I mean really there is like NO other job in the same pay range that will get you that much sex.

      --
      The only way to bust a doper--is when you yourself become a smoker!
    87. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by mjwx · · Score: 2, Insightful

      Are people really that stupid?

      Yes, yes people are really that stupid.

      This is pretty much how the tax system works in AU. You have to pay a certain amount based on the minimum of the tax bracket and then a percentage of each dollar after that. they only way you possibly end up worse off is if you move tax brackets and end up at the top end of the next lowest bracket or at the bottom end of the next bracket up (and I think this is exclusive to Australia's screwed up tax code).

      I'm not a taxation expert but I have enough brains to keep my semi-formed ideas to myself and ask someone who fucking knows.

      --
      Calling someone a "hater" only means you can not rationally rebut their argument.
    88. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by proverbialcow · · Score: 2, Insightful

      I wish I had mod points so I could mod you "+5, Comic Genius." Also, I wish we could mod people "Comic Genius."

      The real trick is to look at the marginal take-home wage per hour if you happen to be on the edge of jumping tax brackets. Essentially, determine how much you're currently bringing home per hour worked, and comparing that to how much you'd be bringing home per EXTRA hour you worked to get the bump in income. At some point you're going to have to determine if that extra $100 in take home pay is worth the extra 10 hours you worked to get it.

      At some point, quality-of-life needs to enter the equation.

      --
      The only surefire protection against Microsoft infections is abstinence. - The Onion
    89. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by blitziod · · Score: 1

      but in most cases in the US, the working (and non working )poor have a tax rate lower than -1%. This is due to government programs esp the earned income tax credit, which is really just a check for mor than the taxes you paid in as a refund.

      --
      The only way to bust a doper--is when you yourself become a smoker!
    90. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Arterion · · Score: 1

      They are losing $5000 to tax, but still bringing home and extra $5000.

      So in the GP's example:

      $50000 income = $50000 income
      $60000 income = $55000 income

      Only the $10000 above $50000 is taxed.

      --
      "That which does not kill us makes us stranger." -Trevor Goodchild
    91. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by nevesis · · Score: 1

      That's interesting. I'm also self employed and I've found that usually I get more productive towards the end of a 12 hour day.

    92. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      And hey, if it's rural enough you won't have to fight the fire because it'll have already burned down by the time you get there. At least when it's not Forest Fire season, then watch out!

    93. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by blitziod · · Score: 1

      i am against tort reform..i want my dr to be BROKE and penniless if he amputates my leg by mistake. You have to be pretty smart to be a dr BUT not that smart. I mean more people could be dr's we just need more medical schools. And maybe incentives for some kinds of dr's like deliver babies( high insurance costs) for ten years and we pay your loans off. Doc's should make a good living, but many make several hundred k per year..this is more than they should be worth, but they are worth it due to limited supply.

      --
      The only way to bust a doper--is when you yourself become a smoker!
    94. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      u will never decrease your tax liability by making less enough to compensate for making less, all other things being equal, even under a system as complex as the US tax code. If you think it can, tax brackets don't work the way I suspect you think they do.

      Tax alone isn't the issue. Factor in certain deductions that come out of the top bracket of your income (the 50% type) but only return 10% of the deduction. If you're borderline in the top bracket and make a lot of these little deductions (maybe 2k worth), shaving off a couple of k a year can mean you wind up actually paying slightly less tax and take home the same amount.

      Factor in other things like child support payments, which are a fixed percentage of your pre-tax income where I come from. Being in a higher tax bracket means you're worse off because you're paying tax on money you never see. Reducing that tax burden by dropping a bracket can be beneficial if you're borderline on the bracket.

      There are a lot of situations where you can at least break even by reducing your income by a small amount. I graphed the tax rates + child support rates here and there were a few sweet spots just before each tax bracket increase, where less of each dollar you earn reaches you.

    95. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Fjandr · · Score: 1

      There is actually a tipping point at the smallest shred of the beginning of each higher tax bracket (obviously modified by each person's individual exemptions, deductions, loopholes, etc). The likelihood that you are ever going to hit one of those exact sweet spots, however, is almost nonexistent.

      Despite that, it certainly is a particularly aggressive myth, especially in the service industry.

    96. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Directrix1 · · Score: 2, Interesting

      I actually wasn't aware of that (you know short of the post above this one), thanks for presenting this information in the most douchiest mother fucking assholiest way possible. No, seriously thanks. People are this fucking stupid because the concept is presented in a fucking stupid way.

      But regardless, if your time is worth $x / hr (and you net $x / hr in your normal tax bracket), and after exceeding a certain threshold you start getting $y / hr such that $y $x (due to entering into a higher tax bracket), then you have just started selling your time at a loss. I have screwy logic though I suppose.

      --
      Occam's razor is the blind faith in the natural selection of least resistance and in universal oversimplification. -- EF
    97. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Directrix1 · · Score: 1

      Stupid slashdot plaintext conversion. That should say $y LESS_THAN_SYMBOL $x.

      --
      Occam's razor is the blind faith in the natural selection of least resistance and in universal oversimplification. -- EF
    98. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      So... from a pure tax bracket position, you are correct. But you're neglecting tax credits. If you make more than 160k married filing jointly, you lose most of your tax credits. You can no longer get a Hope education credit, no longer deduct student loan interest, no longer contribute to a Roth IRA, no longer get a tax deduction for a regular IRA. There are a myriad of deductions and credits that one loses as they increase their AGI.

      So while you are right when purely looking at the tax brackets since there's a huge difference between marginal tax rate and effective tax rate, you must also factor in deductions and credits. Reducing your AGI from 160,000 to 159,999 is, to borrow your phrase, the "fucking point" where you can come out ahead making less money. Considering the length of the US Federal Tax Code, I wouldn't be surprised if there were many more instances.

    99. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by mobynewt · · Score: 1, Insightful

      You know, I-bankers typically worked* 60+ hour weeks, and look what wonders that did for our economy.
      *past tense, as all 5 US investment banks either went bankrupt or were folded into retail banks during the financial collapse.

    100. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by lewp · · Score: 3, Interesting

      I worked this schedule several years ago as a night shift NOC monkey. I think I might go back if given the chance, despite the fact that I'd make about 1/4 the money I do now. Nothing like staffing a data center by yourself (or with one other person) in an empty building with nothing to do except write code, watch movies, play video games, order takeout, and wait for an alarm. Plus we had several OC-12s at a time when I was paying $150/mo for 768k SDSL.

      You didn't get to see other people very often, but everything was just starting to open on your way home from work so running errands was a snap, your commute was the opposite way traffic was going, and shopping was easy because the grocery store was empty. I used to hit the health club downstairs, swim a couple miles, and be headed out to my car to go home just as the 9-5ers were rolling in.

      Just thinking about it makes me dread riding the train into the city in a few hours. I need to go to sleep...

      --
      Game... blouses.
    101. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      I live in france. The problem with the 35 hour week is that it is compulsory for everyone (until recently overtime was very, very expensive for employers and very expensive for your end of year tax bill), and the 35 hours are spread over 5 days. Shrinking the working week to 4/36 is not the same at all.

    102. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by cyborch · · Score: 2, Interesting

      Buu huu...

      In Denmark tax rates are:

      - 39% of $0 to $48,300
      - 44% of $48,300 to $58,000
      - 59% of $58,000 and up

      Actually it's a lot more complicated than that, but it boils down to approx. the rates above...

    103. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by b4upoo · · Score: 2, Insightful

      I have worked 10 hrs. and four day systems and that isn't the best way to work at all. In many trades that last two hours drains a worker too much.Every work day seems like life is suspended as it is filled with nothing but work.

    104. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 1, Funny

      Has he considered not being Mexican?

    105. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by registered_after_8_y · · Score: 1

      I had quite a nice schedule working on a Cruise ship, one week at sea, then one week at home. While at sea our workdays were 11,5h average, but it was pretty nice to have a week off. Our bosses had the even better schedule 10/20, as in 10 days at sea, then 20 at home.

    106. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Cougar_ · · Score: 1

      I'd agree with this. I work 11-12 hours 5 days a week, which gets me great overtime pay (usually make as much extra in overtime as my normal hours). I start at 5:30 or 6:00am, so I don't finish too late, but the sleep debt can certainly creep up on me. I've just started back at work after two weeks off, and I'm now feeling great, before the time off I was constantly tired. My time off was spent sleeping in until midday most days, totally worth it :)
      In case anyone is wondering, I'm an express freight delivery driver, in which role I make better money than I could've expected in an IT role, at least until I'd had 5+ years experience. I also love what I do, despite having university degrees, I can't see me changing career in the foreseeable future.

    107. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      Now how much do you pay in medical insurance?

    108. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      I actually work a 3/12 or 4/10 hour shift. Basically, for three weeks I work three 12 hour shifts in a row, and then it switches and I work four 10 hour shifts in a row. It is a frigging awesome. Three or four days off each week? Kick ass. In fact, every other time my schedual shifts the hours line up such that I can take 12 hours of vacation time and get a week off.

      I personally really like the longer days. They help concentrate work into something that is far more managable. You can work on stuff uninterrupted for much longer resulting in better quality and greater satisfaction. When your time off comes around, you have more of it. It really helps to keep work and life better seperated, which makes both considerably more enjoyable.

    109. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Cougar_ · · Score: 1

      >>(Hey, most of the last 10% is taxes anyway, right)

      Not Right.

      The idea that at a certain point, the govt takes most of your earnings in taxes is an urban legend.
          For anybody working by the hour, there is no "tipping point" where the govt keeps most of each additional dollar - it is just untrue.

      It is for me. I'm in Australia, and I have a government university debt. Depending on earnings, this is repaid through tax. If I earn enough in a week, the tax rate on any additional hours I work is around 51%. Also the repayment of the debt is a flat rate on all earnings, that increases depending on gross earnings. So it is actually possible for me to take home more money by working less hours as my earnings approach the amount required to put the debt repayment percentage to the next level. Of course it all works out at the end of the year when I file my tax return, but it can be somewhat frustrating to see that working more has netted me less money at the end of the week.

    110. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      Have you ever paid Provincial Income Tax?

    111. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by ShieldW0lf · · Score: 3, Funny

      During the summer I switch to working four ten hour days. Its nice as it gives me Fridays off and have a long weekend. :)

      I used to do that back when I worked at the explosives factory... shame it's not there anymore...

      --
      -1 Uncomfortable Truth
    112. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Dhalka226 · · Score: 1

      Me, I'd love to be in a higher tax bracket. I'd have *more money*.

      Probably, but not definitely. As some other people have mentioned, the Alternative Minimum Tax is tripping more and more families up. But more simply, realize that when you're quoting from the tax tables like that that you're talking about the taxes your income asses on you. This is not necessarily the same as the amount of taxes you pay.

      For example, many tax rebates (the child tax credit leaping immediately to mind) have income cut-offs; you don't get the extra money off your tax bill once you start making more than $X. If $X is less than $tax_deduction more than you're making now, you effectively lose money. (Actually I think the window is even slightly smaller than that due to the point at which tax credits are applied, but it's late and I don't want to check the math.)

      These are, of course, fringe cases -- but really that's what the misconception was about anyway; people who were just below some line but are now just above end up shafted. That actually may be true, the line just isn't the top/bottom of tax brackets, unless of course the top of a tax bracket was used to determine a cutoff.

    113. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      Ummmm... I'd much rather be making $350,000 than $360,000. The 35% on anything over $357,700 isn't going to hurt, it's the PLUS an additional $63,750.

    114. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by berend+botje · · Score: 1

      I've been working 4x9 (no work on Friday) for the last ten years. Wouldn't have it any other way.

      You can do the chores (groceries, whatnot) on Friday, while it isn't packed solid in the shopping mall. During the 'proper' weekend you then get to chill out and do only the fun stuff.

      Next job (looking for one, at the mo') might be 4x8, as that would leave me with better hours to commute (not as much traffic congestion).

    115. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      Yet for some reason,
      Companies still lay people off because they calculate that the savings effect if greater than the income effect is on their profitabilitry.

    116. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Pippinjack · · Score: 2, Interesting
      Glad I'm in the UK:
      • $0-$8836 = 0%
      • $8836 - $59788 = 20%
      • $59788+ = 40%
      --
      hear all, see all, say nowt; eat all, supp all, pay nowt; and if tha ever does owt for nowt - do it for thissen
    117. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      The economy can still grow without increases in population, through things like advances in technology and methodology. The problem is that there is a decline period and then a transitional period where industries have to readjust to the way that growth changes.

    118. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by ultranova · · Score: 2, Informative

      A large number of people seem to be confused on this issue. For some reason people think a bracketed tax screws over the people making more money, when in actuality it is designed based on the idea of decreasing returns on income utility.

      I suspect that at least some of them are purposefully spreading misinformation. Progressive taxation is, after all, contrary to the ideology and perceived or real interests of both plutocrats and John Galt wannabes of this world.

      Remember, equality is seen as bad by those who think they'd be the 500-pound gorillas in a jungle.

      --

      Forget magic. Any technology distinguishable from divine power is insufficiently advanced.

    119. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by asdir · · Score: 1

      The discrepancy between you productivity levels might be due to two adverse effects:
      Normally people get more tired and unconcentrated after some hours of concentrated work.
      However, if the level of disturbance decreases during the last hours since everbody else in your firm leaves, as is the case for me as well, you can focus more on whatever you are doing. That would INCREASE the level of concentration again.
      Of course there might some other effects connected to the specific work you are doing. Think conveyer belt worker vs. mathematician here.

    120. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      Person A gets a 50% raise, but starts spending 125% more on housing and 67% more on food. When they have a net debt you blame the taxes??? Can you explain the logic behind that???

    121. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by fscking_coward_2001 · · Score: 1

      Bonuses are actually what's taxed most stupidly. If I make twice as much money in December as June due to a year end bonus, the official scales require my employer to withhold as if I made that much every month. I get it back when I file my taxes, though.

      Your bonus isn't *taxed* at a different rate.

    122. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      This is simple.

      Person A makes $50k a year. Let's say they pay 15%. They pay $7.5k per year.
      Their apartment costs $800 per month. Their car costs $400 per month. Their food costs $300 per month.
      At the end of every month they have about $500 left over for spending money.

      Person A gets a 50% raise. They now make $75k. Let's say their total tax burder is now 20%. They now pay $15k in taxes a year.
      They buy a house with their new found fortunes with a $1800 a month mortage. They ea tout more and their food costs $500 a month. They get a nicer car and their lease is now $500. Now they have a net debt of $200 a month.
      Suddenly they're broke. Obviously the government is holding them down. Before their raise they had money to spare. After their raise they are out of money. Taxes are to blame.

      Wow, taxes are not to blame there, If they had gotten the raise and lived within their meens and not gone for the house and started eating New York Strip over flank steak then they would have more of a cash surplus.

      Just because you get a raise isn't a reason to go splurge. That is why most Americans are in debt, they get to much credit and spend money they don't have. My credit is crap, but I have no more debt atm and I save money every month.

      Be smart with your money, if you cant afford the BMW then buy a Honda.

    123. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by N1AK · · Score: 1

      Although UK tax isn't the worst around, you really want to factor in National Insurance, Council Tax and VAT to try and compare it against a lot of other countries.

    124. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Kokuyo · · Score: 1

      The French have a rather... interesting work ethic. Just because it didn't work with them does not mean it won't work in other countries.

    125. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by qc_dk · · Score: 1

      Well maybe all of us don't live in the US?

      the last tax bracket for me is 68% of everything earned above $70'000.

      yes it is true that I will still earn more if I worked more. But on the other hand you could argue that I am only being compensated a third of what my time is worth. So I'd rather stay at home and fix things around the house, than paying others to do it. It just better for me economically. I also won't have to pay the 25% sales tax on stuff i make or do myself(sales tax have to be paid on everything also services).

      So while I'm not directly coming out ahead by working less. I can come out ahead if it making less means I work fewer hours.

      A bit silly that the government is "forcing" a university educated professional to stay at home to do my own plumbing, carpenting, baking my own bread, making cheese... on the other hand I have a chance to play around with all that stuff.

    126. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by JavaRob · · Score: 2, Insightful

      That's interesting. I'm also self employed and I've found that usually I get more productive towards the end of a 12 hour day.

      I find the same thing, but (at its worst) I think it functions more along the lines of "holy shit -- I have gotten hardly anything done and it's 6pm".

      Though there's also the factor of thinking more clearly when it's dark out and quiet, and all of those other things I know I should do before stores close/etc. can be forgotten.

    127. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      What are the effects of a 24-hour shift, like for Jack Bauer?

    128. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Squegie · · Score: 2, Interesting

      I've been working that same schedule for the last year or so and love it. Every week I have Thursday morning through Sunday evening off, and every other week I get Wednesday off as well.

      It's actually 36 and 48 for an average of 42 hours/week. However, I very much enjoy having that "long weekend" every weekend.

      I'm currently doing remodeling work around the house and having a full day or two during the "workweek" to do these projects is almost crucial. I couldn't imagine accomplishing running wire and drywall in the evening after dinner and a bit more on Sunday when some of the stores close early.

      On any job I've worked where I worked the "9-5, M-F" deal, I always hated getting of work and finding that various offices/banks/stores were closed. So many errands stack to get done "by noon on Saturday". If I couldn't do a flexible (4x10) schedule, I would try to shift my hours to earlier (7am-3pm) so I could do stuff in the afternoon.

      When I was younger, I tried shifting my work schedule to later in the day: 10-8 or 11-9. I liked it at first because I like sleeping in and staying up late, but I soon discovered that I didn't have time for anything. I stayed up all night by myself and then slept till it was time to go to work. Once I forced myself to get up for a 7am shift a few times, I got used to it.

      On a side note, I do Linux admin work at a 24x7 data-center and doing the home repair adds a nice sense of balance.

    129. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      what, and the fact theyre spending more has nothing to do with theyre net debt??

    130. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by JavaRob · · Score: 4, Insightful

      Right. That worked so well in France.

      There's something to be said for putting some focus on quality of life as opposed to simply maximizing income.

      It's kind of nice to notice in France that grocery stores aren't normally open 24/7 (more like 10/6 or less), so no one has to work those shitty shifts. I moved to France a few years ago; I never noticed how weird the US was until I was back on business and managed to get a haircut at 10pm on a Sunday night. WTF, America? Yay, jobs created. But they are so shitty and so poorly paid that mostly they just prevent the employees from having the time for education, family, friends, or even searching for a better job.

      Not that France had the ideal balance at all (or even that they took the best approach to "enforcing" quality of life) but I think the base idea is a very good thing.

    131. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Squegie · · Score: 0

      This shift seems to be rather popular with data centers for some reason.

      Wouldn't be a data center in VA?

    132. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by phillous · · Score: 1

      [quote]I work in semiconductors.[/quote] WOW!! you must be really really really small to get inside one of them!

    133. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      There is a further effect leading to the 'poor middle class' in some countries. As you earn more, you become less eligible for breaks on things like medical and education expenses. So you can get into a situation where a small increase can lead to becoming worse off due to expenses rising while consumption remains the same. Combine this with an increase in marginal tax rate and things get rather less clear cut.

      If you have to spend anything more to achieve the higher income that eats the advantage too. This is particularly true of those with children seeking work and paying for childcare. The income is great but the costs can be quite high with it.

    134. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Ihmhi · · Score: 1

      That's because you want to go home and sleep. I tend to work harder when things get to plus 8 hours. I get paid hourly, so the faster I work the less pay I end up with, but I'm so damned tired at that point that I just want to go home and sleep.

    135. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Pinchiukas · · Score: 1

      I'd love a 9/36 w.a 10% pay cut.

      So you want to halve your work hours with a 10% pay cut? Do you by any accident work in mangement/marketing?

    136. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by ebbe11 · · Score: 1

      They buy a house with their new found fortunes with a $1800 a month mortage.

      Taxes are to blame?

      They ea tout more and their food costs $500 a month.

      Taxes are to blame??

      They get a nicer car and their lease is now $500.

      Taxes are to blame???

      No, bad budgeting skills are to blame.

      --

      My opinion? See above.
    137. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by two_stripe · · Score: 1

      I'm not sure how you figure you lose out in australia.

      Tax rates 2008-09
      Taxable income
      Tax on this income

      $0 - $6,000
      Nil

      $6,001 - $34,000
      15c for each $1 over $6,000

      $34,001 - $80,000
      $4,200 plus 30c for each $1 over $34,000

      $80,001 - $180,000
      $18,000 plus 40c for each $1 over $80,000

      $180,001 and over
      $58,000 plus 45c for each $1 over $180,000

      For every extra dollar you earn, you're still going to take home at least 55 cents of that.

    138. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Von+Helmet · · Score: 1

      OK, your tax calculations are at least potentially correct, assuming the rate for the band between $50k and $75 is 30% i.e. that additional 25k results in an additional $7.5k tax. I'm not sure where you conclude that someone's poor financial management is the government's fault. Before the raise, their take home pay was $42.5k, after the raise it's $60k. If the person in question didn't increase their outgoings in excess of $17.5k there wouldn't be a problem.

      This has nothing to do with tax bands or the government, and everything to do with bad budgeting.

      How you got to +5 insightful with this is beyond me.

    139. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by karbonKid · · Score: 1

      Only because the person decided to begin spending beyond their means. Taxes are not at fault here, poor money-management is...

      I fail to see how the 'Government is holding them down', when they _know_ (or at least have the means to find out) how much they will be taxed, but still decide to drive themselves further into debt.

    140. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      "Person A makes $50k a year. Let's say they pay 15%. They pay $7.5k per year. ...

      Person A gets a 50% raise. They now make $75k. Let's say their total tax burder is now 20%. They now pay $15k in taxes a year."

      $50k * 0.15 = $7.5k
      $25k * 0.20 = $5k
      Total tax = $7.5k + $5k = $15K?!

      "Taxes are to blame."

      Bad maths are to blame in my opinion. How did this get modded +5 insightful?

    141. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by pipatron · · Score: 1

      It takes as much power for heat and lights and security resources to keep it half-open, if everyone are gone on the same day you can cut the spendings for that day.

      --
      c++; /* this makes c bigger but returns the old value */
    142. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      If they are stupid enough not to work out their difference in take home before increasing there outgoings it is not the governments fault but their own

    143. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Cazis · · Score: 0

      ...Suddenly they're broke ... Taxes are to blame.

      They might be broke, but it sure as hell aint the taxes that are to blame.

      Taxes do indeed hold them back from attaining their full potential (all taxes do on an individual basis), but it's themselves that are to blame for being broke, no one or anything else.

      If you think otherwise you should sign-up for the first Budgetting 1on1 class in your area, you're in dire need.

    144. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      On the other hand the mortality rate when "on duty" is much larger then any office job... ... Well, during those downs in the stock market, I bet that difference must have gotten a lot smaller due to either suicides and heart attacks.

    145. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      10% to some is the difference between having food for the family for a week or going hungry...while others wouldn't miss 50%, nor those multimillion bonuses...

      perspective on WHO needs pay cuts is needed, not just a blanket cut for those that are barely 'living'.

    146. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      They buy a house with their new found fortunes with a $1800 a month mortage. They ea tout more and their food costs $500 a month. They get a nicer car and their lease is now $500. Now they have a net debt of $200 a month.

      The government isn't holding them down, stupid spending is. And the belief that when you get a raise, you suddenly have all the money in the world.

    147. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by GospelHead821 · · Score: 4, Insightful

      This highlights an unfortunate truth. Employers have an economic incentive to decrease the quality of their employees' lives. I could come up with a dozen different plans involving scheduling, benefits, and workplace amenities that would help to make employees happier and foster a richer national culture. Each and every one of them, however, can and would be countered by businesses as promoting inefficiency. As a society, we've decided that being being productive and successful is all the culture that we need. That makes me pretty sad.

      --
      Virtue finds and chooses the mean.
      Aristotle, Ethica Nichomachea
    148. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      There is no doubt that, cutting back to necessities (as the country may finally be lurching toward), we have a surplus of working capacity. If people *really, really* cut back to needs (rice, beans, 100 warm square feet), we'd have 75%+ unemployment. Tech, mech, and automation meant that we had enough surplus to have more hairdressers and marketers than farmers. The flip side is that we don't need more farmers, even if millions wanted to go back to it.

      As for me, I'm lucky as hell. I'd found the ability to work 30 hours or so a week, with some vacation flexibility, in my nice cheap midwest small town, for slightly under $30k a year. Lucky as all hell to have it, for now. With my degrees and training, I 'should' make $80k or maybe $100k+ on the coasts. Instead, I get time to garden, volunteer, cook, and jam with friends. Awesome and a half. But, of course, it's far less efficient for most companies. Hiring 6 people and pushing them 50 or 60 hours a week is, sadly, much more efficient than having 10 people work 30 to 35. Perhaps shifting certain fixed costs (health care) off the employer might help this become an option for more people?

      You are an idiot.

    149. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by dotmax · · Score: 4, Insightful

      I want to mee-too the part about errors on long shifts. 12 hr. shifts are great if you're generally sitting around not doing anything real complex, but if it's something that requires a lot of mental concentration for the whole 12 hrs, you're asking for trouble because your brain will turn to oatmeal. The sleep deficit thing is quite real also. I am a ... long time ... shift worker at the big atom smasher's main control room. (not the one that blew up). I know whereof i speak.

    150. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by machine321 · · Score: 1

      If everybody at every company had their hours and pay cut, their bills remain the same, so the workers' spendable income after covering expenses is either gone or greatly reduced - You have just created a recession.

      Perhaps, but everyone will be too relaxed to care.

    151. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      have you factored in the high cost of Health insurance in the states? I've lived and worked in both countries and find that canada has an overall advantage in both cost of living and quality of life.

    152. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by zeldorf · · Score: 1

      So if you get a raise and then start living beyond your means then it's the governments fault? Yeh, right. What happened to being responsible and only spending what you can afford?

    153. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      Nice TROLL

    154. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by saider · · Score: 1

      Don't forget deductions. I ended up paying an effective tax rate of 12% last year on income in the 80K range.

      --


      Remember, You are unique...just like everyone else.
    155. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by NoMoreFood · · Score: 1

      Given your first $50K is taxed at 15% for a $7.5K in taxes and a %50 raise results in a doubling of taxes ($15K), the $25K raise was actually taxed at %30 ($7.5K/$25K). No where in the current tax system do we see such an unrealistic 100% increase in tax rate per bracket.

    156. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by cyborch · · Score: 1

      Well, there public medical insurance, which is rather useless... I pay $300 for my insurance against critical illness (inability to work etc), and I have a meeting this afternoon with a second health insurance company which will pay for my use of private hospitals and medical clinics. I have yet to see how expensive that is going to be...

    157. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      That was his point, you idiot.

    158. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Guido+von+Guido · · Score: 1

      Are people really that stupid?

      Yes. Yes, people really are that stupid.

    159. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by TheThiefMaster · · Score: 1

      Irony.
      The person would blame the government, but it's there own fault. THAT WAS HIS POINT.

    160. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      Please remember that much of the farming in the US isn't very profitable on its own. The government used to restrict the amount that could be grown to avoid bankrupting farms.

      The government switched that policy in the 70s and started subsidizing farmers to insure profitability. This resulted in America spending less on food, which led to economic growth in other sectors.

      If this subsidy went away. Food prices would increase and farmers would be forced to limit what they grow. Farmers would eat their own food again.

      At that point, if the farming industry was stripped away, we might need more farmers. Smaller farmers can't afford the industrial products for production. You'd end up with hundreds of family farms rather than a few giant corporations.

      It would be a pretty painful switch to an older economy, but there are situations where thousands of farmers could be needed.

    161. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      *Whoosh*

    162. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      Can't believe how many people missed the joke.

    163. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      And if they just continued as before they would have gained a lot.

      Taxes are not to blame, living beyond your means is.

    164. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by pla · · Score: 1

      A buddy of mine worked a variant of 9/80 schedule. They worked 9 hour days M-Th, and then worked a half day every Friday.

      Theoretically, my company does that. Sounds decent enough, right?

      In practice, we rarely leave more than an hour early on Friday (and I mean that as an hour early from the 9-hour day), effectively pushing the norm up to 43-44 hours per week.

      As for true 9/80, that could actually work out, in that as long as the company doesn't expect you at all on the 10th day, they can't abuse the definition of "half day".


      The best schedule I ever worked was 12 hour days. I'd work 3 days one week, and 4 days the next week. I always had either 3 or 4 days off.

      Lucky dog! I consider any day I get up and go to work "wasted", in the personal sense, right from the start. So given the choice, I'd take your schedule without a second thought. Sadly, all the companies in my area seem averse to anything but the weakest deviation from the traditional 9-to-5 schedule.

      Of course, I also don't really care about competing in the rat race, so as long as I make enough to pay the bills, I'd just as soon work 20 hour weeks. Companies really don't like that suggestion, though (at least not in IT, anyway).

    165. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      Not Right.

      The idea that at a certain point, the govt takes most of your earnings in taxes is an urban legend.
          For anybody working by the hour, there is no "tipping point" where the govt keeps most of each additional dollar - it is just untrue.

      My marginal income tax rate is 55% (Japan). More than half of every extra yen I earn goes to the government.

      If I earned less, my marginal rate would be less. So, yes, there is demonstrably a tax tipping point.

      Maybe you just live in a low taxed environment? On the other hand I get to live in a society where everyone has access to great health services and lives longer. You pays your money, you takes your choice.

    166. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by mustafap · · Score: 1

      Unnfortuately I don't think there are many of us who could do the great, difficult work you people do. Certainly not on this forum :o)

      --
      Open Source Drum Kit, LPLC deve board - mjhdesigns.com
    167. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by joelmax · · Score: 1

      I worked that 3 on, 4 off, 4 on 3 off 12 hour shift rotation and I gotta say, it was a nice rotation to have

    168. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by TheThiefMaster · · Score: 1

      He said total burden, not new tax bracket.
      If the new tax bracket was 30% and started at 50k, then he would pay 15% of his income in tax overall.

    169. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      Are people really that stupid?

      Yes.

    170. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by arse+maker · · Score: 1

      Too soon?

    171. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by arse+maker · · Score: 1

      There is reserch that supports any position you want to take :)

    172. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by arse+maker · · Score: 1

      haha, the US pay almost no tax, its hillarious you complain about it. Its like petrol, sorry gas :) You pay half what the rest of the world does, but complain like its rape. /end common usa bashing :)

    173. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Sobrique · · Score: 2, Insightful

      Depends on the pattern. The problem with anything that rotates like that, especially if it covers 'outside normal hours' is it's murderous on the social life.

    174. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by PrinceAshitaka · · Score: 1

      France's 35 hour work week, which was to do what you described, destroyed thier economy.

      --
      quis custodiet ipsos custodes
    175. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by TheThiefMaster · · Score: 1

      I just ran the numbers, and the tax brackets do match up properly in Australia:

      $0 - $6,000
      Nil

      $6,001 - $34,000
      15c for each $1 over $6,000
      15c - $4200

      $34,001 - $80,000
      $4,200 plus 30c for each $1 over $34,000
      $4200.30 - $18000

      $80,001 - $180,000
      $18,000 plus 40c for each $1 over $80,000
      $18000.40 - $58000

      $180,001 and over
      $58,000 plus 45c for each $1 over $180,000
      $58000.45 -

    176. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Sobrique · · Score: 1
      I certainly notice when I'm covering 'lates' at work - the time after 16:30 when the rest of the worker drones clear off, my productivity skyrockets due to the lack of noise and general interruption.

      Of course, this probably balances out, as sometimes when this happens I decide do 'actively slack off'.

    177. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      lol, the UK tax is great.. but NI is about 5% from memory when I worked there. Its not a "tax", but its money you pay out of income, so the nomenclature is a bit arbitrary. Which makes it pretty bad, about the same as Australia.

    178. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by PrinceAshitaka · · Score: 0, Troll

      I hate to say it but the onyl way that america remains competative in the world market is to overwork their employees. America is niether skilled nor efficient enough to work fewer hours.

      --
      quis custodiet ipsos custodes
    179. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Sobrique · · Score: 1

      4 day weeks sound good to me. I'd quite happily do that, and add my "friday" onto the other 4 days, hours wise.

    180. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Pippinjack · · Score: 1

      I agree that UK NI should really be added in, but sales and property taxes - which is what Council Tax and VAT are - aren't income based taxes.
      To be really fair, I suppose you would have to look at the total tax burden and also try and quantify what benefits you get back e.g. health care, public transport e.t.c.

      --
      hear all, see all, say nowt; eat all, supp all, pay nowt; and if tha ever does owt for nowt - do it for thissen
    181. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Farmer+Pete · · Score: 1

      Right now I work 8 hours a day (8:30 to 5:30 with an hour lunch). The trick is, we are a global company, and we stop doing computer support at 5:30pm est. So our plants on the west coast can't get any computer help after 2:30pm! So, my boss wants one of us to work until 8ish every day, kind of "on call" but with the expectation that we'll get multiple calls every night. It's not horrid, since it ends at 8pm and we can do it from our homes, but it's still a bit of a change. So basically 5 of our technicians would go to working 9 hour days and on one day a week we would work 4 hours from home in the evening.

    182. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by egcagrac0 · · Score: 1

      Thank goodness. First read through said "Their cat costs $400 per month."

      I was afraid of an unrealistic price structure, or that they were "slumming" in the feline department...

    183. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Kreigaffe · · Score: 1

      Up until this week, for 3.5yrs I've been working 12-hour shifts. 4 on, 3 off, 3 on, 1 off, 3 on, 3 off, 4 on, 7 off, return to beginning.

      Oh yeah, it's an industrial work environment. And for my first year, a lot of my days off were mandatory overtime days in -- 4 months straight of 60-hour weeks. Did I mention that during every off-stretch we switched between day and night shift, too? Yeah.

      Miserable fucking shit. Bad for your health. Bad for you. Bad.

      --
      ... still waiting for this free-as-in-beer free beer I keep hearing about. :|
    184. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by nevesis · · Score: 1

      You hit it spot on.

      I'm not a morning person. When it gets late, dark, and quiet my focus rejuvenates. All that matters is me and my work.

    185. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by trolltalk.com · · Score: 1

      we'd also immediately eliminate 10% of our economy.... but yeah otherwise great idea

      No it wouldn't. If 9 people work 36 hours instead of 40 hours, assuming the demand is there, that creates one more job. Howwever, if the demand WASN'T there for that extra job, one of those 40-hour jobs would have been eliminated.

    186. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 2, Informative

      In Oct and Nov of 2001, a fiend of mine dressed in whatever it is NYFD wear off duty that says, "hey I'm a fire fighter" and hit the bars. Never before and not since had he gotten so much tail.

    187. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by lupis42 · · Score: 1

      Coverage hours probably means mandatory shifts and pre-defined lunch hours. It's a necessary side effect of needing something to be always monitored from, say, 7AM to 8PM. Our office does 9 hour days, five days a week, with a fixed half hour for lunch, because, well, working from home cuts our productivity substantially (not so much that we don't do it in the event of weather issues, or what have you, but enough that we don't do it just for the hell of it) and we each have a different shift, scheduled so that they overlap during the period where call/email volume is highest, and only a couple people are on early and late, when volume is low. It works out really well, but there's no flexibility, and no easy way to introduce it.

    188. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      In actual fact, under certain circumstances, you CAN actually take a pay cut and *take home* more money, because this also reduces your withholding, which I think is what most people feel is their "taxes."

      As an example my father, a state worker, once got a $3 raise. Not $3/hr mind you, but $3 per year -- "Cost of Living" increase. Like I said, he was a state worker. Anyway, this increase happened to be just enough to bump him into the higher tax bracket, and his withholding increased. The math worked out in such a way that he actually lost money, taking home a few pennies less on each paycheck. Later that year, the state revamped the pay structure in such a way that effectively took away the $3 COLA and gave him more PTO instead. Once this became effective, his withholding decreased accordingly and he took home a couple pennies more on each paycheck.

      So it can happen, but it's usually not enough of a difference to worry about.

    189. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by rhyder128k · · Score: 1

      The problem with the French system is that most households had an uneven split between the bread winner and the other partner, just like in UK/US. French women didn't accept that they would have to increase their work hours in order to maintain a consistent level of household income.

      The so called lump of labour fallacy has been unfairly and unevenly applied to this issue. Certainly, there are fixed costs of employment that don't scale when a person decreases their hours. This means that there is a loss of efficiency when a worker decreases his or her hours. However, those assessments forget that a corresponding increase of work hours ought should be imposed in the case of low hours workers, with a corresponding increase in efficiency

      Once again, this is an issue that the press didn't want to cover because it would cause some uncomfortable questions for feminists who bleat about being held back in their career because of their greater caring responsibilities.

      --
      Michael Reed, freelance tech writer.
    190. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by grommit · · Score: 1

      Wooosh!

    191. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      France has tried this and failed miserably. I work in France and got fired 2 years after the 35 hour week law was passed. Then it took me 18 month to get a new job (no company was willing to offer me a job with that law.

      Unemployment raised to 10% then.

      Today I work in France for a US company. No such thing as 35 hour limit, long holiday and unions, but the pay is excellent.

      I'm sure Obama will try some of what you suggest, but I'm also certain it won't work.
      But if it can help to make France look more competitive, I'm all for it!!!

    192. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by lupis42 · · Score: 1

      Not if tax brackets are applied retroactively. I don't know of anywhere that this is still done, but suppose you paid 20% if you made less than 50k, and 25%(of the total) if you made more. On 50k (25/hr x40hrs x50 wks) you pay 10k, and keep 40k. On 25/hr x40.8hrs x50wks, you make 51k, of which you pay 12.75k, leaving you with less than you started with. This corrects for itself eventually, and I don't know anywhere that actually taxes like this (making this a strawman if you want to take it that way), but the tax rate doesn't have to be 100% for it to cost you more to make more.

    193. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by plague3106 · · Score: 1

      No, it's most people. A recent study came out that said after about 7 hours of work, productivity plummits.

    194. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 1, Interesting

      Your tax rates for Canada are the FEDERAL tax rates, don't forget to add the PROVINCIAL tax rates above those. The total income tax rates gets above 50% pretty fast!

      In all honesty, I'd rather have higher GST+TVQ and lower income taxes. The biggest tax burden should be on consumption, not income.

    195. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by lupis42 · · Score: 1

      That's because it isn't. On the other hand, you don't want it to become so progressive that there's no incentive to make more. I've always wondered why the top few brackets aren't broke out more by order of magnitude. In any event, under the US system (and ignoring deductions), it is always better to make more $.

    196. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      Including the IRS. Which is why, if you follow an IRS agent's advice on your taxes, and they turn out to be incorrect, you still get penalized.

      In any case, while it isn't true now, there have been times in the US when it was true that making more could mean less take-home. Remember, the top tax brackets in the US have been as high as 79%.

    197. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by lorax · · Score: 1

      The child tax credit, like most other credits and deductions phase out as your income gets higher, so you shouldn't ever actually lose money. The way they phase out can get complicated, if your interested, IRS Publication 972 details how the phase-out happens.

      IRA contribution limits also phase out in a similar way

    198. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Verteiron · · Score: 0

      Oh yeah? Well MY father works 23 hours a day, 7 days a week and HE'S been doing it for the past 30 years. He's the only person in the world who works in his field, and all he's wanted for all these years is to stop paying for permission to come to work!

      --
      End of lesson. You may press the button.
    199. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      >> If everybody at every company had their hours and pay cut, their bills remain the same, so the workers' spendable income after covering expenses is either gone or greatly reduced - You have just created a recession.

      Companies around the nation *are* cutting hours and pay because of the recession. Or firing people.

      My company implemented a policy of giving us 5 unpaid holidays per year and freezing both hiring and salaries. Several large companies have implemented such measures as a stopgap.

      My point here being that I'd *much* rather have a 4 day work week--though I have less spending money, I also get a 3 day weekend (woohoo) than have my hourly pay rate decreased or find myself laid off, if it is a choice between the two.

      We're already *in* a recession and companies are going to do what they are going to do to keep their profit margins up.

      When the recession is over my hypothetical boss could decide to change back to a 5 day work week and I would still be making the same hourly wage. Obviously this is a matter of personal preference, but I would like that a lot more than being fired.

    200. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by biased_estimator · · Score: 1

      No, now they are living beyond their means.

    201. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Civil_Disobedient · · Score: 1

      Frankly, I'd rather have a full day off every other week.

      Yeah, I don't understand the logic of a half-day of work for a lot of people. If you have a long commute, the actually-working / sitting-in-traffic ratio becomes so ludicrous that you might as well either "call in sick" or just go the full day.

    202. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by the_B0fh · · Score: 1

      Oh boo hoo hoo. You got called out on a stupid mistake, and now you're all whiny about it. Cry me a fucking river.

      Your original point was about tax brackets, so stop trying to squirm your way out about threshold and other crap. Say what you mean, and mean what you say.

    203. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      Furthermore, when you factor in sales and property taxes, it is even harder to have more disposable income by earning less on your paycheck.

      As you earn more, you spend proportionally less of your income to maintain your living expenses. When you are poor, you can easily blow your entire paycheck on food and rent, usually not taxed directly. As you earn more, you can blow it all on taxable consumer goods. But at a certain point, there are only so many home theaters and yachts that you can buy every year. The leftovers get invested rather than spent, and while that is often still taxed, it is usually only when sold, and only on any increase in value.

      The same goes for property taxes. Poor people rent. Their taxes are spread out over the whole property and divided up into 12 easy payments that are simply included in the rent. As you earn more money and have kids, you buy a house with a mortgage in the best area of town you can afford. You pay more in property tax. As you get rich, you can buy a property outright in a non-incorporated area. This is why property tax on a $300k house in Chicago can be $5000, and property tax on a $5M house in the middle of farmland can be $1000.

      It pays to be rich, kids, no matter how much the Gimmie tries to take.

    204. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by MarioMax · · Score: 1

      Ditto. 12 hour swing shifts are a blessing. My work place sets the shifts up as:

      Sunday-Wednesday, then Thurs-Saturday one week
      Sunday-Tuesday, then Wednesday-Saturday next week for the day shift

      and

      Saturday-Tuesday, and Wednesday-Saturday one week
      Sunday-Tuesday, and Wednesday-Friday next week for the night shift.

      You always have at least 3 days off every week in a row. After working a shift like that for years, I couldn't imagine a traditional 8-5 M-F shift being any better.

    205. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by cyborch · · Score: 1

      Replying to myself. I just came back from the meeting with the insurance company. Based on my current age I am going to pay approx. $272 for medical insurance...

      What was the AC's point again?

    206. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      I was a paid firefighter paramedic in a rural area, 7 days on 24x7 but only 5/40 office hours, I would either take a medic unit or command rig home every other night, then enjoy a two week vacation after that grueling 1-3 calls a day on my on week, as an officer and EMS director I pulled $70k/yr.

    207. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by profplump · · Score: 1

      That's not true. If I work X hours per year and pay a 20% income tax, but working X+1 hours a year would result in a 40% income tax, it would make less post-tax money working X+1 hours instead of X hours.

      Now there's some X+Y where Y>1 makes your total post-tax income exceed your income at hours=X, but it could be a long way off.

    208. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      Probably the same sort of people that his scenario accurately describes.

    209. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by TheLink · · Score: 1

      It gives the ones at the top of the pyramid a lot of free time though :).

      It's a bit like the good old days where the slaves did most of the labour and thus the upper classes could sit around and talk about politics or physics.

      If you were a shareholder in a company would you be happy if its bosses didn't try to squeeze every last drop from the employees?

      --
    210. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      Just a minor point, but FICA is actually 12.4% of your total income. If you work for a company they are required to pay half of it, but if you are self employed, you get hit by the entire thing. Theoretically, if FICA was eliminated, you'd get a 12+% raise in either case due to market forces. An extra 12% would sure go a long ways in my IRAs - certainly a lot further than social security ever will!

    211. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by mmkkbb · · Score: 1
      --
      -mkb
    212. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Heian-794 · · Score: 1

      I also work odd hours, and love it.

      I'm at a Japanese company and start at 9 PM and finish at 5 AM, so I always get a seat on the trains because everyone's going in the other direction. I've got the whole office to myself, can concentrate easily, and have no boss watching over me. Three weeks on, then one week off -- what a schedule!

      Over here unpaid overtime and sleep deprivation are practiclaly the national pastimes. When I first started, I had to work like everyone else -- 8:30 AM to about 10 or 11 PM, Monday through Friday. There wasn't enough time to get eight hours of sleep each day even if you climbed into the futon as soon as you got home! And as a 22-year-old new recruit, I couldn't exactly express and opinions about this system, or express any desires to actually get a good night's sleep and stay healthy. It was pure misery being so tired all the time, and when the weekend rolled around, I'd sleep until past noon on Saturday and then not be able to sleep Saturday night, meaning that it was that much harder to get into the next work week.

      And despite the night shift being so much easier, no one's jealous of me in the least. The typical Japanese office worker associates night work with staying at the office all night long after already having worked all day, so nobody's clamoring to take my position away!

      The only problem with night work is having to sleep in the day in a possibly noisy neighborhood. I'm lucky in that my area is quiet. I can't recommend this enough. A 40-hour night workweek is so much more tolerable than a 50- or 60-hour daytime workweek -- your body will thank you!

    213. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      Provincial taxes in Canada start at 10% and go up from there. Only some states in the US have state income taxes and the highest is Vermont at 9.5% (for the high bracket), but most of the states that do tax have very low like 2-3% rates. In the end the Tax rates in the US break even at around $60000USD vs Canada. This is why rich people move to the US vs Canada.

    214. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by MBGMorden · · Score: 1

      I'd pretty much agree. Half of the great thing about a day off is sleeping in an extra hour or two. If I still have to wake up and go to work then it totally negates that benefit. And it's not as if getting off in the middle of the day on a Friday opens up a lot anyways. The world is still at work. If you plan on going out or having fun you're still probably not going to head out until long after you would have left work anyways.

      --
      "People who think they know everything are very annoying to those of us who do."-Mark Twain
    215. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by multimed · · Score: 1

      It's kind of nice to notice in France that grocery stores aren't normally open 24/7 (more like 10/6 or less), so no one has to work those shitty shifts.

      Back before kids, my wife & I frequently did our grocery shopping after going out to the bars with friends. Beats the hell out of the packed isles, long checkout lines and maybe worst of all, old people oblivious to the world around them that you get in after work hours on weekdays or weekends. Grocery stores usually have restocking & that sort of work that needs to be done in down hours anyway, so if you're already paying to keep the lights on & a handful of staff, a couple of extras to check out customers isn't much different. My mom worked a lot of 11-7 shifts at a grocery story and there was no "has to" about it, it was purely by choice. She'd come home & help get us off to school & sleep while we were there and still had time to catch our sports & other after school activities.

      --
      Vote Quimby.
    216. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by techess · · Score: 1

      Exactly! 1/2 days make no sense if you have a long commute or live in an area that has a lot of traffic. I would also prefer to work 4/10 than the 9/80. Having a 3 day weekend every week is blissful.

      Especially when you live in a cold climate. During the winter it is getting dark at 5:00 so what does it matter if you leave at 5 or 7. In the summer it does suck to lose the long evenings, but the three day weekend makes up for it.

      --
      Don't anthropomorphize computers. They *hate* that.
    217. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by hattig · · Score: 1

      It depends on your life situation.

      If you are single then the 9/80 or 4/40 pattern is great, you get another *whole* day off (which are far more appealing and useful), and you can lose the time in the evening because you wouldn't do anything constructive in it anyway except play games or drink or watch TV.

      If you aren't single, but have no offspring, then you want whatever will sync your time off (well, most people want that). If you can both get 9/80 or 4/40 that's brilliant, otherwise you probably want the evenings together. Of course, if you have a far shorter commute you could still sync up if you had 9/80, and you would get the bonus day off still.

      With children, I think you would want time in the evening with them, so 5/40 is good here. Maybe 9/80 or 4/40 in holidays...

      Right now I could do 9/80 quite happily. It means I avoid the rush hour on the way home for a start.

    218. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      I would love to cut your throat you stupid son of a bitch.

    219. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      Right wingers always use this misconception to argue against progressive tax systems. They claim it is unfair that people who make more money pay more tax, which is a load of bollocks.

      Using the above example: two people earning $20k and $200k both pay the same level tax on income below $50k and the same level of tax on income over $100k. I don't see any unfairness with the tax rates - only in the disparity of salary to begin with.

    220. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Talderas · · Score: 1

      I'd take a bit of a pay cut to go from 5x9 hours to 4x9 hours a week.

      --
      "Lack of speed can be overcome. In the worst case by patience." --Znork
    221. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by maxume · · Score: 1

      Military spending accounts for a good deal of the 'hidden' disparity (i.e., Canada supposedly has a higher level of social services, so how are they taxing less?).

      The interesting question is how much/whether Canada benefits 'for free' from U.S. military spending (it would seem that technology transfer is worth a lot, not to mention being friendly with the worlds largest navy).

      --
      Nerd rage is the funniest rage.
    222. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by default+luser · · Score: 1

      Same here. Even at the 9th hour, my brain is already turned to mush. That's why I'm happy-as-hell that my employer offers an OPTIONAL 9/80 work week. The people who do take advantage enjoy it, and I enjoy those Fridays because nobody is here to bug me :)

      --

      Man is the animal that laughs.
      And occasionally whores for Karma.

    223. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by bluie- · · Score: 1

      It seems to me there are two types of people... those who value money more than time, and those who value time more than money. I personally value time a lot more than money. I'd much, much rather work less and make less. I have absolutely no desire to own a luxury car or a huge house. The only problem is real estate is pretty expensive where I live (new england), so even a small house requires a lot of money :(

      --
      life is a tragedy to those who feel, and a comedy to those who think
    224. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      Oblig Spanish Inquisition etc. etc. etc.

    225. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by hattig · · Score: 1

      $0-$8836 = 0%
      $8836 - $59788 = 31%
      $59788+ = 41%

      There, have NI added too (not mentioning the 12% NI the employer has to pay as a hidden tax). Figures assuming about $1.45 to the pound I assume.

      Then there is $1500 - $3000 a year council tax (per house).
      And 15% VAT (down from 17.5% last year) on most purchases except food and children's stuff.

      Still, you can plainly see that it's failing as progressive taxation. Total income tax burden should be lower for lower wages (e.g., $8836 - $24000 at 21% say). You could argue that maybe at $120000+ it could be 50% as well.

    226. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      Male porn actor.

      Then one needs to 'work' more to get paid more in that field...

    227. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by howman · · Score: 1

      At which fucking point can you come out ahead while making less money?!

      At the point where you work under the table for cash...

      --
      flinging poop since 1969
    228. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by blueZ3 · · Score: 2, Funny

      The Kama Sutra?

      --
      Interested in a Flash-based MAME front end? Visit mame.danzbb.com
    229. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by jbr439 · · Score: 2, Interesting

      You're not including provincial income taxes which are generally significantly higher than state income taxes; and, with the exception of Alberta (I think), have the same progressive nature as federal income taxes.

    230. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by bluie- · · Score: 2, Interesting

      I've always thought even 8 hours is too much, for coding work anyway. I'd love to set up an experimental office that runs like so:

      Show up at 10:00. 30 minute meeting for everyone to quickly discuss what they're doing/what needs doing.

      Work like crazy for 2.5 hours. Take a group lunch break/meeting for 30 minutes, to quickly discuss progress/concerns.

      Work like crazy for 1.5 hours. Have a 30 minute meeting to go over what was done/what needs to be done tomorrow. Work is done for the day (4:00pm).

      I really feel like that could be super productive. Meetings would motivate and keep people on track, and knowing that your day will soon be over would further motivate you to keep working. I also feel like workspaces without walls would help discourage web-surfing, maybe also have people work side-by-side to be able to answer each other's questions.

      These are just ideas of course, and may fail miserably in the real world, but even so I'd love to try it and tweak it until some variation at least could work. What does everyone else think?

      --
      life is a tragedy to those who feel, and a comedy to those who think
    231. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      At which fucking point can you come out ahead while making less money?!

      When "Uncle Luigi" pays you "minimum wage" for that "construction" job from which you never come home dirty!

    232. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      Plus, what other government employee are people GENUINELY HAPPY to see whenever they show up? People end up pissed at cops, postal workers bring bills, politicians aren't worth a damn... firefighters are universally beloved.

    233. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      H&R Block are a poor choice for anyone. They do not hire accountants to handle the returns. The returns are not double-checked by a second preparer. They OFTEN have mistakes which are not caught, and which can cause their customer money if the IRS pursues. There is a reason they say that if you go to court "they'll go with you". They have to go to court regularly because of problems with the returns they've prepared.

      If your return is truly simple enough, you can often do it yourself.

      If not, then hire a professional, or local company, not a "tax mill", just don't go to H&R Block. Several accountants I know who prepare personal Tax returns have told me that EVERY SINGLE TIME they get a client who used H&R Block the previous year, the return was prepared wrong, and the person often owes money.

      Yeah, Fraud and liability is a great selling point.

      (The fact that H&R Block also charges people for a "Rapid Refund" loan to get your money instantly, instead of just having it wired into your bank account pretty darn quick is another way they are praying on the poor)

    234. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Kelbear · · Score: 1

      I get /way/ more done in the last hours of the 12 hour days because everybody else has gone home and they stop @#%^ing bugging me.

    235. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      Technological development will always drive economic growth.

    236. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by gal1264 · · Score: 1

      At the point you stop getting a tax CREDIT is certainly one way.

      There are other tax threshold issues as well across the boards based on things the government deems "appropriate" but certainly not basic tax rates.

    237. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by shutdown+-p+now · · Score: 1

      I actually wasn't aware of that (you know short of the post above this one), thanks for presenting this information in the most douchiest mother fucking assholiest way possible. No, seriously thanks. People are this fucking stupid because the concept is presented in a fucking stupid way.

      The concept is presented in many ways, some of them suitable for explaining to a 6 year old. If you actually earn money and pay your taxes, but you don't actually know how the tax system works in your country even on the most basic, primitive level (i.e. the nature of tax brackets), then you are indeed ignorant, and deserve to be called on that - especially when you go ahead and post it on /. rather than keeping your ignorance to itself.

      Seriously, is it so hard to look up "tax bracket" on Wikipedia before trying to post something insightful on the topic? (this applies to virtually any topic you might want to post regarding, by the way)

    238. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by GenePoolFairy · · Score: 1

      Around here (Romania) everybody is equal:

      16% of total income - that's salaries, dividends, bank deposits dividends, etc.

      Of course it is topped by pension, state medical insurance and unemployment contribution, each a few %.

      So as long as you get a fat paycheck everithing is all right. If not, tough luck you pay as everybody else.

      Of course, there's a law requiring that overtime is paid 150% for Saturdays and 200% for Sundays, but that is another subject, usually nobody benefits from that, almost no employer will shell out extra for overtime.

      PS: businesses pay the same, yes, 16%.

    239. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by two_stripe · · Score: 1

      Yep,
      Would be nice if they presented it that way on the website to help people understand that they will not going to go home with less money because of income tax after a 5% pay rise.

    240. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Pluvo · · Score: 1

      I work this same schedule & would hate to go back to 5x8s or 4x10s. I'm already there, so what's a few more hours? Simple math shows that while most folks average 8 days off a month, I get 14. Add in 4 weeks of vacation & I actually have more days off each year than I work. As a wage slave that means every check has OT & every holiday I work earns my 2.5x OT. Best of all, I'm not tied to a pager or cellphone.

      Plus, I work nights (+10% shift differential) so I get to take my daughter to school in the morning & spend the afternoon with her while getting my 6 hours sleep while she's at school. She stays with her Grandparents' at night so I earn the double bonus of not having to pay for a sitter & no complaints about never seeing thier grandchild. I get to be an involved parent (including volunteering at school) & my job babysitting mainframes allows me lots of downtime to read ./ between catnaps. ;-)

      Its not glamorous, I don't make six-figures or drive a BMW, but time spent with my daughter makes it all worth while.

    241. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by MetalFlow · · Score: 1

      I have worked four ten hour shifts as well, and personally, I don't see any great benefit to having an extra two hours off on a work day. I did, however, see a tremendous benefit to having an extra day off during the week. That allowed me to run errands and the like on a weekday and then *actually enjoy* my weekends. Plus, there are many errands that you cannot complete on the weekends, so you try to sneak them in right after work... when everyone else is trying to do the same thing... and no one wins... except for those that had the whole day off and went out on the road early to get it done.

    242. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by mofag · · Score: 1

      Can someone please tell me what is so wrong with France? Why do /.ers so revile that country?

      They have a better healthcare system, better education and better quality of life than the US or Canada (where I live) so I'm not quite sure where they are going wrong. Is it some ideological revulsion at 8 weeks/year vacation? Yes, 8 weeks is just wrong isn't it? Morally repugnant. Or... The US is the richest country in the world and all its people happily work away with virtually no vacation and the thanks they get is to live in fear of bankruptcy, repossession and being denied essential healthcare on a technicality. Hmmm, which country sounds fucked up?

    243. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by SCHecklerX · · Score: 1

      how, exactly, is putting in more hours for the same amount of work more efficient?

      And what about all the time commuting to and from the office vs. telecommuting on days where it makes sense to do so (working on a project plan that requires no input from anybody else, etc).

      It's not about being more productive vs. being in the office more. It's about control, and it's ridiculous.

    244. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by QRDeNameland · · Score: 1

      You are of course correct, and I did consider adding to the post, but I didn't want to complicate the information too much.

      --
      Momentarily, the need for the construction of new light will no longer exist.
    245. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by MilesAttacca · · Score: 2

      Seven years is hardly too soon.

      --
      98% of America's teens drink alcohol, smoke, and have sex. Put this in your sig if you like bagels.
    246. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Fallingcow · · Score: 2, Insightful

      I'd definitely take a 4-5% pay cut to get 4 weeks of vacation time rather than the standard 2.

      Hell, give me a 15% cut and put me on a completely continental European work schedule--4 or 5 weeks vacation, extra holidays, and occasionally some "faire le pont" when a holiday falls only one day from a weekend. That'd be more than a fair cut for that.

      Barring legislation mandating such things, it'll never be a realistic desire for someone who doesn't wish to be stuck at the bottom of their career's pecking order for eternity... but I can dream!

    247. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Directrix1 · · Score: 1

      I believe the original post was talking about a tipping point where the government keeps most of each additional dollar. I suppose a new tax bracket does not make the government keep "most" of each additional dollar, but it does keep "more" of each additional dollar. And taking into account that one's time is a finite asset I don't think I am technically incorrect.

      --
      Occam's razor is the blind faith in the natural selection of least resistance and in universal oversimplification. -- EF
    248. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Directrix1 · · Score: 1

      I want to see your 6 year old explanation.

      --
      Occam's razor is the blind faith in the natural selection of least resistance and in universal oversimplification. -- EF
    249. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      While those are good explanations of how the tax code works, don't forget about the effect that deduction phase-outs have. Student loan interest deductions, IRA contributions, medical expense deductions, etc. are all phased out, sometimes quite abruptly.

      It is possible to make $10-$20K extra and end up keeping none of it.

      The only upside is that most items phase out at different AGI/MAGI levels, so it would be an extreme case indeed for somebody to miss the boat on several deductions just by making a few dollars more.

    250. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Jarik+C-Bol · · Score: 1

      10 hour days are hilarious when they start at 6am. and go through lunch. sure, you're home by 4 or so, but that working in the dark is a bitch.

      --
      I've decided to Diversify my Holdings. I've divided my cash between my left and right pockets, instead of all in one.
    251. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Jarik+C-Bol · · Score: 1

      this is why i could do 14 hour shifts running a computer lab, but anything over 10 hours in construction starts getting dangerous fast.

      --
      I've decided to Diversify my Holdings. I've divided my cash between my left and right pockets, instead of all in one.
    252. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      Someone else sees it! Well said.

    253. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Jarik+C-Bol · · Score: 1

      having an economic system that is so nucking futs complex does nothing to help though.

      --
      I've decided to Diversify my Holdings. I've divided my cash between my left and right pockets, instead of all in one.
    254. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      That's kind of a dick move dude.

    255. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Jarik+C-Bol · · Score: 1

      so what do you do when 80% of your income is earmarked for the following exact things "rent (cheapest place in town) electric, heat, food, and vehicle payment (almost payed off). and the final 20% always gets vaporized by some sort of emergency cost?

      --
      I've decided to Diversify my Holdings. I've divided my cash between my left and right pockets, instead of all in one.
    256. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by cayenne8 · · Score: 1
      "Right now I work 8 hours a day (8:30 to 5:30 with an hour lunch). The trick is, we are a global company, and we stop doing computer support at 5:30pm est. So our plants on the west coast can't get any computer help after 2:30pm! So, my boss wants one of us to work until 8ish every day, kind of "on call" but with the expectation that we'll get multiple calls every night. It's not horrid, since it ends at 8pm and we can do it from our homes, but it's still a bit of a change. So basically 5 of our technicians would go to working 9 hour days and on one day a week we would work 4 hours from home in the evening."

      Why would the 'on call' person not shift their hours and come in a few hours later to offset this?

      You ARE getting paid for this OT time on call aren't you?

      --
      Light travels faster than sound. This is why some people appear bright until you hear them speak.........
    257. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 1, Interesting

      You forgot

      Canada: 0% for the first $8,000

      Also, Canadian payroll taxes have been on the rise. CCP = 4.9%, EI = ~2%, = ~7%, or more than FICA.

      Where Canada bites you is provincially. The middle class pays 10-24% provincial income tax, much more than state income taxes, although this varies quite a bit by province.

    258. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by DudeFromMars · · Score: 1

      >>Of course, if a company doesn't avoid layoffs, those laid off workers find their pay and hours cut a lot more

      Correct.
      It is a good solution for one company - it will not work at all when applied to all companies.

    259. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      According to your table at $8,026 the tax rate would be $1,605.15 or $802.65 more than at an income of $8,025. The extra dollar costs $801.65.

    260. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      Your math doesn't make any sense at all.

      Their after tax income (disposable income) is 42.5k/12 months = $3541/month. They spend 800+400+300 per month = $1500. You claim they have $500 left over every month, so where did they other $1541/month go?

      In the second example, their disposable income is now 60k/12 months = 5k/month. They're now spending $1300 more in debt per month. So now they pay $2800 per month: 5000 - 2800 = $2200/month.

      Even if you take 15%/month, their take home pay remains the same. 50k/12 months = $4166/month * 0.85 = $3541/month. I dont' follow you at all.

    261. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by trolltalk.com · · Score: 1

      Park the car once in a while and take a bike/public/transit/walk/carpool.

      A lot of times, those "emergency costs" are something like "the car needs new tires", etc. Also, a lot of the unnecessary expenses are "I'm too tired to cook - lets get in the car and go pick up some burgers and fries." Why do you think McDonalds is such a money machine? So parking the car will save you money directly and indirectly.

      Once your car is paid off DO NOT BUY ANOTHER ONE UNLESS YOU CAN PAY CASH FOR IT.

      That should give you some margin to maneuver.

    262. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by trolltalk.com · · Score: 1

      Cutting down the number of hours per week increases per-hour productivity as well as lowering the level of defects. Quality, in the long run, is cheaper than quantity.

    263. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by DudeFromMars · · Score: 1

      >>Also the repayment of the debt is a flat rate on all earnings, that increases depending on gross earnings.

      That is why rational tax systems don't apply higher rates on all earnings, but only to the next dollar earned. That way, every dollar earned results in more take-home pay.

      It is kind of funny that the Australian UNIVERSITY debt system failed both math and logic.
      Probably more a reflection on the intelligence of lawmakers than of university types.

    264. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by trolltalk.com · · Score: 1

      Since a 4/36 would be the exact opposite of "working overtime all the time", you'll admit that your tax load will be fractionally less, since more of your income, both proportionally, will be taxed at lower rates.

      In other words, you might only "lose" 3 hours pay for working 4 hours less. What's the problem with that?

    265. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      FICA is 7.65%

      6.2% is the Social Security part of FICA.
      1.45% is the Medicare part of FICA.

      IIRC, the Medicare part doesnt have a cap like the SS part does.

      Either way, I pay 15.3%. Well, technically, everyone does, although hyper-technically, it is 14.2% (15.3/107.65)

    266. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by trolltalk.com · · Score: 1

      ... and who do you think pays for that? Ultimately, we all do.

      1. If you're an employee, every dollar of payroll tax your employer pays is a dollar less that they can pay you in direct compensation.

      2. The employer earns income from their employees work (otherwise, why hire the employee). So ultimately, a portion of the employee's labour output is paying those payroll taxes.

      Make no mistake about it - you're paying for it one way or another. It's not magic. It's not rocket science. A payroll tax is a tax on employees, not employers - the fewer employees a company has, the less it pays, and if you're an employee, you're the one earning the $$$ to pay for that tax.

    267. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by DudeFromMars · · Score: 1

      Despite that, it certainly is a particularly aggressive myth, especially in the service industry.

      You would think that the tech types around here would understand how marginal rates work, it is a fairly straight-forward math and logic problem.
      On a related note, I wonder why software is so buggy?

    268. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by immcintosh · · Score: 1

      Your time is worth nothing, monetarily, unless there is somebody willing to buy it. If you start selling more of your time that had previously not been sold, then there is no conceivable way it could be selling at a loss, because its worth prior to being sold had been exactly zero. What you describe would be selling your time at a less-than-desirable profit, which is a very different thing (and the difference is very important).

    269. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by trolltalk.com · · Score: 1

      "lower energy costs (4 days commuting instead of 5), and 3-day weekends every week ... "

      This is assuming everyone stays at home and does nothing...

      No - this assumes that they do as much traveling on weekends as they did before - shopping, going to church, visiting their aunt Ethel, whatever ...

    270. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by icebrain · · Score: 2, Informative

      Most graduated tax systems don't work that way. In your example, the money you make from working X hours would be taxed at 20%. Working X+1 hours doesn't mean that your whole income gets taxed at 40%; rather, the 40% rate is only applied to the additional money earned through the +1 hour.

      In other words, your returns diminish from working extra, but they never go negative. A plot of take-home vs. earned income would start out at a 1:1 slope, then gradually decrease to a lower (but still positive) slope, but it would never go negative.

      --
      The meek may inherit the earth, but the strong shall take the stars.
    271. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by icebrain · · Score: 1

      The monetary benefit doesn't go away, but at some point it's just not worth it to work that extra hour. Where that point is depends entirely on the person doing the work, and how much they want that extra money.

      --
      The meek may inherit the earth, but the strong shall take the stars.
    272. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      My understanding is that the FICA in the US is similar to the EI and CPP deductions. There are also the provincal medical plan deductions we must pay.

      Also in Canada you can't write off mortgage expenses as tax deductions like in the US.

    273. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Farmer+Pete · · Score: 1

      It isn't OT. (4*9)+(1*4) = 40hrs. Not that I get OT anyways.

    274. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 1, Interesting

      You didn't include Provincial taxes which in Ontario would be...

      first $36,848 21.05%
      over $38,832 up to $77,664 31.68%
      over $77,664 up to $79,572 37.44%
      over $79,572 up to $126,264 38.01%
      over $126,264 42.40%

      Also these are CDN$, so your 80K job in the USA would be like 100K here on currency exchange alone. US companies typically pay better for the same work.

    275. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by gyroidben · · Score: 1

      I don't think late opening hours even create jobs, since if you can't get a haircut at 10pm on a Sunday night you'd just go during the daytime. Increased business during the day would mean more hairdressers employed during daytime hours. It mostly a question of how you weigh employees schedules against consumer convenience and whether you dislike government regulation of things like opening hours on principle.

    276. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      As I recall, back in the olden days before Google, I was flat out told that that was how it worked. Several times. By everybody. I was told that if you jump a tax bracket, you loose money. My teachers said it. My parents said it. My employers said it. It was repeated in newspaper articles. No one corrected me on that one until well after I was an adult. It's not like the IRS even tries to educate the populace on basic tax law. Before I used to fill out my own 1040EZ tax return forms without realizing it because the IRS provides a nice chart that calculates you tax burden for you.

      In my opinion, every high school student should be required to pass a class on basic finance, including how to calculate their taxes. I wish We had a class like that in my high school.

    277. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      It's not about the tax bracket, it's about not being able to make certain deductions when you reach a certain income.

      For a few bucks more you may get yourself in a position to not be able to deduct hundreds or thousands or otherwise eligible deductions.

    278. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by myth24601 · · Score: 1

      It would be a big undertaking to compare US taxation with other countries. Not just in terms of rates and (State, local, FICA, whatever)taxes but there is a large number of tax breaks that people may be eligible to claim.

      Common examples:
      Mortgage Interest deductions
      Childcare tax credits (I know this is slashdot but..)
      Earned Income Tax Credit (Refundable credit for low income so many people end up paying negative tax)

      Comparing benefits received is complicated too. Elderly have medicare, poor have medicaid, food stamps, etc.

      --
      No matter where you go, there you are.
    279. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by aunt+edna · · Score: 1

      Perfectly obvious that Income Tax, per se, is wasteful to maintain & unintelligent nonsense. If there must be a tax at all, might as well be purchase or sales taxes. None other whatsoever. If you really want to think about it, these other 2 forms are also far from ideal, too. It'll all change in a few years .... when enough people are thoroughly p*ssd off with the sheer dumbness of taxation.

    280. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Hognoxious · · Score: 1

      But that comes down to which hours, not how many. If the idiots all clear off by 6:30, you might as well just come in at lunchtime and work till 8pm.

      --
      Confucius say, "Find worm in apple - bad. Find half a worm - worse."
    281. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Hognoxious · · Score: 1

      Can someone please tell me what is so wrong with France?

      Lovely country, there's only 60 million things wrong with it.

      --
      Confucius say, "Find worm in apple - bad. Find half a worm - worse."
    282. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by zeropointburn · · Score: 1

      Congrats on getting the hell out of that, then. Catch up on sleep and body rhythm; feel better. I've done 5/8, 4/10, and 12/12/10/6 in an IT environment. 4/10 is by far the best option for me. In a normal 5/8 week, I would work 9-10 hours a day anyway, so 4/10 was the same amount of effort for an extra day off and a lot less overtime pay. Now I'm promoted and they say they can't afford to have me on the overnight shift, so it's back to 5/8 (or 5/9 effective). Maybe I should start bringing lunch to work and taking a shorter lunch break. Who knows.

      --
      -1 raving lunatic; +6 subGenius... Things even out...
    283. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      I only work about an hour a day anyway so it doesn't matter to me.

    284. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by davecrist · · Score: 1

      I have always thought that this would be an ideal software company schedule. Our small office would work four days a week every week, eight hours per but at 10-15% below market pay rate BUT with shared profit.

      The way I figured it, folks would be inclined to work more focuses on their 'in' days, so the productivity would be there and profit sharing would entice folks to build good products.

      I'd certainly be interested in working in a place like that.

      :Dave

    285. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      Those are just the federal income taxes.

      You are missing the Provincial income taxes. Although I assume the US has a state income tax, these numbers are meaningless without the combined income taxes.

    286. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by the_B0fh · · Score: 1

      "If you make more money, you have to pay extra taxes on the additional money you make"

      Took the 5 year old a bit to understand that. The 9 year old caught it immediately.

      Happy now?

    287. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Fjandr · · Score: 1

      It's amazing how so many people miss or are unable to understand that. Employers don't pay taxes, their employees do. Corporations don't pay taxes, their customers do. In the end, virtually all taxes are picked up by consumers, workers, and borrowers in some manner or other.

    288. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by mjwx · · Score: 1

      As I said, I'm not an expert on Tax and I've never really felt that I've lost out (taxes pay for civilisation in my view). I've just known people to knock 1 or 2K off pay rises because it would kick them into the next tax bracket and they would end up paying more. This may have to do with certain deductions (capital gains)? As I said, I get an accountant to do my taxes returns I don't understand the system as well as I need to in order to do it myself.

      --
      Calling someone a "hater" only means you can not rationally rebut their argument.
    289. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by AVee · · Score: 1

      Can you explain the logic behind that???

      No...

    290. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by the_B0fh · · Score: 1

      Withholding is not taxes. What you "feel" and what is true are not necessarily the same, and if you base your decisions on feelings instead of what is true, well, you get those damned flat earth people and "dinosaurs lived with humans" liars.

    291. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by the_B0fh · · Score: 1

      Another moron who flunked math and reading

    292. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by raptorjb007 · · Score: 1

      QRDeNameland,

      Actually your math is off, at least on the American tax brackets. Below are the 2009 Tax brackets for a citizen who files as single.

      Single Filing Status
      (Tax Rate Schedule X)


      10% on income between $0 and $8,350
      15% on the income between $8,350 and $33,950; plus $835
      25% on the income between $33,950 and $82,250; plus $4,675
      28% on the income between $82,250 and $171,550; plus $16,750
      33% on the income between $171,550 and $372,950; plus $41,754
      35% on the income over $372,950; plus $108,216


      If you use the example of the third tax bracket($33950 - $82250) as an example. This means that the starting Tax due is $4,467 plus 25% of all income above this value up to $82,250. So at a income of the lowest value for this bracket($33,950) your tax due is $4,675 which is around 14% tax rate. This progresses the highest value in this tax bracket($82,249) which has a tax of $4467+(.25($82250-$33950)) which equals $16750 or around 20% tax rate. This is a progressive federal income tax rate range of 14%-20%, this is significantly different than the flat 25% you referenced.

      This logic is applied to all tax brackets, and generally speaking the tax rate increases as your income increases, from 10% in the lowest bracket to around 30% in the highest. Of coarse there are other deductions to compare, but as far as a federal income tax goes this is accurate.

    293. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      For Canada you are missing provincial taxes - which end up being a fair chunk - top tax bracket in Ontario ends up being around 46%. I don't know how state taxes work mind you, so it may be similar.

    294. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      FICA is actually 7.65%. 6.2% is OASD (Old Age, survivors, and disability) and 1.45% is Medicare. Your employer also has to match every dollar that is deducted from FICA, so the actual rate the government gets is 15.3%!

    295. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by emance · · Score: 1

      First:

      At the end of every month they have about $500 left over for spending money.

      Wrong. $50,000 'Person A' has a monthly net gross of $2042.

      Now they have a net debt of $200 a month.

      Wrong. $75,000 'Person A' has a monthly net gross of $2200.

      Next:

      Taxes are to blame.

      Hardly. Even if the person was in debt, it is that person's fault for living beyond their means.

    296. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Directrix1 · · Score: 1

      I dunno. I give it a 3 out of 5. That statement would apply to a flat tax too.

      --
      Occam's razor is the blind faith in the natural selection of least resistance and in universal oversimplification. -- EF
    297. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Directrix1 · · Score: 1

      How is its worth zero?

      --
      Occam's razor is the blind faith in the natural selection of least resistance and in universal oversimplification. -- EF
    298. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Lost+Engineer · · Score: 1

      True so why withhold a portion of it from me all year like it is?

    299. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      Earned Income Tax Credit

    300. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      Yeah, but some people have some idea of how it works. You were accused of having no idea how it works, not just an incomplete understanding of it.

    301. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      It's called sarcasm, he was being sarcastic.

      See it highlights the perceived irresponsibility in the American taxpayer who blames their own bad decisions on government policy and refuses to take responsibility for their mistakes. Really it's quite brilliant when you understand it.

    302. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by DoctorNathaniel · · Score: 1

      I know exactly what you mean.

      By the way, send NuMI more protons!

    303. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by DoctorNathaniel · · Score: 1

      Moreover, said productivity is entirely unrewarded. Per-working productivity in the US has gone up dramatically in the last 10 years or so, but wages (in real dollars) have actually gone down.

      In other words, we're working harder for less money. But we have to - we've given up unions.

    304. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      My girlfriend is an EMT-B with the ambulance company around here - she's working three 12 hour days and then a four day weekend and loves it.

      In the same breath, she'll end up at a firehouse in the coming years, she's looking forward to the 24 on, 48 off....being paid to sleep ROCKS! :3

      (Anonymous Coward because I don't have the energy to make an account at the moment :O )

    305. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      "At which fucking point can you come out ahead while making less money?!"

      In 2007, if you made 74,999 a year you would have received a stimulus check of $600. If you made 75,000 you would have received $0.

      Thus, a pay reduction of $1 = $599 net gain.

      There are other tax credits which work the same way such as child tax credit.

    306. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      You're analysis is correct for most 1040 filers, but the situation might be different if the higher income forced you to pay the Alternative Minimum Tax. Under AMT, many of the deductions available for most taxpayers are reduced or disallowed, which could mean that your net earnings could be less even though your gross earnings are higher.

    307. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      I once took an informal class on small business management. the one thing i took away from it was a statement made by a retired accountant: "Step one in dealing with the united States tax code: 'Never, Ever, attempt to apply logic to it.'"

      i lold then, and still do.

    308. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by two_stripe · · Score: 1

      I wont claim to know much when it comes to claiming dedictions. Theres so many loopholes that you may not be able to take advantage of some once you reach a certain income level, so you could in fact lose out (though thats probably to do exploiting loopholes rather than the original intentions of the tax office)

    309. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by bjb · · Score: 1
      Too soon.

      Thanks, BTW.

      --
      Never hit your grandmother with a shovel, for it leaves a bad impression on her mind...
    310. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by sokoloff · · Score: 1

      There is no FICA cap for the employer contribution.

    311. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by ivan256 · · Score: 1

      Businesses are taxed on net profit, and on payroll. If you're a services business (all your costs are labor), it's worse than being taxed on revenue. You get taxed even if you have no revenue....

    312. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      Wow. I hope I interpreted this wrong, because otherwise this joke was in very bad taste.

    313. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by immcintosh · · Score: 1

      We are, presumably, talking about monetary value. Your time's monetary value is only equal to what somebody is willing to pay for it. If nobody is paying anything for your time (or the product of your investing that time), then it has no monetary value.

      This is to say, going from not selling some of your time to selling it for less than you sell the rest of your time can hardly be called selling it "at a loss," when it's clearly going from no monetary value to some monetary value.

      (P.S. Occam's razor is a rule that instructs not to add anything to an explanation unless it's necessary. This is not the same as the common inaccurate paraphrase "the simplest explanation is best.")

    314. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      Actually, you're still slightly wrong, or at least need clarification. The numbers above are not gross income, but taxable income after exemptions and deductions. If you truly make less than $8025 (i.e. have a salary or gross wages below that figure) that you're not going to pay anything after your personal exemption, exemptions for any dependents, and your standard deduction.

    315. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      Unfortunately some state income tax systems DO penalize you when you fall into the next higher income bracket. In California for instance, if I earn $40345.00 (squeezing in at a dollar less than the highest tax bracket) my income gets taxed at 8%, and I come home with $37117.50 before federal and other taxes. If I earn a dollar more, ALL my income gets taxed at 9.3%, and I take home 36593.82. I just lost 500 bucks!

    316. Re:I'd rather have 4/36 by stry_cat · · Score: 1

      I guess you've never gotten a raise and ended up with a smaller paycheck. It happens all too frequently.

  44. Getting Customers to leave you alone Fridays by billstewart · · Score: 3, Informative

    I'm not on a 9/80 plan, but I've been with my company long enough that when they started requiring us to use or lose our vacation every year rather than carrying it over, I started taking Fridays off most of the summer. I had mixed success with it; just because I'm not planning to work on a given day, that doesn't mean that my customer doesn't want to schedule a meeting or call me on the phone, or that people stopped sending me emails that needed attention, or there might be training from the head office folks or whatever, so Fridays were often only half-off, or I'd sleep late and do email around noon. But still, that meant that I really did get my Saturday off :-)

    --

    Bill Stewart
    New Fast-Compression-only CPR http://preview.tinyurl.com/dy575ks
    1. Re:Getting Customers to leave you alone Fridays by HeronBlademaster · · Score: 5, Insightful

      Leave the computer and phone off, if you're going to take the day off, especially if you've notified people in advance. I say if you're taking the day off, take the day off.

    2. Re:Getting Customers to leave you alone Fridays by tompaulco · · Score: 1

      when they started requiring us to use or lose our vacation every year rather than carrying it over
      This is where we need to introduce new laws. Companys can not entice you to work there by offering vacation, and then not allow one of the following options 1) take a vacation 2) pay you for the time or 3) roll it over. I have only two weeks of vacation a year, but it is pretty well impossible to take that much vacation time given that I am in operations, and there are some problems that only I can fix and those problems are not always respectful of vacation. I managed a week last year, and my company is starting to cast an eye toward not allowing rollovers. Well, they had better pay me for it or find a way to allow me to take it, because otherwise they are in violation of their employment offer.

      --
      If you are not allowed to question your government then the government has answered your question.
    3. Re:Getting Customers to leave you alone Fridays by Anonymous+Brave+Guy · · Score: 3, Interesting

      This seems to be a very American (and Japanese) phenomenon. In Europe, it wouldn't even be legal to offer only 10 days of vacation time in many countries (possibly all of them, these days). Here in the UK, for someone working in a typical developer or sysadmin role in IT, I'd say somewhere around 25 days +/- 2 is fairly typical, plus the 8 public holidays (which is fewer than most other European countries get).

      Some employers do say you lose whatever vacation allowance you don't use by the end of each year, but in reality only the kind of poor managers and die-hard workaholics who think employees who don't take vacations are more productive seem to fail to use up their allowances under these circumstances. IME, it's fairly typical for decent employers to set a cap of, say, 5 days rolling over: this avoids long-term employees building up a huge vacation allowance, but allows some flexibility and avoids everyone taking off half of December and leaving the office near-empty just to use up all their remaining leave.

      --
      If you disagree, post your argument. (-1, Overrated) isn't your personal censorship tool for views you don't like.
    4. Re:Getting Customers to leave you alone Fridays by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 4, Insightful

      exactly, they wouldn't let you beer it up during work ours, so don't let them put your work during your beer hours!

    5. Re:Getting Customers to leave you alone Fridays by ryanov · · Score: 1

      I'm allowed to carry over one year of vacation time (which is either 3, 4, or 5 weeks depending on your years of service). I'm union, however...

    6. Re:Getting Customers to leave you alone Fridays by Seindal · · Score: 2, Funny

      In Denmark we have five weeks of holidays each year, and as the law is made, you don't have a right to five weeks, it is your duty to have five weeks of holidays. This means you cannot trade your holidays in for other benefits - you have to go one holiday.

      For some reason nobody complains about this egregious limitation of our freedoms :-)

      --
      René Seindal
    7. Re:Getting Customers to leave you alone Fridays by AlXtreme · · Score: 1

      IME, it's fairly typical for decent employers to set a cap of, say, 5 days rolling over: this avoids long-term employees building up a huge vacation allowance, but allows some flexibility and avoids everyone taking off half of December and leaving the office near-empty just to use up all their remaining leave.

      Over here in the Netherlands (EUSSR) it's forbidden by companies to take back vacation days (because that is what happens when you limit or cap them). So employees are allowed to build up a large vacation allowance, which lets them take a few months off on paid leave (or you can opt to have them payed out, but only if you quit your job).

      I've done the latter once, I had built up quite a few vacation days over a couple of years in a part-time job. I switched jobs, and got the rest of my vacation days paid out.

      A cap really isn't a good solution. A good manager should keep an eye on the vacation days of his crew, and suggest they take more time off if employees are building up too many days.

      --
      This sig is intentionally left blank
    8. Re:Getting Customers to leave you alone Fridays by Anonymusing · · Score: 1

      they started requiring us to use or lose our vacation every year rather than carrying it over

      When they did that here, some people actually took of 2-3 months over a summer. It was a cubicle ghost town for July and August....

      --
      Liberal? Conservative? Compare perspectives at Left-Right
    9. Re:Getting Customers to leave you alone Fridays by malign · · Score: 1

      Heh, we're not alllowed to do that. If we're off sick, or on holiday, we _have_ to leave our blackberries on and respond to emails/calls.

      I say this, as I'm off sick with the flu, in bed, and having to respond to several dozen emails.

      --
      Life is what you make of it.
    10. Re:Getting Customers to leave you alone Fridays by hattig · · Score: 1

      Well if you are getting paid for your sick days, that is only fair if you are capable.

      However it is unfair to expect someone to be available for work contact outside of their work hours, not unless the salary is commensurate for being on-call all the time. This seems to be a modern issue with businesses, expecting more and more out of their workforce, which gets more and more resentful and inefficient as a result.

    11. Re:Getting Customers to leave you alone Fridays by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      EXACTLY! I don't have a Crackberry (on purpose, personal decision) and try to avoid the phone or computer as much as possible on my days off. When I'm out of the office and not working - that's MY time and I want to be off-line as much as possible. It's well worth the effort in terms of personal sanity and mental state.

    12. Re:Getting Customers to leave you alone Fridays by hattig · · Score: 1

      TEN days, which arse-backwards African country are you living in?

      25 days + national/bank holidays, that's more reasonable for an IT job. And the UK isn't that good for holidays compared to some European countries. In the UK the legal minimum for full time work is 20 days (4 weeks) a year (+ bank holidays).

      Carrying forward holidays is still an issue. I think you should either be paid for that holiday, or allowed to take it forward. However I can understand limiting what you can carry forward, because you want your employees to be rested enough to do their job well, and holidays allow that.

    13. Re:Getting Customers to leave you alone Fridays by tompaulco · · Score: 1

      TEN days, which arse-backwards African country are you living in?
      It's a third world country called the United States. I only have 20 years of experience, so I only get 10 days a year. But it doesn't matter if they gave me 100. As a former manager put it: "You can have as many vacation days as you can get away with." This turns out to be less than 10 per year.

      --
      If you are not allowed to question your government then the government has answered your question.
    14. Re:Getting Customers to leave you alone Fridays by adrianmsmith · · Score: 1

      The EU has a law that you have to have at least 25 days vacation - sick leave and public holidays not included in that 25. (Although the UK only had 20 days up until recently so evidently it was possible to opt out.)

    15. Re:Getting Customers to leave you alone Fridays by Anonymous+Brave+Guy · · Score: 1

      IIRC, the current UK statutory minimum for a full-time employee works out at 24 days/year, which I'd guess is slightly below average in IT. From later this year, it's due to go up, though, to something like 28 days, which is higher than standard at any organisation where I've ever worked. Should be interesting to see what they all do with that... (I have a feeling the UK still sneakily allows public holidays to be included in this figure, though, so in reality those 28 days could be the 20 days + public holidays that has been the practical minimum since forever.)

      --
      If you disagree, post your argument. (-1, Overrated) isn't your personal censorship tool for views you don't like.
    16. Re:Getting Customers to leave you alone Fridays by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      If you're experienced and not easily replaceable, then "you can have as many vacation days as you demand".

    17. Re:Getting Customers to leave you alone Fridays by nametaken · · Score: 1

      You clearly do not work where I work. :(

    18. Re:Getting Customers to leave you alone Fridays by Actually,+I+do+RTFA · · Score: 1

      they wouldn't let you beer it up during work ours

      Which is their loss. With a steady supply of beer, I'd work longer hours and the results would be better too.

      --
      Your ad here. Ask me how!
    19. Re:Getting Customers to leave you alone Fridays by HeronBlademaster · · Score: 1

      Oh, I get calls from my boss in my off-hours. But then, I never take the day off, I simply don't work when I don't want to (the nice thing about being part-time while still in school).

      I did, however, refuse to list my cell phone on the company directory. My boss (the company president) is the only one with my cell number.

    20. Re:Getting Customers to leave you alone Fridays by jknapka · · Score: 1

      This seems to be a very American (and Japanese) phenomenon. In Europe, it wouldn't even be legal to offer only 10 days of vacation time in many countries (possibly all of them, these days). Here in the UK, for someone working in a typical developer or sysadmin role in IT, I'd say somewhere around 25 days +/- 2 is fairly typical, plus the 8 public holidays (which is fewer than most other European countries get).

      Wow. I'm a salaried developer in the US, and I have that level of leave time... after working for the same company for sixteen years!

      OTOH I work from home full-time and don't particularly like to travel, so I have a lot of time for myself. I tend to accumulate leave time and then take it out in cash periodically, which can be nice.

  45. Lighter schedule by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

    This sounds like a lighter schedule for a lot of people, who are probably working 50 hours a week at least. This would be an extra hour off every day and a whole extra day off for free.

  46. 9/80? Try 5/80!! by peterofoz · · Score: 1

    Wow, where can I get a job at 80 hrs in 9 days. Seems like I've been working 60-80 hrs in 5 or 6 days of late. Unless I'm between consulting projects in which case its more like 9/10 and then the pay is terrible.

    1. Re:9/80? Try 5/80!! by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      you are bitching about working too many hours? you're an ass clown.

  47. I find it middle-ing at best by anphilip · · Score: 1

    My company does 9/80 work weeks and I find the experience mixed. I tend to have about 6 'good' hours a day for solid engineering design and after that the ideas don't flow as well. 9/80 works when you have lots of paperwork to do (perfect for a government contractor) but doesn't do so well when you have actual design work. Doing errands on weekdays or making it to the gym are impossible unless you have an under half-hour commute. On the other hand, the every second friday off is nice. In summary, it only works if you can you work steadily and don't mind cramming all your errands into the weekend.

  48. Time to go to 4 days on, 3 days off. by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

    We have slaved enough for our corporate masters. Time to go to full employment at 32 hours a week for everyone. Oh, and the weekly pay should remain the same for us all too.

  49. I do a 98/7 by monopole · · Score: 1

    You work 14 hours a day for a week and then repeat it.

    1. Re:I do a 98/7 by c1t1z3nk41n3 · · Score: 1

      Strangely enough I do exactly the same thing, no exaggeration. No days off, some days I'll only work 12 hours if I'm tired. On the other hand I generally only work 6 months a year in one to four month blocks.

  50. 9/80s and 4/10s by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

    A lot of people at my company work 9/80s. No problems there. People just know to check calendars and schedule around you.

    I work a staggered 4/10, which is amazing. Mon-Thurs of the first week, then Tues-Fri of the second. Every other weekend is a four-day weekend, which is almost enough time to get to Europe and back (I'm on the West coast)

  51. It will work if everybody is committed by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

    In my work we have this rule:
        - You have to work 40 hours a week.
        - It is mandatory for you to be at the office Mon to Thu from 11a to 3p.

    Everything else is up to you.

        I can say that it only works for people that are committed to get-the-work-done(tm) when that is needed.

  52. At an NPO anyway... by apokruphos · · Score: 1

    If you're by the hour, now more than ever companies will try to restrict overages. Our support techs get called in off-hours for only the direst of emergencies. Of course, us salaried saps get to deal with the extra. "You've used linux before, here admin these two RHEL servers."

    --
    "I defy the second law of thermodynamics."
    "The hell you do. Get back in the box."
  53. First, you cry... by Tiger4 · · Score: 1

    Actually, you, your managers, and especially your timekeepers need to get over the 40 hours per week paradigm. US Labor law mandates it to some extent, but usually that is the only real constraint you MUST deal with. Just figure out how much work really needs to be done, how long it should take, what is a REALISTIC work efficiency factor (.5 - .8), then just get out of the way and let people work.

    OK, now that we've had a nice trip to fantasy land... 9 hours/day x 9 days give you 81 hours in a two week pay period. Implement flexible work hours and work days. You will need to pick "core hours" and "core days" (e.g. Tuesday - Thursday, 9a - 4p) when (more or less) everyone must show up in person. The extra day and the extra hour are YOURS to build up and spend as you please, within reason. (i.e. No 20 week paid holidays sitting in the bank allowed).

    It can work. We do it here. When a mandatory meeting comes up, people flex their RDO. They burn their extra hours up usually by taking an extra day off every other month. Keeps work and project schedules in line and doesn't stress the guys that have to work on the days or hours you are off.

    Only company discipline can keep the managers from trouncing the system. They have to stand behind their own words when they say you don't have to come in on an RDO. And they have to be willing to take it when you throw their words back in their faces. "a day off does NOT mean Come in to work". If your managers don't have integrity, you're screwed. But that would be true anyway, not matter what you are doing.

    --
    Behold, this dreamer cometh. Come now, and let us slay him... and we shall see what will become of his dreams.
  54. I worked 9/80 for several years by abarrow · · Score: 2, Insightful

    It was great. I usually put in 10 hour days anyway, so someone telling me that I was to get every other Friday off was great! Not only do you get the occasional 3 day weekend, but you will probably find that the Fridays that you do work are really quiet - assuming not everyone in the office is on the same 9/80 schedule. If you are in a "meeting rich" environment, you are spared on Fridays because half the people aren't there.

    After I got into middle management, 9/80 basically meant that I didn't feel guilty for taking a Friday off, but often-times I was working those days as well.

    In big companies where folks that work a normal 8 hour day are treated like slackers, it's a good way to actually get some benefit for those 8+ hour days. Also, remember that 5 days of vacation turns into 10 days off! Bonus!

  55. it sucks by blackcoot · · Score: 1

    the obvious reason:
    actually getting to take off fridays off is an iffy proposition, at least in my organization. i objected to it when it was implemented nearly 18 months ago as a sneaky, underhanded way to squeeze extra unpaid overtime out of employees and i feel even more strongly about that now than i did back then. i haven't had an off friday for the past 3 months and it seems increasingly unlikely that i'm going to get to take those fridays off until i get through a march delivery. obviously, your mileage will vary; however, unless your organization is serious about off fridays being sacred (mine, unfortunately, is not --- they expect you to be in the office on those fridays if there's even the slightest business need), expect to lose them quite frequently.

    the non-obvious reasons:
    1) trying to make up sick leave / personal absence gets to be really challenging. i find the incremental effort from 8 to 9 hours in a day not that bad, but 9 to 10 and beyond is really, really difficult (at least if my goal is to be actually productive as opposed to a warm body).

    2) scheduling with clients / customers / team mates that are not on 9/80 gets to be more complicated, especially if you have multiple stakeholders whose off fridays are out of phase.

    3) receiving shipments of parts / software / hardware / etc. on time can be difficult unless you have a dedicated receiving department working throughout the week.

    4) depending on how you do time cards (assuming you do), correctly transcribing time can be a challenge. (you need two fridays per week)

  56. you geeks are soft by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

    The film business here has two common standards:

        five 12.75 hour days per week
    or
        six 10.75 hour days.

    In practice overtime is worked up to the 14 hour statutory maximum work hour limit for truck drivers making a 70 or 84 hour week.

    And they make all our actors adopt some really stupid accents ...

  57. 6/10/4... by kupan787 · · Score: 1

    At my work we have a choice between straight 8s, or 6/10/4 schedule. Personally, I like the 6/10/4, as I come in at noon on Mondays (working 12:00-6:00pm), and leave at 11:00am on Fridays (working 7:00-11:00am). Tuesday-Thurs I work 10 hours (7:00-6:00pm), for a total of 40 hours a week. Plus, if I ever want to have a three day weekend, I only have to use 4 vacation hours, instead of the traditional 8.

  58. Two of my friends, and my father... by artor3 · · Score: 1

    ...all work 9/80. They all love it. During really busy weeks, you may be asked to work on your day off, leading to 50 hours work weeks. But let's face it, if you were working a "normal" schedule, you'd end up working 10 hours a day on weeks like that anyway.

    My dad also telecommutes one of the remaining 9 days. So he never goes to work on Wednesdays, which means he never has to commute more than two days in a row. Words cannot describe how much happier he is since that change. If you have a long, nasty commute, look into this sort of schedule.

  59. Doing it 10 years- it ROCKS by goofballs · · Score: 1

    i've been on 9/80 for just about 10 years now. it SERIOUSLY ROCKS.

    the only thing that sucks is the 'long' 5 day weeks.

  60. It's DEPENDS by recharged95 · · Score: 1
    From a software standpoint (been there done that): if you're on a maintenance project, or a project following some ISO standard process (or CMMi, SEI, ISO900X, Sigma, MIL-STD, etc...), then the 9/80 really works well. Really well. I used to love the 3 day weekends.

    .

    If you're not on a project in that situation (i.e. any web project, or one following the latest fad methodology to 'get the code out the door', then your 9/80 really becomes 90/80. You'll end up working on that day off--guaranteed.

  61. Only 40 hours a week by Calsar · · Score: 0

    When I first read it I was thinking it said you work 80 hours every 9 days including weekends which sounds more like my work schedule.

  62. Is it legal without paying overtime? by Bill+Dimm · · Score: 1

    For both of my companies you work 9 hours a day except the friday you work you only work 8 hours. Then you get every other friday off.

    Is this even legal in most states (without paying overtime)? I could be wrong, but I believe in Pennsylvania you can't push hours from one week to another. If an employee works more than 40 hours in a week, you have to pay overtime for the extra hours -- you can't offset them with fewer hours in another week. Of course, certain job functions are exempt from overtime (e.g. computer programmers and management).

    1. Re:Is it legal without paying overtime? by AJ+Mexico · · Score: 1

      Yes. The trick is defining the workweek to begin/end at noon on Friday. That way, you still have 40 hours per workweek.

      Also, I do like 9/80 at my company. It is consistently cited as one of employee's favorite benefits. It is one less round trip per fortnight, so saves gas & travel time. The days do get a bit long for us older folks, but you young guys should have no problem.

      --
      Computers obey me.
    2. Re:Is it legal without paying overtime? by silusoftwilight · · Score: 1

      I believe that only persons who are A) salaried, and B) managing other people are exempt from overtime pay. This is set at the federal level by the Fair Labor and Standards Act.
      http://www.dol.gov/esa/whd/flsa/

      Some companies can do tricky things with switching around hours to prevent overtime pay, it depends on when their accounting period is for payroll. EX: I worked at a company whose payroll began each week on Fridays, so if you were called in on when you had Friday off, or worked extra hours on it, they would have you work less on any day Monday through next Thursday, and even though you may have worked 45 hours in the last M-F period, you wouldn't get overtime pay.

    3. Re:Is it legal without paying overtime? by Bill+Dimm · · Score: 1

      I believe that only persons who are A) salaried, and B) managing other people are exempt from overtime pay. This is set at the federal level by the Fair Labor and Standards Act

      It's a bit more complicated than just (A) and (B), and states can override FLSA. This document about Pennsylvania (I don't know if it is current) says "In order for an employee in Pennsylvania to be exempt from overtime, he or she must be exempt under both the federal FLSA and Pennsylvania state law."

  63. 4/7 by Tekoneiric · · Score: 1

    I have a 4 day work week 10 hours a day. I much prefer that as I get 3 days off every week.

    --
    *It's not what you can do for the Dark Side but what the Dark Side can do for you!*
  64. Loved the 9/80 schedule by bobdehnhardt · · Score: 1

    I loved having a 9/80 schedule. When holidays came along, I either had three 3-day weekends in a row, or a 4-day weekend (if the holiday fell on my day off, I'd get either Thursday or Monday). No problems with getting called in or anything like that. The one time (in four years) that happened, I got a comp day off later in the month.

    I'd take a 9/80 schedule in a heartbeat.

  65. Four day work weeks by Nyckname · · Score: 1

    Back in the 80's some companies started experimenting with 4 by 10 weeks. I saw an interview on the TV news with one guy who said the one thing he didn't like about it was he was spending too much money on that extra day off each week.

  66. 4-10s are the shit by icebrain · · Score: 3, Informative

    The company I work for runs 4x10 as the "regular" workweek for most of engineering and production. Friday (the usual day off) counts as an overtime day. Non-exempt people get time and a half, and even the salaried people get straight time for that day.

    I usually come in for a half day every Friday and pick up a few extra hours (business needs permitting, of course), though sometimes I'll sleep in an hour or two first--I usually show up around 615 the rest of the week. It still gives me an afternoon off to get stuff done around the house, run errands, or go to the range before my wife gets home. If we need to travel for the weekend, I can either use the day to pack and get ready, or we can leave early if she takes a day off.

    If you find a company that offers this, take it.

    --
    The meek may inherit the earth, but the strong shall take the stars.
    1. Re:4-10s are the shit by thePowerOfGrayskull · · Score: 1
      agreed, four tens were great. An extra two hours a day doesn't make much difference as far as what you can get done when you get home, but four day workweeks sure are nice.

      Of course I don't understand this obsession with a 40 hour workweek for any job that essentially consists of consistent and directed thought.

    2. Re:4-10s are the shit by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      Holy crap! What's the name of your employer?

  67. It's great for interns... by mongoose(!no) · · Score: 1

    I worked it once as an intern. 9 hour days, 8 hours the first friday, off on the next. It was nice because it gave me a chance to take every other weekend off to go do things with friends, like roadtrips, either back home or to the beach. What I didn't like was that I had an hour and a half commute each way, so the 9 hours, plus commute time made for a really long day. Up at 6, and not usually back until 6 or 7, depending on the traffic through DC. As an intern I was never asked to come in on that day, and the job wasn't one where I had urgent deadlines to meet. In the future, I'm not sure if I would do it. It'd really depend on having a shorter commute and knowing that I had something to do on that Friday.

  68. Consider 9/72 instead by midtoad · · Score: 0

    Depending on what country you work in, your marginal tax rate may be close to 50%. That is, for each additional dollar you earn, you pay $0.50 more taxes. On the side of the coin, if you earn a dollar less, you pay $0.50 less in taxes. So, if you work 9 days out of ten (without working an extra hour a day for 8 of them), you will earn just 5% less after-tax income, but have 10% more free time.

    Nominally, a 0.9 schedule only gives you 2 days off per month, but many months there's a stat holiday, and if you're in the oil-patch you might get a floater day per month as well, so in practice your 0.9 schedule is actually a 4-day work week.

    If more employees were to ask for 0.9 schedules, there'd be fewer layoffs!

    --
    - midtoad
    Umwelt schützen, Fahrrad benützen
  69. We do an 8/80 here... by ramsejc · · Score: 1

    Well, those that are non-salaried do. I end up working about 90-100 hours in eight days being salaried, but that is another story.

    Many of my friends here are hourly employees and work four ten hour days with every Friday off. They love it. They do not even notice the difference after the first week or two, and they get a three-day weekend every weekend.

  70. I've heard good by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

    I once interviewed for a job with a federal agency that would have had a 9/80 option: 9,9,9,9,9;9,9,9,8,0. My brother-in-law currently works for another federal agency and works 9/80--he seems to love it AFAIK.

    I used to be a teacher, and I had the 50/37.5 option. Teachers were paid for 37.5 hours per week, but the workweek came out to something like 50 hours. I was the school sysadmin, so I was particularly under the microscope to the point where one teacher falsely accused me of working only the hours for which I was being paid. Note to self: never get a job where a coworker arbitrarily declares you on-call with your personal cell phone.

    Unfortunately, the nature of my current job doesn't allow for 9/80, but if it was offered to me, I'd take it. However, if my boss started dragging me in on my Fridays "off", I'd just go back to 8*5. Or get a better job.

  71. Leisure time is not properly respected in the U.S. by whjwhj · · Score: 1

    My company has flex time and, to some extent, comp time, as determined by the employee within reason. So, if I work 9 today and 7 tomorrow, that's OK. Nobody cares, much less notices. Just don't skip any meetings or miss too many important deadlines.

    This, however, is far from the norm.

    As a (reasonably) high paid professional, all too often companies assume that that means you're willing and able to work an absolute minimum of 40 a week, with 45-50 often times being the norm. And I think employees, perhaps motivated by some sense of guilt, often times work those hours without complaint. I say bullshit.

    I'm a high paid professional because I'm good and I know stuff. My (reasonably) high pay is because of what I know and the skills I have. Not the hours I'm willing to keep. Working 40 a week, and not 10 minutes more, is first-and-foremost something the employee has to strive for. Employers will get the hint eventually.

    But this seems to be a uniquely U.S. phenomena. Many areas of the world (Italy springs to mind) have a great deal more respect for leisure time then we do here. There is an innate understanding that life is to be lived and enjoyed, not worked. In the U.S. the emphasis seems to be on money money money. You're considered successful if you're pulling in $100K a year, regardless of the hours you worked to get it.

    Well, what the fuck good is $100K a year if you don't give yourself the time to enjoy it? I'm always amused by people who save up all their "enjoying life" time for vacation. What? You gonna pack a whole year's worth of "enjoying life" into a two week jaunt to the Caribbean? Good luck with that.

    I say we in the U.S. ought to ditch our puritanical work ethic already and slow down a bit and enjoy life a little more.

    Maybe the current economic downtown will give some of us an opportunity to do just that!

  72. It works well by gatkinso · · Score: 1

    at least at my company.

    When on the road we end up working the Friday, and occaisionally here at home too. Oh well.

    --
    I am very small, utmostly microscopic.
  73. Just about everyone in .GOV... by giminy · · Score: 1

    I worked in two government research labs that did this (Air Force Research Lab and Navy Research Lab...I understand that the Army does it as well, and just about every civil-service-job-that-doesn't-interact-with-the-public-on-a-daily-basis does it this way).

    I rather enjoyed it. My Fridays were spent backpacking, kayaking, bicycling, sometimes even hobby programming, or Getting Things Done like doing banking/other paperwork. I wished that my private sector job did it. And as for managers respecting it, you bet they did...my managers all had Friday off as well.

    At the Air Force lab, we could choose which Friday to take off (or we could take off any other day of our choosing...one guy I worked with took off Wednesdays for some bizarre reason :)). We tried to keep about half of us there each Friday in case someone called and needed answers. At the Navy, everybody took off on the same Friday and the place was all but shut down on the off-Fridays.

    Good luck. It's a fun system, just be sure not to abuse it so that your bosses don't change their minds.

    --
    The Right Reverend K. Reid Wightman,
    1. Re:Just about everyone in .GOV... by phoenix.bam! · · Score: 1

      I rather enjoyed it. My Fridays were spent backpacking, kayaking, bicycling, sometimes even hobby programming, or Getting Things Done like doing banking/other paperwork.

      This sounds like the script to a herpes commercial.

  74. O.C by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

    40 hours a week? I wish I had that. If I did, I would be on Thursday already.

  75. I have worked for two companies that do this by Sikmaz · · Score: 1

    In general I love it, especially since in IT we tend to easily work 9 hour days. A few drawbacks that in my mind are minor compared to the benefits:

    1) Some people will abuse the system and will still put in 8 hour days and take the off-friday off. If you are a good Manager or have a good team this won't be any more of an issue than any other issue.
    2) You will find that you will often not get the Off-Friday completely off, in general I work 2-3 hours every off Friday.
    3) 9 hour days can be a bit tougher until you get used to them
    4) If it is just your group that does this it will fail miserably, either the entire company does it or none at all.
    5) As a manager you need to arrange coverage. On a smaller team many people will fail to get a complete off Friday if they are on-call etc.. You can do alternating Off-Fridays but you will find that it is tough since many people will expect everyone to be there on an "On" Friday.
    6) If you outsource parts of your infrastructure they may have issues with your lack of availability on off-fridays and the outsourcer may use that to extend tasks due to it. Or they may get more done since you aren't there to hassle them ;-)
    7) A lot more work is crammed into the first 4 days of a week. At times Monday through Thursday can seem hellish.

    I have had this schedule over two employers for a total of 5 years and I would HATE to go back to a normal 5 day workweek. The Off-Friday helps keep me sane and allows me to get things done that I can never do on weekends due to family and weekdays due to work!

  76. 80 hours by suso · · Score: 5, Funny

    I already work 80 hours.

    Oh wait, 9 days. Ok, I see what you mean now. I thought you meant 5.

    1. Re:80 hours by Sfing_ter · · Score: 5, Funny

      I have a system where I only work 6 half days.... 12hrs each day... sigh.

      --
      A computer once beat me at chess, but it was no match for me at kick boxing. Emo Philips
    2. Re:80 hours by metlin · · Score: 2, Insightful

      Tell me about it.

      80 on a usual week, 100 on a bad week and 60 on a good week.

      80 hours for nine days? Slackers.

    3. Re:80 hours by buddyglass · · Score: 4, Insightful

      Hope it's worth it. That sounds miserable.

    4. Re:80 hours by cayenne8 · · Score: 5, Insightful
      " Tell me about it.

      80 on a usual week, 100 on a bad week and 60 on a good week.

      80 hours for nine days? Slackers."

      OUCH!! Why would you (or anyone else) do that to themselves? I hope, at least, you are getting paid at least straight time for every one of those OT hours...??

      If not, you are just killing yourself and robbing yourself of valuable hours of your life.

      That's why I will ONLY work hourly....put it in a contract, I will work when needed...but, I will not work an hour for free. My time is valuable, and I will get my bill rate for every hour worked wherever I work. Doing this way...makes them also think twice about asking if they need you or not for OT. This way...I also don't have a problem with working hours around personal time off. Even if W2 hourly, you just usually have to get avg. 8 hours a day for the pay period, so if you need a day off...swing hours around the rest of the days in the billing period.

      The best is when doing corp to corp 1099...where you work as you wish generally. Don't wanna work 40 hours that week? Don't. Want to work 60 the next...ok.

      Seriously...I just have to believe salary is for suckers. They expect you to work over if 'needed'...but, do they happily let you leave early when your work is done? Hmm....I didn't think so.

      And you can do it W2 too....with benefits if you just know to negotiate it up front with them...if that is the route you'd rather go.

      I'll never work for free again...

      --
      Light travels faster than sound. This is why some people appear bright until you hear them speak.........
    5. Re:80 hours by whiplashx · · Score: 1

      I do 16 hour days, 7 days a week, many weeks. They don't ask me to do it - I just really like my job.

      I don't think its being a sucker. I honestly love what I do. (video game programmer)

    6. Re:80 hours by Tyr_7BE · · Score: 4, Interesting

      Seriously...I just have to believe salary is for suckers. They expect you to work over if 'needed'...but, do they happily let you leave early when your work is done?

      In a word, yes. I understand where you're coming from - managing your own time is a sweet gig. But don't be so quick to dismiss a salary scheme. When run properly, it can be pretty decent. At my office when there's not much going on, not a lot of people work 40 hr weeks. When it's crunch time, you're going to see a lot of people putting in 60 on a regular basis. Pretty similar to what you described, actually. Work gets done on time, and nobody bats an eye if you work an entire week of half days. It's all in how you execute the salary scheme. I could see it being abused, for sure, but when it's not abused, it's a nice ride.

    7. Re:80 hours by Kontu · · Score: 1

      See, I run into the dilemma that I need to pay for shit. Unfortunately being in school my options for jobs are limited and I'm stuck at a small mom and pop repair shop that's cheap in the payroll; so I work a night job on top of that. Means 62 hour work weeks (going up to 75 hour work weeks soon) plus 12 credits at school every week. No overtime. /tears. It's not that bad.

    8. Re:80 hours by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 4, Insightful

      They deem me mad because I will not sell my days for gold; and I deem them mad because they think my days have a price.
        - Kahlil Gibran

    9. Re:80 hours by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0, Insightful

      Well, some of us do it to maintain our quality of life in these wonderful times. Oh wait, I forgot - this is Slashdot where everyone is a white collar tech worker that makes a six figure salary... right? I suspect there are a good many /.ers that don't even have the foggiest idea what good old fashioned knuckle-busting back-breaking work feels like. But that's a rant for another day. :)

    10. Re:80 hours by Firehed · · Score: 1

      Lucky you. I enjoy programming too, but it's not 112 hours a week enjoyable. I freelance now, but I'd have brought in an uzi if any employer had asked me to work anywhere near that amount of time without some crazy overtime pay.

      --
      How are sites slashdotted when nobody reads TFAs?
    11. Re:80 hours by conureman · · Score: 1

      That's only 72 hours.
      Slacker.

      --
      The cost of that cleanup, of course, will be borne by taxpayers, not industry.
    12. Re:80 hours by Metasquares · · Score: 2, Insightful

      Those tech. jobs may pay well, but the hours on most of them aren't great either.

    13. Re:80 hours by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 2, Funny

      5/80? Your job must be a slave pit! I get 7/80 with a promise of all my weekends back when I retire.

    14. Re:80 hours by Symbha · · Score: 4, Insightful

      Ya I guess, but I dare you to try and keep that up for another 15 years. Or try and have a significant personal relationship working like that...

      There is no life to be head with 66% of your time at work.

      So, unless that is *literally* the only thing you like... do yourself a favor and find some balance.

    15. Re:80 hours by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      I think some people starting out may find themselves in the "80/5" situation without realizing it. I started my programming career at a very-very large retailer that has a 45/5 schedule. However, due to the "war room" culture, "80/5" happened more often. That is also why I left after 2 years for a nice government job.

    16. Re:80 hours by nacturation · · Score: 2, Funny

      That's only 72 hours.
      Slacker.

      You mean 72 half hours.

      --
      Want to improve your Karma? Instead of "Post Anonymously", try the "Post Humously" option.
    17. Re:80 hours by b4upoo · · Score: 1

      People need contracts that make it expensive for the employer if they are asked to work more than eight hours per day or five days a week. Any individual who allows an employer to exploit them hurts not only themselves but all other workers as well. It even crosses trades. A computer professional can actually have impact on a brick layer or iron worker in regards to the fact that employers will claim that what they do is dandy because the computer industry does the same thing.

    18. Re:80 hours by OrangeTide · · Score: 3, Interesting

      Sorry. I paid my dues in construction and an iron foundry before getting a cushy tech job. Although oddly I find my software engineering job much more stressful.

      --
      “Common sense is not so common.” — Voltaire
    19. Re:80 hours by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 2, Insightful

      So true, but you are forgetting something. Most people on Slashdot are generally quite young, under 30. To many of these people, the amount of time you spend on work is actually something to be proud of.

      Take Sfing_ter here. Half-jesting, he's complaining about his 70+ hour work week, but inside, he *likes* being required to work that much, makes him feel important.

      So to Sfing_ter and others, I was as delusional as you in my youth for a couple of years until I got my senses back. Or rather, I started a family and realized it's more to life than working.

      Posting as AC because I don't feel like taking a Flamebait hit, but you all know this is true.

    20. Re:80 hours by Angstroem · · Score: 5, Insightful

      Frankly, I don't believe you.

      Telecommuters like to count as work every minute they have their PC.

      Executives count in any minute they're awake, cause even running around with a cup of coffee or having a chat on the toilet is "work".

      Regular employees count the sheer presence, regardless of standing outside smoking, drinking coffee with others (that's called meeting), or just browsing slashdot (called recherche).

      If you start logging what you really do in those 60/80/100 hrs you most likely will notice that you get done no more than the average worker, eventually even less.

      The only people I believe being truly working those insane hours are doctorate candidates in their final year and/or before conference deadlines.

    21. Re:80 hours by arse+maker · · Score: 2, Insightful

      lol thast bullshit.

      at a previous job I occasionally worked 100 hours a week (thats insane though, only allowed by a crisis allowing you to give up sleep).

      But often 80 hours a week. The reason it was ok was I could work from home or work, as I pleased. Also, my job was crossing various duties. So while I couldnt sustainably code 80 hours a week, at least not in a productive way. I can do some db work, work on some web statistics, review some servers, view some feedback from our site easily. Its the monotony that kills your ability to be productive for long periods.

      If you happen to have a job you enjoy, and you have the ability to do various tasks its very possible. However no person believes you, im unsure why, they start making claims you arent really working all that time.. but to be honest, get fucked, do you only count the time your fingers are striking the keyboard as working? The idea you can only work 40 hours a week and the rest is just wasted is crap, sure, some people fluff some hours where they have already clocked off well before they have left the office, but its not always true.

    22. Re:80 hours by Angstroem · · Score: 5, Insightful

      at a previous job I occasionally worked 100 hours a week (thats insane though, only allowed by a crisis allowing you to give up sleep).

      The key word here is occasionally. I'm fully aware that there are situations where you just have to kick in the overdrive and get something by insane working hours. BTDT, and more than once. It usually is, however, a sign of bad company management because they either have too much work for too few people or acquired a too big project. Bad planning in both cases. Only emergency situations justify such insane overload.

      If you continue that overdrive you'll sooner or later burn out and/or start doing nonsense. Especially sleep deprivation is not exactly known for improving your work performance. Raised stress levels may lead to a temporary productivity boost, but that boost comes at a price.

      Unless, of course, your job has a recreational effect on you, which is probably anything but the norm. I know a lot of people who really like their jobs (being one of them myself), but doing some hobbyist stuff, even if somewhat work-related, is something completely different than work. And neither is a replacement for sleep.

      The idea you can only work 40 hours a week and the rest is just wasted is crap

      It indeed is. Usually the quote of productive work per day is much lower, about the range of 5h.

      You mentioned that it's the monotony that kills concentration. True. Zombie work kills. On the other hand, you also need a certain time to adjust to a new task and get that going smoothly. Too frequent task changes (being the norm today with telephone, email, and slashdot interrupts...) will make you feel utterly busy, but in the end being highly unproductive.

    23. Re:80 hours by Malevolyn · · Score: 0, Offtopic

      I don't see a The Daily WTF clone for the construction industry. Maybe that could be related.

      --
      Your ad here.
    24. Re:80 hours by GreatBunzinni · · Score: 1

      And they said slavery was abolished.

      --
      Slashdot, fix your code or at least hire someone who is competent at it to do it for you.
    25. Re:80 hours by GreatBunzinni · · Score: 4, Insightful

      If someone needs to work 80 hours a week on average then I would say that their life doesn't have much quality to begin with. Unless by "maintain our quality of living" you mean "paying off the luxury goods and services you've purchased". But then again, as your work load stops you from benefiting from them, I seriously doubt that they do much good.

      Materialism and all that keeping up with the joneses is a bitch, isn't it?

      --
      Slashdot, fix your code or at least hire someone who is competent at it to do it for you.
    26. Re:80 hours by arse+maker · · Score: 1

      I agree with all your points. I admit my job was a passion for me, its not the same at other places. Ususally where you have control, you have a desire to work because you can effect change.

      Regarding the changing tasks, I agree, if they are new tasks. But not when they are tasks you regularly do. Not like changing projects at a company doing multiple projects.

      Being productive as a coder is so hard to define, Ive read a few articles talking about people only writing about 5 lines of code a day, and only being really effective 2 hours a day.. which sounds stupid on the face of it.. but if you look back over months of time, its pretty much right. Another point is if you have a small team of 1 or a few, if you work with 5-10 or more people, its completely different. You can be 0% productive in that enviroment.. but project managers never seem to understand that :)

    27. Re:80 hours by Sobrique · · Score: 2, Insightful
      If your approach to salaried work is - paid to do a job, hours irrelevant. Then yes. It can work quite nicely. I have had jobs that meant I was working late some days, and not working at all other days. Sometimes I'd have to cut lunch, other times I'd have time enough to go have a leisurely meal.

      However all too often, what 'salary' translates to, is 'you must be in the office in normal business hours, overtime doesn't get paid, but your future prospects will be directly correlated to how long you spend looking like you're working'.

      It's ironic really. Henry Ford did actually study the subject of working hours, and realised he got the same productivity when he went from 6 days/week, 12 hours shifts, to 5 days a week 8 hours shifts. He also had a workforce which didn't burn out as quickly.

    28. Re:80 hours by El+Yanqui · · Score: 1

      You have to decide what your time is worth and what you want to do with your life. I spent six years as a nuke on a submarine. Out at sea for most of a year; often standing watch port and starboard then doing maintenance, training, field days etc. on "off-duty" time.

      I decided it wasn't worth it and I wanted a bit more out of life so I got out.

      --
      Well, thanks to the Internet, I'm now bored with sex.
    29. Re:80 hours by cloudkiller · · Score: 1

      Seriously...I just have to believe salary is for suckers.

      you should try working for a university. i get paid good, i get three weeks off a year in addition to two weeks at christmas and a half week at thanksgiving, if i'm ever asked to do anything outside of normal hours that time can be used as additional vacation time and i can hire student workers to do most of the tedious stuff while i read slashdot. oh yea... and i get snow days off too. salary is for suckers? sure thing bud.

      --
      [an error occurred while processing this sig]
    30. Re:80 hours by davemabe · · Score: 4, Insightful

      Sounds like you're one of the most unproductive workers I can imagine.

      The first thing that comes to my mind when I hear about people working these long hours is that they're wasting a lot of time.

    31. Re:80 hours by kauttapiste · · Score: 1
      I work 37.5 hours a week (+ .5h daily for lunch). I make enough money to make the ends meet. But that's just me. And most of the rest of Europe too, I guess..

      Too many people nowadays are workaholics. One of the biggest problems in today's world, IMHO.

      Also, creating GDP growth as a nation by working longer hours is not sustainable nor wise (again IMHO).

    32. Re:80 hours by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      Actually, I do get a lot of flexibility when it comes to appointments and such during work time, I can take off for a couple hours to do something and work doesn't care so long as I'm getting my work done. Does your work pay you to go do some personal banking? Hmm...I didn't think so.

    33. Re:80 hours by be951 · · Score: 1

      80 hours for nine days? Smarter.

      Fixed that for ya. Seriously? 100 hours is more than 14 hours a day, 7 days. Even if you really love your job (and if you did, it would just be a busy week, not a "bad week"), that's excessive.

    34. Re:80 hours by Ngarrang · · Score: 1

      Sounds like you're one of the most unproductive workers I can imagine.

      The first thing that comes to my mind when I hear about people working these long hours is that they're wasting a lot of time.

      Agreed. If you cannot complete your job in 40 hours, you either are doing it poorly, or the task needs a second person. I like my salaried tech support job. If I work more than 40 hours in a week, it is rare. I arrive at work at 7:30am, and leave at 4:00pm, Monday through Friday. I have 3 hours of quality time with my family, and with two little boys wanting to play with daddy, a lot is compressed into that 3 hours.

      And if I need to leave early? I just do. As long as I get my 40 in per week, my boss doesn't care. So, I may arrive in 30 minute early a few days to make up for leaving early. As long as the math works out and the job is getting done, all is good.

      --
      Bearded Dragon
    35. Re:80 hours by lawaetf1 · · Score: 4, Insightful

      Couldn't agree more. A solid day's work is a noble thing but this "80 on a usual week, 100 on a bad week" is for the birds. I have no pity whatsoever unless it truly is the only job you can get or you absolutely have to have it (pays the extra $5k you need for your kids' medicine).

      I've as much sympathy for the OP as I do for lawyers who put in similar hours for 10 years in order to make partner. Enjoy the $$.. you'll have no soul at the end... huh, that explains a lot.

      --
      CommentBot 0.7a running with args "-module irritate,disagree -target random"
    36. Re:80 hours by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      Haha :D

      You all suck balls.

      I work a '40 hour week', except they give me Friday Afternoons off (For nothing!), and get above the average wage, PLUS 22 days paid holiday (20+ Days mandated by the government, it's ILLEGAL otherwise).

      There's no problem with the world. There's just a problem with America!

      England rules.

    37. Re:80 hours by e2d2 · · Score: 1

      We're all wage slaves today, unless we are owners. Owners make the real money, the rest of us get just enough to keep coming back.

    38. Re:80 hours by gabec · · Score: 1

      At my last company they allowed 9-nines or 4-tens. 9-nines is a great deal for the developer. Any actually important developer in a company ends up working 9 hours a day anyway, just due to interruptions, meetings, etc. so having every other friday off for doing what you'd be doing *anyway* is excellent, and if you have that mentality, then even if you *do* get called in for a crisis, well, then you don't get your "free day".

      It's actually a much better deal for the developer than the manager / company. the 4-eights guys end up being the ones to stay late friday night to meet a deadline and the 9-nines and 4-tens guys get to wash their hands of it on Thursday (and only come in for a production issue/crisis).

      Also, if you're the type of person with a lot of domain knowledge people probably drop by your desk a lot. Every Friday you're out someone drops by and goes "AH, dangit!" and wanders off to find someone else. Not a big deal, but it's there.

      Point is, don't feel abused when you get pulled in or called, because the company's doing something very cool for you they don't have to.

    39. Re:80 hours by loshwomp · · Score: 5, Insightful

      Well, some of us [work 80-hour weeks] to maintain our quality of life in these wonderful times.

      I hate to break it to you, but if you're working 80- or 100-hour weeks, you don't have any quality of life.

    40. Re:80 hours by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      I spent six years as a nuke on a submarine

      What?!

    41. Re:80 hours by cecille · · Score: 1

      but, do they happily let you leave early when your work is done?

      I'll let you know if I ever run into that situation.

      --
      ...no two people are not on fire.
    42. Re:80 hours by Rary · · Score: 1

      Seriously...I just have to believe salary is for suckers. They expect you to work over if 'needed'...but, do they happily let you leave early when your work is done? Hmm....I didn't think so.

      It depends on your employer. I know lots of people in my company who leave early more frequently than they stay late. In fact, overtime is generally frowned upon in this company. I think they see it the way I do, which is that overtime is a sign of poor management.

      Salary is great if you have an employer who respects you and your skills. I mean, here I am surfing Slashdot at work, but I don't feel guilty, because I don't get paid for my time, I get paid for the work I do, and I will deliver my project on time and to the standard of quality that is expected of me. The occasional Slashdot break isn't going to prevent that.

      --

      "You cannot simultaneously prevent and prepare for war." -- Albert Einstein

    43. Re:80 hours by metlin · · Score: 1

      It depends on the industry, no?

      Where I work, if you're an Analyst or an Associate, you'd better show up before everyone else, and leave after everyone else.

      Working in an up or out organization, everyone is working their asses off to outdo everyone else simply because if you don't, you get fired. And it is not just work that you do - you are also compared for your firm contributions, your contribution to your particular competency etc.

      So, if you get your work done in 40 hours, you'd better do other things simply because others are (and these are not trivial things, either, some of them are just as hard as regular work). On top of that, you'd better have time to socialize with the client and arrive fresh and chirpy in the mornings.

      Just because you have an easy enough job where everything can be done in 40 hours or less and where you have little enough responsibility to be out the door by 5 doesn't mean the rest of us do.

    44. Re:80 hours by metlin · · Score: 1

      US Navy - Nuclear Technician (e.g. EMT etc).

      My girlfriend was one, and I fully remember the hard life she (and we) had when she was still in service.

    45. Re:80 hours by metlin · · Score: 1

      Eh.

      You're just not familiar with industries where 80-100 hour weeks are the norm, and are even expected. Talk to any lawyer, management consultant or finance professional in one of the top tier firms. Most of these firms tend to be strictly up our out, and you get rated on not just your work but also other things you do besides work (firm contributions, for one).

      You know that a third or more of your particular level is going to get axed at the end of the year (and some even before that). So, you'd better work your ass off. If you do well, you get promoted. If you don't, you get fired.

      But hey, I'm sure your world is the only one that exists, where everything is nice and pink and people are all lazy asses working for 30 hours or less.

      To be honest, though, those of us who wake up every Monday morning at 4 AM to fly out and spend late nights working (and interact with clients and go out drinking on top of all this, which btw is not considered work but is just as tiring) don't give a rat's ass whether or not you believe.

    46. Re:80 hours by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      Karl Marx called, and he wants his class warfare back.

    47. Re:80 hours by CrazyTalk · · Score: 1

      Why would we do that to ourselves? Rent..Food...Beer... the usual reasons. Oh, find another job that pays half as well with less hours? In todays economy? Good luck with that.

    48. Re:80 hours by langelgjm · · Score: 1

      But hey, I'm sure your world is the only one that exists, where everything is nice and pink and people are all lazy asses working for 30 hours or less.

      You should also realize that there are plenty of industries where much more than 40 hours a week can actually be dangerous.

      I had a summer job for several years in manufacturing, where I always made sure I never came into work tired, because I was afraid I might lose a finger or hand. There was a lot of physical work involved, and fatigue and lack of attention were safety issues.

      Asking someone in one of those industries to work 80 hours a week, or even 60, is asking for workplace accidents.

      --
      "Anyone who [rips a CD] is probably engaging in copyright infringement." - David O. Carson
    49. Re:80 hours by blueZ3 · · Score: 1

      I think the point is more that if you're working at the kind of place where it's "up or out" and 80-hour weeks, you've probably made a bad decision somewhere along the line. If you WANT to work in that environment with those kinds of hours, you should probably see a shrink.

      Those of us with a life outside of work (you know, wife and kids, hobbies, outside interests, a social life) can clue you in: you're not going to take any of that stuff you're buying with you when you die, and you're not going to get any of those hours back. Ever. I can guarantee that I'm not going to regret quiet evenings spent reading with my wife, afternoons spent at the pool with my daughter, or any of the many other things I enjoy doing. I doubt you can say the same for the myriad hours you're spending in the pursuit of money you don't have the time to enjoy.

      --
      Interested in a Flash-based MAME front end? Visit mame.danzbb.com
    50. Re:80 hours by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      Fuck that. If a company tried to abuse me with that kind of shit I'd quit. The only reason they do is because they've discovered you respond to their bullying.

    51. Re:80 hours by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      at my work its 8 hr days 5 day a week very old school
      but its 3/ 15 min breaks and no lunch
      instead of 10 10 30
      and because of the missing five mins in the breaks
      we get to be late back from any one break per day
      i must say though i do labor,i make very little even after being there for 4 years,and i BEG for overtime when ever i can.being a machine operator in a production based plant,means the more machines u can run the more likly u can stay for overtime. right now in this bad times i work 80 hours biweekly and get paid 1600 a month i live in the cheapest place in this city and its still 800/month
      but when the paper biz big its 12hr 7 days a week
      for labor its hard but worth it. (thats when i get my sweet new computer parts!)

    52. Re:80 hours by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      So, how much money do you make?

      And why is "laziness" a bad thing? Simply because you aren't?

    53. Re:80 hours by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      Which "dues" would those be? Because you have a cushy tech job how were you required to do manual labor? I think a more logical connection is those who started in tech support who worked their way up to something better.

    54. Re:80 hours by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      (European here, btw - we understand that life is not work. Work is a means to get money. Enjoying it is very good, but family & friends are much more important than a big paycheque or an important title)

    55. Re:80 hours by goofballs · · Score: 1

      I think the point is more that if you're working at the kind of place where it's "up or out" and 80-hour weeks, you've probably made a bad decision somewhere along the line. If you WANT to work in that environment with those kinds of hours, you should probably see a shrink.

      or they just have different priorities than you- the thing about an 'up or out' place like the poster is describing is that the payoff is HUGE; these hours are a short term sacrifice to make the seriously big bucks.

      Those of us with a life outside of work (you know, wife and kids, hobbies, outside interests, a social life) can clue you in: you're not going to take any of that stuff you're buying with you when you die, and you're not going to get any of those hours back. Ever. I can guarantee that I'm not going to regret quiet evenings spent reading with my wife, afternoons spent at the pool with my daughter, or any of the many other things I enjoy doing. I doubt you can say the same for the myriad hours you're spending in the pursuit of money you don't have the time to enjoy.

      when these dudes make partner and cash out at 40, i don't think they regret their choices either. for example, my buddy is a sr. manager at deloitte, on the partner list for next year. already making bank. should *easily* be able to cash out at 40. his kids will be 6 yrs old then- and he'll be able to spend as much time as he wants with them, travel with them, etc, etc.

    56. Re:80 hours by TravisO · · Score: 1

      So extending your work day from 8hrs to 9hrs destroys your personal life? Care to elaborate on your simple minded assumption?

    57. Re:80 hours by datababe72 · · Score: 3, Interesting

      Actually, I arranged a similar thing after the birth of my baby. It was brilliant. I changed jobs for other reasons and had to go back to the normal schedule. I miss my every other Friday off. Sometimes, I took my daughter out of day care and spent the day with her. Sometimes, I sent her to day care like normal and got chores done so that my husband and I could both have more time with our daughter on the weekend.

      You already have a lot of people on this thread boasting about how many hours they work. Whatever. I have generally worked 40 hour weeks (or 80 hours every two weeks) my entire career, and I have advanced up the ladder just fine, thank you. I always get good performance reviews and good raises. Working hard and getting a lot done does not require insane work hours, and I have rarely met anyone who could remain productive for all of the insane hours they "worked". Personally, I find I can sustain crazy hours for about two weeks, and I'll do that if I think whatever crisis needs handling is worth it.

      Good luck- the system will work for you if you let it.

    58. Re:80 hours by Kelbear · · Score: 1

      I'd just like to point out that overwork isn't necessarily a race for money for the employee.

      They go into a job interview and get a general picture of what will be done. As they shoulder the workload, it may be more than the employer had let on, or the employee's responsibilities end up growing over time.

      And once they are given a responsibility they take it upon themselves to make sure it's done, regardless what time it is, how long ago everyone else has left the office, or the fact that they're not being paid. It's important because leaving a responsibility unfulfilled is damaging to their personal pride and morale. Money doesn't necessarily factor into their decision.

      Just explaining the mindset of the overworked employee.

    59. Re:80 hours by The+Man · · Score: 3, Interesting

      Worse still, your employer probably isn't getting much for all your effort. I just finished a 12-month run of pretty consistent 70-hour weeks with the occasional 80- or 90-hour marathon thrown in for fun, including a (record, for me) run of 49 consecutive days worked. I was probably getting only about 1/3 as much work done per hour as I might when properly rested and working 45-50 hours a week.

      Of course, I knew this at the time, too - the problem was that the alternative was taking a couple days off, which would mean that instead of getting (1/3) * (14/9) * 2 days' worth of work done in that time, I'd get nothing done. That would of course mean that when I got back I'd still have all the work that needed doing before, plus two more days' worth, and an extra 2 days' worth of schedule pressure added as well. While the first day back might be ok, I'd need to work extra hours to start catching up, and after another 12-14 hour day or two I'd be right back where I started: unproductive and working way too much, but even farther behind. It's really a Hobson's choice at that point.

      Anyone can work extra time to get past a crisis or a single near-term deadline. But the constantly intensifying pressure of a looming but obviously unachievable deadline really makes scheduling your work a vicious circle. No matter how hard you work, the deadline will just keep getting pushed farther out, and there is no work schedule that would allow you to meet it. But you have to try, so you work more but get less done, and the pressure ratchets up another notch! Ugh. All you can really do is make whatever progress you can, try to stay sane, and look for any possible opportunity to dump work on others (who btw are probably just as loaded down as you are).

      If you're in this spot, you have to really want to do whatever you're doing. If you don't, you should be looking for a new job and/or trying to get yourself onto the next RIF list. It doesn't really matter that "you have a family to feed" or whatever else you're telling yourself. As the parent said, you don't have any quality of life. You're just going to have to learn to get by on whatever pay is available to someone with your skills and experience willing to work hard 40-50 hours a week. That might mean less "stuff" in your life. So be it. Of course, the problem is that there are very few jobs available at all that don't require long hours; I blame the high fixed costs of hiring and compensating most developed-world workers. At many companies, these fixed costs are over 50% of total compensation cost. If employers stopped offering these large fixed-cost benefit packages, they could afford to hire enough workers to get the job done (and as a side benefit, their employees would be free to choose how to spend their money). Instead, they have an incentive to understaff and get more hours out of existing workers, amortizing all those fixed costs over a larger amount of work. And with a generally weak labour market - though frankly not nearly as bad as in 2001-2003 - they can really put the screws to you right now. A job that offers at least somewhat interesting work and mostly requires 40-50 hours a week is an absolute treasure, whatever it pays.

    60. Re:80 hours by Kelbear · · Score: 1

      The person you're replying to, was replying to someone stating that they enjoyed working 16 hours a day, 7 days a week and liking it (videogame programmer).

    61. Re:80 hours by Angstroem · · Score: 3, Insightful

      Talk to any lawyer, management consultant or finance professional in one of the top tier firms.

      And you see the contradiction to my posting exactly *where*?

      Excuse my frank words, but what you cited here are exactly those jobs which either create one huge pile of cow manure after the other (which is left for others to clean up), or where every food and drink intake becomes a "work meeting". Mostly both.

      I do have relatives working at McK and I do know how McK sucks the life out of them, with them finding each and every excuse for why that is good. For *that*, the paycheck is not even remotely big enough. Besides, consulting firms like these are responsible for any major business fuckup: We need to outsource. No, outsourcing is wrong, we need to be fully self-supplying. We need to concentrate the company to its core business and sell everything else. No, we need to amalgamate to acquire a wide, solid base.

      Not to mention those financial firms who seeingly created the current world-wide mess.

      Thank you, but if that is your point pro 80-100hrs of work per week, I rest my case...

    62. Re:80 hours by no1home · · Score: 2, Insightful

      You already have a lot of people on this thread boasting about how many hours they work. Whatever. I have generally worked 40 hour weeks (or 80 hours every two weeks) my entire career, and I have advanced up the ladder just fine, thank you. I always get good performance reviews and good raises. Working hard and getting a lot done does not require insane work hours, and I have rarely met anyone who could remain productive for all of the insane hours they "worked". Personally, I find I can sustain crazy hours for about two weeks, and I'll do that if I think whatever crisis needs handling is worth it.

      Agreed. Yes, there are times in some industries, such as our tech industry, wherein we have emergencies to answer to, but I find regular hours are enough to get my work done. Otherwise, I would consider myself unfit for duty and find a new career. I understand that some, few, places push hard and require more (push back and demand better treatment).

      As for working a 9/80 work schedule, it works best when the off days are respected. Much of my team works a 9/80 and on the rare occasion their off Friday is interrupted, they get the time back. Staffing prevents us from having the entire team on the 9/80 schedule, so it's granted to those listed as 'managers'. (If you're truly familiar with IT, you realize that, somehow, many of us are listed as such.) I wish I had a 9/80, though a 7/80 would be even better for me (one week of three 12-hour days and one week of three 12-hour days and one 8-hour day).

      --
      I hope this comment is well received... I could have moderated instead!

      Persecutors will be violated!
    63. Re:80 hours by khellendros1984 · · Score: 2, Insightful

      Californians are spoiled. Apparently due to game companies' abuse of programmers, software engineers and programmers must be hourly employees, not exempt. If they ask me to work 80 hours a week, they're going to be paying me overtime on half of that.

      --
      It is pitch black. You are likely to be eaten by a grue.
    64. Re:80 hours by amuro98 · · Score: 2, Insightful

      No but working 16 hrs, 7 days a week, WILL.

      I had a few coworkers who were like the OP. They'd willingly work ridiculously long hours just because they liked what they were doing.

      Problem was, management came to depend on their crazy schedules. Which meant when crunch time came, they had nothing more to give. A few times we'd come in to work the next morning, only to find one or both of them literally passed out on their keyboards after working 36+ hours straight. It wasn't healthy, and basically anything they did in those last 12 hours wasn't very useful, or even coherent, for that matter.

    65. Re:80 hours by Jarik+C-Bol · · Score: 1

      i work 40 hours a week with an hour unpaid lunch every day. the ends meet if you really stretch. this is a problem, because my job is contract labor, with no taxes removed, so i have to squirrel away about 3k a year just to pay my taxes. that means I basically live to save up enough to pay my taxes. working more hours does not really help, because i have to pay more taxes on the money i make working more hours. the solution is to quit, become a vagabond, and have no income to tax. but if i where a vagabond, i could not read /. during my lunchbreak.

      --
      I've decided to Diversify my Holdings. I've divided my cash between my left and right pockets, instead of all in one.
    66. Re:80 hours by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      My employer found a happy medium.

      My current main task is monitoring a system during the day.

      While thats running I'm also supposed to design and implement plug-ins for our new tool.

      Try splitting your concentration between one task that is mind-numbing and needs constant attention with another that is challenging and requires focus to perform.

      Some days I feel like my head is exploding, others I merely hate my job and read slashdot.

    67. Re:80 hours by buddyglass · · Score: 1

      My post wasn't meant to suggest that the 9/80 plan was "miserable". With 9/80 you're still working 80 hours every two weeks, for an average of 40/wk. The guy I responded to claimed that he worked 80 hours per week on average, with a low of 60/wk and high of 100/wk.

    68. Re:80 hours by hoppo · · Score: 2, Insightful

      In an "up or out" organization, employees are also highly inclined to inflate the number of hours they claim to be working. Since a tremendous amount of one-upsmanship is present in these organizations, one person's inflated claims forces a colleague to inflate his hours worked even more, which forces another colleague to top that, and so on. Eventually, an equillibrium is reached, which represents the maximum believable number of hours one can work while still taking time to eat a hot pocket and and grab a couple hours of sleep. This is how one arrives at the mythical 80-hour week.

      I don't think anyone here doubts that you work quite a lot. However, your claims of an 80-hour week on a regular basis are most likely false. I've seen you claim in other posts that you work out regularly and read quite a lot of books. There's not a lot of time to do those things when you have a 12-16 hour workday, especially when you tack on additional time for meals and commuting. So you're either lying about how you spend your free time, or you're exaggerating how much time you spend at work. I'm inclined to believe the latter.

      But we get it. That's the world in which you live. Many of your peers are likely to read Slashdot as well, so you're forced to perpetuate the illusion here as well as in your workplace. Just don't kid yourself into thinking people believe it.

    69. Re:80 hours by buddyglass · · Score: 1

      If you or your family is going to be suffer should you not work 80 hours per week then I would consider that level of workload to be "worth it". That said, most people, and almost certainly the guy I responded to, probably aren't in that situation.

      Most likely he works those hours because 1) he has one of the "cool" IT jobs, for which the demand is so high that employers can require those sort of hours, or 2) he wants to have a posh house, posh clothes, posh car, etc. Hence my comment, "hope it's worth it". For me, those things aren't "worth" the "cost" of working regular 80 hour weeks.

    70. Re:80 hours by Endo13 · · Score: 1

      his kids will already be 6 yrs old then- and he'll finally be able to spend some time with them

      FTFY.

      --
      There is no -1 Disagree mod. Slashdot.org/faq defines mod options. USE IT.
    71. Re:80 hours by metlin · · Score: 1

      Who says that working out a lot, working 80 hour weeks and reading books are mutually exclusive?

      All it takes is half hour 3-4 times a week to work out, which isn't much. And I fly a lot so that is my reading time.

      If you must know, I also climb mountains, bike regularly, trade and manage my finances actively, read a lot and have a girlfriend.

      And I'm sorry, but what's your point again? Just because you are terrible at time management doesn't mean the rest of us are.

    72. Re:80 hours by cayenne8 · · Score: 1
      "Does your work pay you to go do some personal banking? Hmm...I didn't think so."

      No, but I calculate the bill rate I demand based on how much time annually I think I want to be off....including 10-12 holidays (we do Mardi Gras here), 3 weeks vacation and some sick time.

      If it is just a few hours during the week...I leave at 6 hour day...and work two 9 hour days that week to make up for it.

      --
      Light travels faster than sound. This is why some people appear bright until you hear them speak.........
    73. Re:80 hours by cayenne8 · · Score: 1
      "Why would we do that to ourselves? Rent..Food...Beer... the usual reasons. Oh, find another job that pays half as well with less hours? In todays economy? Good luck with that."

      Actually it isn't THAT hard. You do have to be willing to move to where the job might be tho....

      --
      Light travels faster than sound. This is why some people appear bright until you hear them speak.........
    74. Re:80 hours by OrangeTide · · Score: 3, Insightful

      It's called working your way through school.

      --
      “Common sense is not so common.” — Voltaire
    75. Re:80 hours by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      Greetings from Silicon Valley. Yes, it's common to see folks working 80 hours in one week. Lots of folks in startups work that amount. Lots of managers in any kind of business work that amount.

    76. Re:80 hours by lxs · · Score: 2, Funny

      What are these "personal relationships" you speak of?

    77. Re:80 hours by Kiaser+Zohsay · · Score: 1

      I don't see a The Daily WTF clone for the construction industry. Maybe that could be related.

      Go to any construction site and listen for a while. I can guarantee you will hear a real life WTF before long.

      --
      I am not your blowing wind, I am the lightning.
    78. Re:80 hours by metlin · · Score: 1

      That's fine.

      You (like most Slashdotters) think that anything non-technical is mostly useless. As a former techie, I used to be the same way (until maturity hit me).

      Now, obviously I disagree, but I'm not going to go into why I think what I do is valuable. You're entitled to your opinions, and it's quite plain that what I find enjoyable and challenging is different from what you find enjoyable and challenging.

      I love the variety and the opportunity to wear multiple hats - from having to work on optimizing business operations, to building multi-million cost models to working with new technology architectures. Yes, there have been big fuckups - but hey, there have been big technology fuckups that have cost lives, too. To me, that's a poor excuse and a poorer argument still because there are a lot of examples and cases where things have been quite successful.

      A lot of people in these industries are extremely sharp, hardworking and obviously think that their work means something. For every major screw up by a senior executive, there are hundreds of analysts and associates working their butt off. Your argument is anecdotal at best and specious at worst.

    79. Re:80 hours by hoppo · · Score: 1

      No matter how good you are at time management, you cannot, by some feat of magic, create more than 24 hours in a day. It is apparent you think quite highly of yourself, which is why you take such offense when someone calls BS on your BS.

      I could be wrong, but I doubt it. Regardless, we in the Slashdot community still love and accept you, no matter how many hours you claim to work.

    80. Re:80 hours by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      Ha ha! You too suck balls!

      I work 37.5, which usually translates to something between 30 and 40, have 6 weeks of holidays, plus all public holidays (quite a few of them ;) ). Plus maternity/paternity leave of 1.5 year split between mother/father.

      Sweden rules!

    81. Re:80 hours by Bloke+down+the+pub · · Score: 1

      Talk to any lawyer, management consultant or finance professional in one of the top tier firms

      I'd rather not, if you don't mind. They're so boring, all they ever talk about is work.

      --
      It's true I tell you, feller at work's next door neighbour read it in the paper.
    82. Re:80 hours by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      80 hours a week is only 10-12 hours a day which is really not that much. You don't need some massive time mgmt skills to do that...

    83. Re:80 hours by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      You, Sir, are a BS artist of the highest order. As a fellow mountain climbing, girlfriend banging, weight lifting, treadmill running, book reading, business traveling, more than two full-job working, stock trading.....holy crap, that sounds ridiculous, doesn't it.

      Liar, liar, pants on fire.

    84. Re:80 hours by Bloke+down+the+pub · · Score: 1

      Seems there's a bit of an echo in here.

      --
      It's true I tell you, feller at work's next door neighbour read it in the paper.
    85. Re:80 hours by Bloke+down+the+pub · · Score: 1

      Whoosh me if you like, but it's 10-12 hours every day.

      --
      It's true I tell you, feller at work's next door neighbour read it in the paper.
    86. Re:80 hours by Angstroem · · Score: 1

      You (like most Slashdotters) think that anything non-technical is mostly useless.

      And what exactly let you draw this conclusion?

      It's wrong, btw.

      The problem with business studies is that they perceive themselves as hard science. At least that's they way they like so sell themselves. And where I fully believe in economics, I wouldn't touch business studies with a 10-foot pole.

      Unfortunately, any major decision these days doesn't seem to be made upon economic or scientific decisions, but rather because of some model/promise derived from business studies. Which, in retrospective, are always able to show how their models work for past situations but usually utterly fail for anything in the future. Kinda like those Nostradamus books which get updated and re-sold every year.

      And to come back to the original topic, the 60/80/100 hrs working week, it's also those business studies people who favor the idea that you're an "underperformer" if you just work the ordinary working hours and not bring in your entire spare time and a major part of your sleep time.

      So when it comes to "non-tech", as you put it, I like to differentiate. There's valuable non-tech like economics (where techies and engineers usually are not quite best, hence any Steve Wozniak typically will need his Steve Jobs) and there's bogus non-tech like business studies.

      And they're easy to differentiate. Only the bogus non-tech changes its model with the fashion, even if that means that 10 years later the same people who praised Model X will now advertise a Model Y being the complete difference of Model X.

    87. Re:80 hours by buddyglass · · Score: 1

      Ummm...okay? I don't recall suggesting that nobody works that much. But I'd say the same thing to them that I said to the original poster: hope it's worth it.

    88. Re:80 hours by bplipschitz · · Score: 1

      Insightful?! You've got to be kidding me--do the damned math, it's 8.8 hours per workday.

      Shit, I'm already doing 10+ hrs/day. 80 in 9 days would be gravy. . .

    89. Re:80 hours by metlin · · Score: 1

      You (like most Slashdotters) think that anything non-technical is mostly useless.

      And what exactly let you draw this conclusion?

      It's wrong, btw.

      The problem with business studies is that they perceive themselves as hard science. At least that's they way they like so sell themselves. And where I fully believe in economics, I wouldn't touch business studies with a 10-foot pole.

      Actually, you're validating my point. Finance, accounting etc. are also considered technical skills within the industry - they are not technology-related, but they are hard skills.

      Secondly, a lot of the best people in a lot of these professions act by feel, as opposed to skill. A good trader trades by his feel, a good salesman goes by his feel etc. If anything, the so-called models were built by quants who tried applying hard sciences in an attempt to quantify something that effectively cannot be.

      And I have no idea what business studies you are talking about, unless you are equating every non-technical class to be a business studies class (whatever that may entail).

    90. Re:80 hours by Angstroem · · Score: 1

      Finance, accounting etc. are also considered technical skills within the industry - they are not technology-related, but they are hard skills.

      And I'm not objecting these. As said before, they are vital *especially* for techies who often enough make bad businessmen, either due to a lack of interest or just a wrong perspective. And even if not, they do need accounting and finance to properly rate how their company is doing and see where things are possibly going wrong.

      However, this can be also been overdone -- like unfortunately it is today where hardly any long-term perspective counts but just quarterly numbers and how much the shareholder value can be risen. In more sane times it counted that the company had a long-term perspective and was profitable. There was not this mathematically nonsensical idea that a company could increase sales by n% per year. Even less there was this idea that the quarterly numbers could be boosted by just firing a bunch of people which looked good in the books (saved money), but in the end kills the company. Once you start playing that game, it's definitely not the best and brightest who stay til the end.

      A recent example of this game is Agere Systems. Spun off from Bell Labs with about 18.500 employees in 2001. In 2003 the numbers were cut down drastically for "concentrating on the core business". Just 6 months after that nonsense started, even the internal research dept was nixed. By 8/2003 there were only 5500 people left, another 4 months later 3500.

      What remained (IIRC about 1500 people) was later acquired by LSI Logic.

      Quite some fate for originally one of the finest research labs.

      But, then, research labs have awful quarterly numbers. All these costs, costs, costs and no revenue... Cause of course the commercialization of eventual findings is done by a different company division. And look how great *they* perform. Hardly any cost, but so much revenue!

      a lot of the best people in a lot of these professions act by feel,

      Which is completely fine! Another word for this would be "talent". And no matter how hard and long John Dow works, how many hours per week he robots, he will *never* match someone truly talented.

      And I have no idea what business studies you are talking about, unless you are equating every non-technical class to be a business studies class (whatever that may entail).

      Might be a language clash here as I'm no native speaker and had to look up proper translations for "Betriebswirtschaftslehre (BWL)" (which according to dict.leo.org is "business studies") and "Volkswirtschaftslehre (VWL)" (translated as "economics").

      Anyone?

    91. Re:80 hours by quanticle · · Score: 3, Insightful

      At many companies, these fixed costs are over 50% of total compensation cost. If employers stopped offering these large fixed-cost benefit packages, they could afford to hire enough workers to get the job done (and as a side benefit, their employees would be free to choose how to spend their money).

      You think management wants the situation to be this way? Management wants the situation to be like the one you describe as well, as that would make planning hiring and firing much easier. Its just that, if you stop offering things like health care and 401(k) and other side benefits, the people that apply for your open positions are the bottom of the barrel dregs that you don't want to hire.

      Frankly, we're all just tiptoeing around the true elephant in the room - the fact that health care costs have grown unsustainably. If health care costs are passed to the employers, we end up with the present situation - employers are afraid to hire for fear of taking the health care costs, and ask more of their existing workforce. If we pass those costs to the employees, we'll see a dramatic rise in bankruptcies and uncollectable emergency room visits as people put off getting medical treatment until their diseases are nigh-incurable. If the costs are passed to the government, we'll either see massive tax increases, or a rise in the public debt (and a corresponding rise in interest rates).

      The only real way to ensure continued economic growth (past the end of the current crisis) is to deflate this health-care bubble in a controlled fashion. What the best way is to do that is still not clear, but it is clear that something must be done before the health care industry bankrupts the rest of the economy.

      --
      We all know what to do, but we don't know how to get re-elected once we have done it
    92. Re:80 hours by buddyglass · · Score: 1

      I'll see your "do the damned math" and raise you one "read the damned post".

      The guy I was responding to says he works 80 hours in a normal week.

    93. Re:80 hours by Matheus · · Score: 1

      That's basically how I worked when I was a contractor.. "OK.. so I have 3 months to do X amount of work and a budget of Y hours" If I can get the job done in a week or two then I can slack off for the rest of the time (or get another job and another paycheck) The only hard part was if I procrastinated (which I tended to do) it was a challenge to decide what to report was done to show progress when it all wasn't going to get done till a later one week in the time frame :)

    94. Re:80 hours by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      Salary's only for suckers if you work for jerks. I'm a salaried employee and I've had to work overtime exactly two times in three years. The first time, a VeeP paid me a bonus because he felt responsible for letting not keeping tabs on the way a new piece of equipment was being integrated. A production manager's decision to start a vital production run Friday evening with a "must be done" deadline of 9am Monday meant that I was asked (not required) to pop in over the weekend and make sure everything went smoothly. (The run could (should) have been started days earlier which would have allowed monitoring during business hours.) The other time was scheduled a few weeks in advance and I was told to come in a couple hours late that day to make up for having to stay. We finished earlier than expected so it was actually a short day. Working here is nice. They watch the clock the other way. "Hey, it's 5:30. Why are you still here?" "I took a long lunch." "So what? It's 5:30. Out!"

      However, when I was paid hourly at another company, I was rarely on the clock for less than 9 hours and there were a couple stretches of 16+ hour days. Once, I didn't have a day off for over a month. 16+ hours during the week, 10 or so on weekends. It was absurd. And hella overtime. Plus a crappy bonus at the end. Oh, gee. I've had no life for almost 5 weeks but this $250 bonus makes it worth all the effort. Hell, even back then my overtime was way more than that each week.

    95. Re:80 hours by LordWoody · · Score: 1

      Working for salary should not imply working 'free' hours. Being paid salary means you get paid to do a job, not just to be present. Now there are *many* companies that abuse the concept of salary pay to get free over time, but that does not mean all of them do it nor that you should put up with it. I work for a company that at times makes large demands of my time with occasional trips out of town (effectively all of my time is eaten). But on the same token, when the big push is over, no one cares if you show up a bit late or leave a bit early (yes it does happen). I am really lucky in that during (youth) baseball season, my work overlooks all the time I am present, but dealing with baseball matters, parents, coaches, umpires, scheduling, lineups (I coach in addition to working on the board) and various board matters. Not to mention the times I leave very early to prepare for and coach or umpire games.

      So long as I delver on time and am around so proper communication can occur, no one complains. If I miss my deadlines, then I either need to spend more time per day to get the job done or need to give better estimates and set reasonable expectations. My schedule is not much less flexible than 1099 development work have done full time in the past. Customer needs dictated much of that work occurred at specific times and I still had schedules and expectations to make. Not to mention that you generally do not work 1099 jobs for 'as long as it takes' (yes some contracts are open-ended). Customers expect much like my current job, that I can gather the necessary information to make accurate time estimates and thus make reliable cost estimates which are negotiated up front. I then give a price for the *job*. Chances are if you underestimate the time it takes you to write a contact application, that you 'eat' the extra hours. If you are smart, you do not allow much in the way change orders without additional payment and time being added. If you have open ended development work, then you either are very good at negotiation or have a very dumb customer (I have seen this too, and happy to comply of they are that stupid).

      Working 1099 is much like working mini salary jobs. You get to negotiate your salary more often depending on the length and number of 'jobs' or contracts.

      Now you may be working a support type contract in which you get paid for number of 'base' hours with an open-ended agreement for extra paid hours as-needed, but then you have to live with the times when you are not needed and get the minimum hour payments. You DO make them pay for a base amount of hours even if not used, right? That's how they get to pay you $100/hr instead of $120 those months they needed you for five times the base number of hours. Yes you are not working 'free' hours but then you may not get many hours at all. Now if you are smart, you have many of these contacts and total of all the base hours is at least the needed income to get by comfortably but not so many hours that you have no free time, otherwise, what is the point, right?

      --
      Never meddle in the affairs of dragons,
      for you are crunchy and good with catsup.
    96. Re:80 hours by smithmc · · Score: 1

      Well, some of us do it to maintain our quality of life in these wonderful times.

      Oh wait, I forgot - this is Slashdot where everyone is a white collar tech worker that makes a six figure salary... right?

      I suspect there are a good many /.ers that don't even have the foggiest idea what good old fashioned knuckle-busting back-breaking work feels like. But that's a rant for another day. :)

      Bitter much?

      --
      Downmodding is the refuge of the weak. Don't downmod, make a better argument!
    97. Re:80 hours by metlin · · Score: 1

      You, Sir, are a BS artist of the highest order. As a fellow mountain climbing, girlfriend banging, weight lifting, treadmill running, book reading, business traveling, more than two full-job working, stock trading.....holy crap, that sounds ridiculous, doesn't it.

      Umm, no. I don't run, though, since I've a heel injury, but the rest sounds about right. Just because you spend all your free time doing nothing and while it away on pointless things doesn't mean that the rest of us don't find the time to do things we enjoy (and work at our jobs).

    98. Re:80 hours by geoffrob · · Score: 2, Interesting

      Some industrial and mining companies here have a 4 day (12 hour shift) 4 days off cycle. The mining company at Roxby Downs is one, many people live in Port Augusta or Port Pirie and commute (desirable as Roxby is isolated and in a desert so housing is much more expensive.) Pirie people drive (90km) to Port Augusta and take the company bus to Roxby. Seems to work.

    99. Re:80 hours by Hognoxious · · Score: 1

      these hours are a short term sacrifice to make the seriously big bucks.

      It's a gamble, not a sacrifice.

      when these dudes make partner and cash out at 40

      That's "if", not "when".

      I know it's fashionable to describe everything as a Ponzi scheme these days, but these type of firms fit the bill pretty well.

      Finally, bold italics for quotations? WTF?

      --
      Confucius say, "Find worm in apple - bad. Find half a worm - worse."
    100. Re:80 hours by cthulhu11 · · Score: 0

      What's really a bitch is affording a home in a community-property state, in a county where 68,000 Microcult millionaires have escalated prices outrageously.

    101. Re:80 hours by weorthe · · Score: 1

      What will us average Americans do with the money we save by bursting the "health-care bubble?" Well, as typical modern human beings, we will probably spend it on health care. Pills to make us happy, surgeries to counter our gluttony, procedures to make us look youthful, and inefficient, end-of-life, I'm-not-ready-to-die emergency health care. We'll either spend this money directly or demand government services to supply it (meaning higher debt or taxes). In other words, Americans spend enormously on health care because we want to, and if we had even more money to spend, we'd spend that on health care too. Nobody wants to be sick, and nobody wants to die.

      --
      cat * >> sig
    102. Re:80 hours by quanticle · · Score: 2, Interesting

      Nobody wants to be sick, and nobody wants to die, and no one wants to go bankrupt from having to pay hospital bills either. The issue is that no one seems to know what the actual costs are of providing health care. All we have are biased numbers from various industries that are all intent on passing the blame onto someone else within the system.

      Yet, we know that there must be inefficiency somewhere within the system, since other countries (like Britain, or Taiwan) are achieving statistically comparable outcomes while spending only a fraction of what we do? So where is the extra money going?

      --
      We all know what to do, but we don't know how to get re-elected once we have done it
    103. Re:80 hours by mokumegane · · Score: 1

      I used to work twelves. The company I worked for would have us two days on, two days off, three days on, two days off, two days on, three days off... The three days always was on fri-sun. I loved it, really. You could essentially take two days vacation and have a whole week off.

    104. Re:80 hours by Billly+Gates · · Score: 1

      The way he says it is sarcastic. In these wonderful times = bad economy.

      Unfortunately you have to put up with it for a few more years until more jobs are available to jump ship.

    105. Re:80 hours by Billly+Gates · · Score: 1

      In economics the term is called diminishing return. It begins to happen at 35 hours a week. By 60 you hit negative return and it backfires and adds more costs.

      This is college economics 101. The manager is an idiot for not seeing this. It could be in the states that health care costs are so expensive that many employers would rather eat the negative productivity so they do not have to hire as many workers. But still capping hours at 60 is wise.

    106. Re:80 hours by MoonBuggy · · Score: 1

      You consider it spoiled to be paid for the extra work that you do?

    107. Re:80 hours by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      Oh wow! You're so awesome! You can read books while travelling?!! OH MY GOD!!11! But wait..what? HOLY SHIT! You climbed a mountain?! And you rode a bike!? FFFFFFFF-
      But..then you FOUND THE TIME TO WRITE ABOUT IT ON YOUR BLOG?!!!! OH. MY. GOD!! THAT IS AMAAAAAZING!

      But seriously, all joking aside, I hope you're happy. And I mean happy. Because in 10 or 20 years time, when you can no longer work 80 hours a day, your knees can't handle the mountain climbing and biking and your trophy girlfriend realises what an empty husk of a man you are, you better be happy. Or else you'll end up as just another lonely banker, tossing his worthless carcass in the river, burbling his last pathetic breath as his actively managed finances turn sour and his girlfriend screws her personal trainer (who doesn't even have an MBA!).

  77. Its standard in most all Hospitals or Fire Depts by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

    3x12 x == 40 and people put the 2 sets of 3 back to back/
    6 days out of 14 giving you your full 80 hours.

    I work healthcare IT but we don't get that.
    I'd love it.

  78. I would hate to go to a 5/40 shedule by smitke · · Score: 1

    I've only been working the 9/80 schedule for 4.5 years but I LOVE it. I'm looking forward to 4 days off this weekend.

    I haven't had any trouble with working off-Fridays. Our entire company works the same schedule which probably helps. In fact I'd rather (and have) come in on a Sunday instead of an off-Friday.

  79. 5/4-9 schedule by sholsinger · · Score: 1

    9 hours a day, 4 days each week. 8 hours first Friday. Second Friday off. repeat.

    The Army and other government workplaces are becoming hip on this. Tobyhanna Army Depot, for one, has this for most of the DoD Civilian employees. They love it.

    I could see myself not minding it too much. Though I work for a contractor and am not eligible.

    1. Re:5/4-9 schedule by conureman · · Score: 1

      This is how the wife unit does it. She has a short, brutish commute (CA4 Antioch-Martinez), so the day's respite is especially welcome, every other Monday off.

      --
      The cost of that cleanup, of course, will be borne by taxpayers, not industry.
  80. Anonymous Coward by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

    We implemented 9/80 in the early 90s just before we received a new President of the company. He was not supportive, but did not buck it assuming we behaved.It is great, we can flex the Friday when Holidays come up. We are paid every other Friday. It is a good time to schedule non-work life appts. Some groups may use it as an excuse to work overtime, our group tends not to do that on a regular basis. The 4/10 idea is a way for folks to become completely unproductive in that last tenth hour. 9 on some days can be a stretch. We have to cover our phones on Fridays so there are 3 groups; 1 and 2 alternate Fridays and if you want to work 5/40 you can do that. It would be hard to give up.

  81. Raytheon by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

    Raytheon Company made the 9/80 schedule the default for most non-union employees more than a decade ago. Having worked this schedule for the majority of my professional career, I would say that having a three-day weekend every other week is decidedly awesome (not to mention the 10% fewer commute miles this affords).

  82. I'd hate that commute. And... by zullnero · · Score: 1

    1. I'd probably lose my mind by the 8th day in a row driving to work. Now, if I lived in short walking/biking distance or had a good, quick mass transit line, then that would be sort of okay. I could write it off as a workout, I guess.

    2. I'm a single guy with no kids...one big reason that I hate working 4 10s or 9/80 is that I actually have friends outside of work (yeah, I know, Slashdot...whatever, you have friends like that too, and if you don't, you probably should think about getting some of those...and if you don't want to do that, then I don't care about how you feel about that) that work standard work weeks, and it's a pain to keep in touch and hang out when you have to ask your boss if it would be okay to cut out early on a Sunday. Or when you're all fired up and ready to hit the town on a Friday, and none of your friends can get off work early. Or are tired after the long week and need a good night's sleep first.

    3. I'd rather choose when I want to work overtime and have my weekends when I don't need to work on something. But the amount of commuting and time spent just doesn't make sense to me. Unless you're working in some call center and stuck punching in and out, flexibility is the best option and that's a no-brainer.

    4. I'd seriously want more than just one day to get things done, because I'd spend that entire day working and would need a day to unwind. Which is why the 2 day weekend is a genius thing that noses should never be turned up at.

  83. great for 5/40s by usul294 · · Score: 1

    On friday's the phone stops ringing, and all of a sudden everyone starts being able to work without interruption. For people who don't get jumpy on Fridays for the impending weekend, it really improves productivity

  84. I work whatever hours I want by QuantumG · · Score: 4, Interesting

    The company measures my performance by what I get done.

    --
    How we know is more important than what we know.
    1. Re:I work whatever hours I want by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      If only more companies worked this way.

      The lack of that attitude in the corporate world is why I fail to see how Corporate America is more efficient than Government in the eyes of most people. Efficiency comes from caring about getting good results by a deadline, regardless of how many hours are worked per week. Only place that can't work is in retail and supporting industries. Unfortunately, IT is often a "supporting industry".

    2. Re:I work whatever hours I want by poot_rootbeer · · Score: 1

      The company measures my performance by what I get done.

      It must be a novel job description you have if your duties do not require interaction with any other people, and therefore does not ever require you to coordinate schedules so you're 'on duty' at specific times.

    3. Re:I work whatever hours I want by SparkleMotion88 · · Score: 1

      The company measures my performance by what I get done.

      This is a great sentiment that I think many of the "salaried" folks in this discussion are missing. If you are required to work X hours per week, at certain times of day, then your employer hasn't really embraced what it means to have salaried employees. I have never accepted a salaried position in which my schedule was determined by the company. As long as you are being productive, you should be able to take a few hours off in the middle of Tuesday to go to the dentist, or work less than 40 hours this week because work is kind of slow. As long as I am generally at work during the core "meeting hours" (10-3), I feel like I am satisfying my "presence" requirements.

      It's time we all stop punching the clock and start acting like professionals.

  85. 180/12 by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

    I used to work ~12-15 hour days with an hours break, with two days off (weekdays) every two weeks. I loved that as I got paid a hell of a lot for a days work, and if I did work less per day I could never be bothered to do anything else that day anyway. Secondly, compared to a 9-5 job, I could actually get into other stores WHEN THEY ARE DAMN WELL OPEN!! I now work the 9-5, mon-fri. Unfortunatly most stores also do this, therefore you can never get them when they are open unless you take time off work.

  86. 9/80 isn't bad by Defectuous · · Score: 0

    My last job did this, and it worked out pretty good for me. but I also made myself unreachable on my days off. We actually had two groups Team A had the first Friday off while Team B has the second Friday off. I got a lot of flack for not being reachable, but I tried to not leave any loose threads so they had to call me.
    I am where I am at now due to the major raise offered and bennies. But I Also work 4 10's and I am on call one week a month. Which will bring me in at all hours.

  87. Count Yourself Lucky by TheRealJFM · · Score: 1

    I'm working as a part-time Security Guard/CCTV operator while I'm at University. Most of my colleagues work a 44 hour week (4x9, 1x8), not including overtime.

    And they're the lucky ones - outside contractors (usually migrant workers) work 12 hour shifts with only 2 half-hour breaks (the legal maximum number of hours work combined with the legal minimum break time).

    I guess it depends upon what you're used to.

    --
    Joseph Farthing
    http://josephfarthing.com
  88. 8/80 by sanosuke001 · · Score: 1

    During the summer months, my company works under a 8 days, 80 hour schedule. 10 hour days, mondays or fridays off for three months. (They split everyone up so there's half of us there on mondays and fridays)

    It was really nice to have a 4-day work week but aside from the fact I ended up working for a friend of mine on my days off, it was tough sometimes going in at 8am and getting out at 6:30pm and my hour commute. If it weren't for the commute, it probably wouldn't have been as bad.

    The three-day weekends were definitely worth it, though.

    --
    -SaNo
  89. Anyone do 4-9-4? by DustyShadow · · Score: 1

    My old company did 9 hours Mon-Thursday and then 4 hours on Friday you were out at 11:30 on Friday. It was great. I never minded going in at 7:30 and Fridays were almost always useless and low stress.

  90. That would be nice, but 7x5 is more relaxing... by dptulk · · Score: 1

    I think that taking things slow is better. I work from 9-4:30 x 5 days. If you subtract the slashdot reading, cigarette breaks, trips to the coffee maker and social time it works out to be more like 30 hours of work. Other perks include a spacious private office, special daylight balanced lighting, bringing my dog to work, and telecommuting when I am out of clean launtdry. I wouldnt trade it for 9x80 or whatever that was called. Good luck with that though... Regards, One of the Bobs

  91. The problem isnt the work time... We work Plenty by Jackie_Chan_Fan · · Score: 1

    The problem is ... FUCKING PAYING US.

    Sorry, I'm not a 14 year old chinese boy making nikey sneakers for 3 dollars a week.

    We cant compete with slave labor.

  92. I work work 12hours a day 5-6 days a week... by XtremeMachineX · · Score: 1

    when my work is busy i work crazy hours, but i found that i only work 70% of the day, because i figure 70% of the day i work for myself, and the other 30% im working for the Goverment...

  93. Timekeeping and Extended weekend by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

    Our pay period is split at Noon on Friday; 4 hours the prior pay period week and Noon to 4:30 goes on the next pay period week. We have to use the Saturday to post this in our time keeping system.

    It is great to wake up Saturday, having done all that business, med appts, honeydew list on Friday; You think it's Sunday, then all of a sudden you realize it's Saturday.
    Makes the other weekend feel relatively tight.

    Those weekends with a holiday can make for a 4 day weekend and as said can create space in planning your vacations. Look at the calendar and pick your alternate Friday carefully.

    Yes, having half or less of the company there on Fridays makes for productive and quiet workplace and Meet Less Fridays.

  94. why must we work the 80? by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

    That's what I don't understand. The whole concept that thou MUST work 40h to get paid is artificial and just dumb. Companies often make us work more than 40h for no more pay, so why not be a good(tm) company and let your employees work less than 40h for no less pay?

    I've often said that if I ever own my own company, I would, to the best of my company's ability to do so, implement a 32h work week, that is 4x8h days per week. Yes, it might create some challenges, perhaps some would take monday, others friday, whatever.

    But, I believe that if you pay people full competitive wage yet give them a 3 day weekend every week, not only will they be just as productive as if they worked 5 days that week, but you'll gain an employee loyalty that will *also* save money by virtue of retaining staff longer.

    Really, I've been to enough places where people are just so tired of the same grind that they find unproductive ways to waste way more than 8h per week, so why not just give it to them and make them happier. Happier = more productive (at least in most cases)...

  95. Freedom by Barryke · · Score: 1

    Seems i've been spoiled.
    At the companies i worked i found hardly any regulations in place. Besides the like of "show up before 09:30" and "no unscheduled weekend hours" you where to make your own decisions:

    It basicly came down to
    "Per month work an average of 40 hours per 5 workdays."

    In IT I worked as consultant and rented employee for support and development clients. (The Netherlands)

    Surprised nobody before claims to have dynamic hours. Or they don't care. Article is not slashdot worthy imho..

    --
    Hivemind harvest in progress..
  96. Works great for me by TangledupinBlue · · Score: 1

    My company has had 9/80s for as long as I've worked there (~8 years) and I'm a fan. Its great having a 3-day weekend every other week and nice to have a weekday off to get done all the stuff that you can only do 9-5 on weekdays. I would end up working 9+ hours a day even if they were 8 hour work days, so the 9/80 is all positive for me. I've never been pressured to work on my off Friday.

  97. Worked 9/80 15 years ago, still miss it! by mikewas · · Score: 1

    It's been almost 15 years and I still miss it -- it was great! We had 9 hour days Mon-Thu, either 0 or 8 hours on Friday.

    The company originally instituted it in California to meet a mandate to reduce pollution by 20%. They shut down 1 day out of 10 + took credit for 10% reduction in employee commuting. It was popular enough that they spread it to other sites.

    One side effect was that the week started/stopped at noon Friday. Part of the plant was unionized and union rules said anything over 40 hours in a week was paid at overtime rates, and if the company scheduled you for less than 40 hours work in the week you still got paid for 40 hours. Nothing in the contract specified when the week started. So it was timecards at noon Friday.

    --

    "Glory is fleeting, but obscurity is forever." --Napoleon Bonaparte
  98. That depends... by SETIGuy · · Score: 4, Interesting

    If you're hourly, you can often get away with a "40 hour" work week that lasts less than 45 hours. If you're salaried, whether in government or not, you will be expected to get your job done whether it takes 10 hours a week or 168 hours a week. If you don't get it done, in this economic environment they will find someone who will get it done.

    That said, my wife works a 40 hour week that's supposed to be 4 days per week, 10 hours per day. Usually that translates to 8am to 7pm daily. She say's she'd never go back to 5x8.

    Unfortunately we car pool to work, so I work 8 to 7 as well. And then I usually put in 4 or 5 hours on Friday, and a few hours each on Saturday and Sunday. The difference.... You guessed it. She's in an hourly position that isn't exempt from overtime rules. I'm in a salaried position that is exempt from overtime rules. And to top it off, she makes about 20% more than I do because she is in an industry that competes to get workers. I'm in an industry that has more workers than it can afford.

    All in all 4-5x9 probably works OK, and if you're in an urban area, it's 10% less time that you'll sit in traffic. Maybe more because you either be commuting early or late. If the extra hour in the work day is cutting into your sleep, your commute is way too long. If it's cutting into your TV watching, then get TiVo and watch on your new day off.

    1. Re:That depends... by MyLongNickName · · Score: 1

      I'm assuming no kids? I would love the shift, but only if I had no kids.

      --
      See my journal for slashdot ID's by year. Mine created in 2005. http://slashdot.org/journal/289875/slashdot-ids-by-year
    2. Re:That depends... by LanMan04 · · Score: 1

      If you're salaried, whether in government or not, you will be expected to get your job done whether it takes 10 hours a week or 168 hours a week. If you don't get it done, in this economic environment they will find someone who will get it done.

      I was a federal employee for a few years, and as far as I know, EVERYONE is "hourly". Now, this doesn't mean you get overtime. You just get time credits for hours above 40 that you put in a 5 day week (up to some large max of hours, like 100). So, assuming your boss is cool (mine was, amazingly), you can "officially" be a 5/40 worker but actually do 9/80 when you feel like it. Of course, you can *commit* to do the official 9/80, but then you *have* to stick with it. I liked being able to flop back and forth.

      And if you need some extra vacation time? Just work extra hours, bank them, and use them when you want (boss approval, of course). We had to clock in and out, and *everyone* did, including the GS14s and the SESers and such. I assume it's like this everywhere in Executive agencies. Something about it being illegal to work more than 40 hours and not get 1:1 credit time for it.

      --
      With the first link, the chain is forged.
    3. Re:That depends... by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      I was a federal employee for a few years, and as far as I know, EVERYONE is "hourly".

      This certainly isn't the case in all (most?) US federal agencies...

    4. Re:That depends... by Whorhay · · Score: 1

      I work for a cantractor at a DoD facility. We got permission to operate on the 9/80 schedule a couple months after I started working here. I absolutely love it.

      I have 8 days that I work 9 hours and a short day that is the standard 8 hours. My day off is decided by me and my boss, who co-ordinates it with the rest of the office. This way we don't end up with entire sections being absent at the same time. The day off is supposed to be the same day each time though you are allowed to switch it with approval of your boss and the bosses boss on occasion if necessary.

      I picked the Monday after payday as my day off. My short day is the payday/friday preceeding the day off. My wife has family close enough that we can now get in reasonable visits every once in awhile over the weekend without having to take any time off. And being able to get all my appointments with doctor's dentists optometrists and such out of the way on a weekday without taking time off is sweet for saving those precious vacation hours.

  99. I do 9/56 (love govt jobs) by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

    I work 6:15 a day, 9 days a fortnite, taking off every second monday (unless something urgent needs doing)

  100. Great schedule by pHus10n · · Score: 1

    Some Air Force bases/squadrons have a 9/80 schedule. Probably the most well known is at Keesler AFB, MS. There, most everyone except the students and instructors for enlisted training participate and it works well. Lots of people comment on how much they enjoy(ed) the schedule. Some senior enlisted and officers will work on Fridays "because they want to" i.e., I have too much to do / mismanage my time. I think that schedule can be very useful for keeping morale high, giving people more time with their families, etc. One thing you have to watch for: The very last hour of the day. Will productivity go down in that last hour each day because people are tired? Will you actually waste man-hours by piling them up on 9 days? Good luck.

  101. 9/80 is great! by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

    I work 9/80 and its great. But, it really ends up being more like 7-8 hours a day, sometimes 9, but, 80 hours on a paycheck and Friday off.

    Also, all of you are paying for my paycheck.

  102. Flex work plan by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

    I have worked (while in the military) with a flexible work week. We were required to put in 80 hours in a 2 week period. We had core hours that we were required to be in the office. Basically we had to be in the office between the hours of 8 and 3 Tues - Thurs. All meetings, appt's etc were made during those hours. We did have to work out a schedule that insured we had minimum manning in the office during normal business hours (8-5 Mon - Fri). Otherwise we just had to put in the additional hours when we wanted. I loved it. I could come in before anyone else showed up and get a lot of work done without any of those pesky customers bugging me.

  103. Not bad by leabre · · Score: 1

    My wife works this kind of schedule, she's an IT manager type. Her company respects the days off, it is a company perk for those who choose. More importantly, it helps her to wind down in an otherwise stressful position. She's happy, I'm happy.

  104. It could be much worse... by SETIGuy · · Score: 1

    ISTR that in the South Korean economic collapse in the early part of this decade (or was it the late 90s) the South Korean government mandated that alternate Saturdays were to be added to the work week. I don't think that extra pay was included.

    Let's hope that the U.S. government doesn't pick up on that one.

  105. Pah. Lightweights. by lindseyp · · Score: 1

    I work 5/60, and for the last 6 months it's been mostly 5/80.

    I don't work weekends, but I sure as hell need them.

    --/Banking, why thanks for asking.

    --
    j'ai découvert une démonstration vraiment admirable (de ce théorème général) que cette si
  106. 9-80s suck by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

    9-80s suck. It's a bogus excuse to confuse your schedule until management thinks they can make you work any time they feel like it. Generally done by 'international' companies in the hope that you can somehow teleconference with people half way across the world despite a 12 hour time difference.

  107. Free overtime? by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

    Why would you give your employer free overtime? Any work beyond 8 hours should be paid at time and a half. Anything less is shafting yourself out of pay.

  108. Heh by tsotha · · Score: 1

    You guys are approaching this totally wrong. When we had 9/80 at my work the people who opted for the alternate schedule pretty much put in eight hour days and took every other Friday off. Of course, eventually they decided everyone had to come in every day...

  109. I do it by tezbobobo · · Score: 1

    I and the staff in my department do it. I work for RealEstateWA (realestatewa.com.au). Because a lot of the info for Real Estate Agents comes in late in the week (Home open times and such) the work is highly compressed, requiring late Tuesdays, Wednesday and often Thursdays (when we publish). To compensate, every second Friday is off for some staff. With a relatively empty office on Tuesdays, I can do a lot of the IT work - updates and such. It is a brilliant way to work and I look forward to the day when the boss realises how good it is for the business - that we are not simply bumminig around during that time.

  110. getting personal things done by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

    the small software business (11-16 employees) lives in a large house with a kitchen used by a cook each day to prepare meals. there's a bed room, a den with vcr & disney movies for the kids. staff brings their dogs to work. oh, and using the computers for personal business is ENCOURAGED.

    which is to say, make life easier for employees -- no need to hop in the car to forage or run errands, there's more time to eat healthily, not having to run around leaves more energy available for work, less stress affecting work.

    working longer days is harder, and the extra day off every two weeks could be disruptive. the changeover to 9/80 will no doubt add to the stresses of the business and the people who operate it.

    great call, right to the heart: questioning ability to get personal business done during the workweek.

  111. A Doctor's Life could only dream of being so good by Physician · · Score: 1

    Sounds like you have a pretty sweet job there. Medical residents work 80 hours in 1 week. They have to do their bosses' every whim because if they don't they'll be let go and be stuck with a huge medical school bill that they would never be able to pay off.

    --
    Does God treat us as servants or friends? Check my homepage.
  112. IAAL... by caitsith01 · · Score: 1

    ...and I'm still grappling with this concept of work days that have predefined start and finish times.

    Sounds like paradise!

    --
    Read Pynchon.
  113. Re:I'd hate that commute. And... by yabos · · Score: 1

    Amen. Any job where I have to consistently work 9 days straight I'd be quitting within a few weeks. I already have enough to do in the evenings after work and the company isn't going to take that away from me. Even 3 day weekends aren't worth it.

  114. moot point by EdelFactor19 · · Score: 1

    Apparently you hadn't noticed, this whole conversation is primarily applicable to salaried workers, not hourly employees. That extends well beyond just Software Developers and Managers.

    I don't think that's a state thing either; I'm not 100% sure but are there any states that doesn't require overtime pay beyond 40 hours for non-exempt employees?

    --
    "Jazz isn't dead, it just smells funny" ~Frank Zappa
    EdelFactor
    1. Re:moot point by Bill+Dimm · · Score: 1

      Apparently you hadn't noticed, this whole conversation is primarily applicable to salaried workers, not hourly employees.

      In Pennsylvania, salaried vs. hourly has no impact (as far as I know - IANAL) on obligation to pay overtime. In fact, you'll find mentions of minimum salary here, which implies that salaried employees below the minimum are not exempt from overtime pay.

      I don't think that's a state thing either; I'm not 100% sure but are there any states that doesn't require overtime pay beyond 40 hours for non-exempt employees?

      Even if all states require overtime pay beyond 40 hours, that doesn't mean that they all have the same rules about pushing hours from one week to another.

    2. Re:moot point by mabhatter654 · · Score: 1

      correct, I do remember something in Michigan or at the Fed level about just that. To allow such alternative work structures they wanted to redefine overtime as 80 hours in 14 days rather than 40 hours in 7 days. I don't remember if it went thru or not. The alternative is where it ends up slightly shorter than 80 hours to keep the pay the same.. you get 45 hours one week and 32 the next and the difference is the OT pay from the 5 hours before equaling a regular 80 hour pay.

  115. I've had this at two jobs by jitterman · · Score: 1

    I was at my first employer for ten years; seven of those (the "middle" seven) went 9/80, and they not only respected our Fridays off, they also didn't actually enforce the full 80 hours. We weren't penalized for holidays either; if one fell on our natural Friday off, we were given an "extra" day during that holiday.

    Though my current employer isn't as generous with keeping an eye on (or off, I guess) the 80-hour clock, they're still very fair about everything and respect the long weekends. It's really nice to be back on this schedule after over a year without it. I can go to my kid's school, watch a movie, run errands, sleep late, pretty much whatever. There are no drawbacks for my lifestyle (naturally, YMMV).

    --
    For conscience is the wound, and there's naught to staunch it
  116. hidden benefit of 4 tens by fishdan · · Score: 1

    I've been working 4 10s for seven years, and I can pick which day of the week I'm off. Sometimes I'll put a friday and monday back to back for a 4 day weekend. As a result I get to save my vacation and sick days for when I want to use them, instead of when I have to. 3 years in a row I've ended up cashing in a week of vacation time every year.

    --
    Nothing great was ever achieved without enthusiasm
  117. I hated it by HangingChad · · Score: 2, Interesting

    I worked a 9/80 schedule for years and grew to hate it. If you've got any kind of a commute that turns a 9 hour day into an 11 hour day. Days seemed interminable. All those extra hours for two days off a month. And the three days fly by because you tend to pack everything into your day off. Car maintenance, doctor visits, any errands.

    A new company got the contract and didn't include the flex schedule and we went back to 8 hour days. It was like a vacation every day. 8 hours was a breeze.

    Better than any flex schedule was finding a job I could telecommute part of the week. Now that's a luxury. Work is exactly the same but the stress is way lower. You don't realize how much time you spend getting ready and getting to work. No jarring alarm clocks, no traffic. I'm probably going to jinx it saying this, but since I started the telecommute schedule I haven't been really sick once. The difference is really quite amazing.

    --
    That's our life, the big wheel of shit. - The Fat Man, Blue Tango Salvage
    1. Re:I hated it by bnenning · · Score: 1

      Commuting sucks. Happiness studies have shown that having a short commute is one of the best things you can do for yourself.

      --
      How to solve most of our problems: 1.Lots of nuclear plants. 2.Cure aging.
    2. Re:I hated it by Cro+Magnon · · Score: 1

      11 hour days (9 + lunch + commute) suck, but if I didn't have that extra day to handle car repair, house repair, etc, I'd have to take off work to handle it. I don't know how the people who work 5 days every week handle it.

      --
      Slow down, cowboy! It has been 4 hours since you last posted. You must wait another few hours.
  118. Compressed weeks by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

    I have an arrangement with my employer where I work 2 normal days, and then 2 11.5 hour days, and have every Friday off. Admittedly the 2 11.5 days are hard, but they are always the most productive, esp from about 4pm on (he says posting on /. at 4pm!)

    I find it works really well.

  119. 4 10's per week by pilotlicense · · Score: 0

    I work 4 10's, with every Friday off. I couldn't imagine it any other way. (unless I worked like 3 12's)

  120. Day off by SoundGuyNoise · · Score: 1

    The only benefit I can see of this, is that I can actually be home during the 8 hour window the cable company gives for appointments.

    --
    You never expect irony, do you?
    Want to be a professional wrestler? Visit www.iyfwrestling.com
    @iyfwrestling
  121. Works great by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

    if you are used to working 10/100.

  122. Even If False... by maz2331 · · Score: 1

    >The idea that at a certain point, the govt takes most of your earnings in taxes is an urban legend.
    For anybody working by the hour, there is no "tipping point" where the govt keeps most of each additional dollar - it is just untrue.

    Even if it's not true, I'd rather work just enough to get by than make more and lose any of the gain. Hell, I'd work for free before going over a threshold where the rate increased.

       

  123. RE: 9/80 by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

    I work on a 9/80 schedule and love it. Having a 3 day weekend every other week is really nice and lets me do errands and go to the doctor or other tasks and not take away from work (OR go on a 3 day vacation - which is what I do most).

  124. Federal Reserve Bank by pookguy · · Score: 1

    I work for the FED of NY. We have to work a 35 hour week, so I did 3 days a week at 12 hours a day. Had a 4 day weekend every week. Very Nice. It was the night shift.
    Now I work 9/70. Get every other friday off. Most of time I get a nice 4 day weekend.

  125. Did it; liked it by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

    I worked for Loral Defense Systems - Akron, about 13 years ago.

    It was implemented there, and it was greatly loved by my coworkers.

    I wish I had that option now.

  126. I love it - look out for holidays and vacation tho by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

    I've been on 9/80 for about 2 years, straight from college. It seems like the company has been on it forever, so the management essentially respects it and the employees decide what they want to do with their Friday off-time.

    Basically employees get to choose every other Monday or Friday off. I should note that my company starts you off at 2 weeks of vacation (80 hours) and adds an extra week every 5 years, which (from my understanding) is not that much to begin with. Additionally, employees on the 9/80 have 8 holidays, while employees on the 5/40 have 9 holidays.

    It's definitely harder to do personal things... what do you expect, you have less time after work! Although my boss is flexible enough to let me come in early and leave by 3pm to handle things. I love my off-days. Extended trips, vacations, going out Thursday nights (I live in a college town). It will be weird if I ever return to a 5/40 schedule.

    I think many of your questions will probably depend on your boss/company philosophy... and it's hard for me to visualize this at a tech company.

    Good luck

  127. Slackers! by Scubaraf · · Score: 1

    Sounds great! Seeing as how I work in an industry where we are capped at 80 hours in 6 days (we get one day off per week) averaged over a 4 week period, this seems awesome. At least we cap our maximum shift length at 30 hours, because otherwise, that would suck!

    Luckily, I don't do anything critical - I just take care of you if you happen to come to my hospital.

  128. 9/80 by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

    80hrs in 9 days, That would be great!!!! I have a 7/90 now....

  129. Agreed. by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

    I am purposefully staying out of the CS/IT workforce *exactly* because of these issues (well, and because I can afford to after working).

    Started with a worldwide paternal company that had summer hours ( in at 7, out at 3:30pm) and a christmas bonus of up to 5% over a decade, up to 5 weeks of vacation + personal days. Those days are gone because of wall street.

    People in the US, collectively, are -dumb-; all I heard growing up is how great people were doing by the amount of overtime they could work. Well, they are/were boring/bored to want to work that much. They sent a message that it was acceptable.
     

  130. WTF?? by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

    I work with a totally flexible schedule... but I've earned it. 9/80 or 9 to 5... doesn't matter. I work when the company needs me... period. They cut my paycheck.
    End result: I call my own hours 99% of the time. It took some time (months) to earn it (many 70+ hour weeks for catching the system up), but well worth it. Pride is a factor, but relaxing with knowledge (theirs and mine) it is working is much better.

  131. Source? by Feynman · · Score: 3, Informative

    the countries that have higher productivity per worker than the US.

    According to a U.N. report released in 2007, only Norway had higher productivity per hour worked than the U.S.

    1. Re:Source? by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      Gah! Yet again, the Norse have bested us!

    2. Re:Source? by dapendragon · · Score: 1

      And it just so happens that in Norway most people have a standard 37,5 hour work week. :)

    3. Re:Source? by JohnnyBGod · · Score: 1

      Is it per hour worked, or per hour _billed_? 'Cause there's a difference, unfortunately.

  132. Re:I love it - look out for holidays and vacation by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

    Also I second the Friday off/mixed with holiday thing. During Thanksgiving/Christmas it's fantastic: I had two 5 day weekends this past year, Nov. 25-29 and Dec. 23-27.

  133. Wow, not sure by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

    I have worked 4/10's I have worked for wally world where they are uber strict on hours and over time and I have worked some construction jobs where it has been anythign from a 2 day week with 3 hours each to a 7 day week 14+ hours each.

    I can only assume you mean 9 days on totaling 80 hours with the 5 remaining days off. That would be a little weird but by no means hard. If it as my wife suggested then it is 9 days spread over two weeks working 80 hours total _AND_ you are worried about being over worked then sir, I welcome you to the work force and tell you this as my first boss told me. It is feast or famine and when its famine you work like your feasting on it.

  134. 9/80 is a joke (for employers) by JVH · · Score: 1

    9/80 is a joke (for employers). It just means that the worker drones can come in 1/2 hour erly and drink more coffee and stay 1/2 hour later - essentially wasting that extra day's worth of time. This from one who cannot enjoy the benefits of 9/80. More like 5/10's.

  135. Must be nice by jsimon12 · · Score: 1

    I am currently working a 7/60. Where I "squeeze" 60 or so hours of work into 7 days and then do it again the next week.

  136. I'd rather have a 3/24 schedule by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

    Three days on, two days off. That would be awesome.

    Now I just need to find a company doing that.

  137. pish posh by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

    I worked 6/70 (only Wednesdays off) for 9 months. It's good because it forces fiscal responsibility. With no time off spent doing anything but sleeping, you can't help but save everything you make.

  138. 4 10's by swjpilot · · Score: 1

    We work 4 10 hour days and alternate Friday off one week and Monday off the next. This way we get a 4 day weekend every other weekend.....Works out great!

    Home is where you have your @

  139. Another way for the privileged to screw off by earlymon · · Score: 1

    That's my experience with 9/80 in a nutshell - the privileged screw-offs (every job has them) get to do it some more.

    Want to see where they'll put that 9th hour? At the end of the day? Oh, noes - traffic is too bad, I just remembered my babysitter, and I came in early. At the beginning of the day, as some of them claim? Oh, yes, absolutely - then watch them explain how they decided to park farthest from the door coming in at oh-dark-thirty - as if.

    And don't expect 5/4/5/4 cycle of days. It'll be 5/4/4/5/4/5/4 - it's an easy system to double-dip. Forget Mondays being a jumping off for where everyone left off last week, and forget Friday having any relevance as a group-cohesive stopping point.

    And forget getting a full 8, much less 9, out of those you're counting on when middle mgmt is exercising their off Friday.

    What I did? Stayed on 10/80 and watched jaws drop when I started leaving after an 8 hour day.

    Fuck 'em.

    --
    Pathological kinda promises Path + Logical - but instead, you get stuck with pathetic.
  140. Toilet Paper Survey by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 5, Interesting

    From a non-scientific poll we conducted as undergraduates, we found some interesting results:

    All of the science and engineering students we asked said the next sheet should go over. All of them. (About 14 people.)

    The art students' inclination (8 of 12 people) was to put it under, with the other four simply saying "whichever way it ends up - I don't even look."

    1. Re:Toilet Paper Survey by gknoy · · Score: 1

      I've always found it easier to get the paper at home when it is in the "over" orientation. I'll switch it if it's the other way.

      On the other hand, the first time my son (11 months) was in the bathroom, and playing with the toilet paper, he LOVED to spin the roll. When I swapped it to an "under" orientation, it didn't unroll as he played with it. Unfortunately, the next time he played iwth it, he figured out how to get it to unroll no matter which way I placed it, so it's back to the preferred method. ;)

      When at a more public restroom, where there are dispensers with multiple stacked rolls, I actually find "under" to be easier: getting the starting piece is often easier, as the upper roll almost invariably has fallen on top of the one you're using. Using an "under" alignment, you can roll the roll backwards, and have a usable flap come out the top... whereas with the "over" alignment, the grabbable portion (when back-rolling to find the end) is smaller or harder to grab. ... after writing this, I feel like I've spent too much time thinking about this. ;)

    2. Re:Toilet Paper Survey by Void_Ptr · · Score: 1

      I would refer you to this previous Slashdot poll:

      http://slashdot.org/pollBooth.pl?qid=443&aid=-1

      --
      Friends help you move
      Good friends help you move Bodies
    3. Re:Toilet Paper Survey by jae471 · · Score: 1

      Depends on where the roll sits in relation to the toilet. If the roll is fairly high above the toilet (say chair-rail height), then under. But it the roll sits low (about mid-thigh level), then over.

    4. Re:Toilet Paper Survey by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      The answer is simple if you have children.

      Hypothetical situation: You are a child, bent on chaos and destruction as all children are. When you spin the roll rapidly, which direction are you spinning it? That's right, from top to bottom. It is much easier to swing your hand downward than upward.

      What is the result of this spinning action, if the sheet is over? What about the other way? Which result is preferable? I'll leave that as an exercise.

  141. wow by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

    I work a 12x10 every two weeks (120 hours) but get paid for 80 hours! (exempt)

    you're in the clear, go with it! god bless ya!

    I cherish the weekends, but saturday and sunday still don't give me enough time to keep it real...

  142. 9/80 is nothing by techsoldaten · · Score: 1

    Been on a 5/80 work schedule for years.

    Turning 35 into the new 80.

    M

  143. 4 Ten hour days works better by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

    I have been on the 4-10s a week and prefer it. The two extra hours a day is worth the 3 day weekends. Plus it makes overtime worthwhile (10 hours) if someone calls in sick as well.

    1. Re:4 Ten hour days works better by bigdan43 · · Score: 1

      I used to do this when working in an internet call center. It worked very well for me at the time but the only downfall was that the shifts were irregular so my weekends weren't always fri-sat-sun

  144. Re:I'd hate that commute. And... by YrWrstNtmr · · Score: 2, Informative

    You two are completely missing the schedule. Not 8-9 days straight, but rather:
    Mon-Thurs 9 hrs a day, Friday 8 hrs. Sat, Sun off. Next week Mon-Thurs 9 hrs a day. Fri, Sat, Sun off. 80 hours within 2 weeks, rather than 40 hours in 1 week.
    A 3 day weekend twice a month. Sometimes a 4 day weekend when it coincides with a federal holiday.

    It works well.

  145. Nothing New by qw(name) · · Score: 1

    My company's been doing this for years and it works just fine (Fortune 500 company with 86k employees). And all these people who say that it will just increase goofing off and laziness don't know what they're talking about. Those who will be lazy and work the system will do so no matter what the work schedule. But for those of us who actually put in the required time really appreciate having a 3 day weekend every other week.

  146. 9/80 is awesome by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

    I've worked a 9/80 schedule for the last 5 years or so, and I can't imagine going back to 5 days a week, every week. I barely notice the extra hour per day. As several people above have mentioned, the extra Friday off every other week is extremely noticeable and helpful. I sleep in, get errands done, do homework (since kids are in school), play video games...whatever I want/need to do.

    Management at my company is typically very supportive, as most of them participate in the 9/80, too. It's optional but most employees and contractors at my company do it if they can (some can't due to various job duties, etc.). The only time I've ever worked on my Fridays off is when we're really behind or when a major project is about to go live, and even then it's never been mandatory. Plus I get overtime! If I do work my Friday off, I typically go in late (whenever I get around to it) and leave early.

    Since so many people where I work do the 9/80, Fridays are usually very quiet and let me catch up on things and get lots done. And since our company has been doing it for years and years, everyone understands that if something isn't done by Thursday, they'll have to wait til Monday. No one schedules meetings on Fridays, either!

  147. 12/24 by Eil · · Score: 2, Interesting

    This doesn't answer the poster's question in the least (hey, this is Slashdot after all), but the wackiest schedule I ever worked was when I was deployed to Turkey in the military for 2 weeks.

    There were only three of us to cover one around-the-clock job: a staff sergeant, another airman, and me. The sergeant made it so that both he and the other airman worked two consecutive 12-hour shifts and then had a full day off. The only way you can do that, though, is to make the third guy pull a 12-hour shift with the next 24 hours off with no "break" in the schedule. Think about it: 12 then 24. My work shift (and hence my off-hours) were completely inverted each cycle.

    I was definitely pissed about it at first. But it's the military, who am I going to complain to? I went along with it, consoling myself that it was only for two weeks. But man, I gotta tell you, I got used to it in just a few days. You would think that it would be impossible to get used to a schedule where one day you're going to sleep at 6AM and the next day at 6PM, but it worked fine for me because it meant that I got to sleep for 8 hours straight and then wander the base (or do whatever) for another 8. It was because of this schedule that I got to get off base for awhile and go on some tours of the country.

    I could almost do that schedule again over here since my sysadmin job doesn't tie me to any specific hours, but my wife would never agree to it. The biggest downfall is that I'd never get a "real" weekend without using up vacation time.

    1. Re:12/24 by m50d · · Score: 1

      Uh... apologies if I'm being stupid here, but why didn't you just make it three eight hour shifts, early/day/night (one of you 2-10am, one of you 10am-6pm, one of you 6pm-2am or some such) like factory workers?

      --
      I am trolling
    2. Re:12/24 by BigGar' · · Score: 1

      Sounds like the sergeant and the other airman were buddies and that's what they wanted the schedule to look like for them and to heck with what happens to the third guy.

      --


      Shop smart, Shop S-Mart.
    3. Re:12/24 by m50d · · Score: 1

      So they *wanted* to have to do the 12/24 schedule? Because that seems to be the only way that could happen.

      --
      I am trolling
    4. Re:12/24 by Eil · · Score: 1

      Uh... apologies if I'm being stupid here, but why didn't you just make it three eight hour shifts, early/day/night (one of you 2-10am, one of you 10am-6pm, one of you 6pm-2am or some such) like factory workers?

      Because I wasn't the one who picked the schedule. It was the guy who outranked me and was technically therefore my boss.

  148. they are very nice by busdude · · Score: 1

    They are very common at the state of washington. Its nice having the friday off to go run errands, make appts, and do everything else you cant do on a 9-5. I rarely if ever got called in on my friday off to cover, sometimes i'd switch a friday off for one reason or another though.

  149. Four 10's is so much better. by Je-Tze · · Score: 0

    Why fuck around with half-assed shit like that when you could just do four 10-hour shifts per week, and get THREE DAYS OFF every week?!

    --
    jz (Je-Tze)
  150. Done it twice and loved it by mardigras · · Score: 1

    I've worked a 9/80 schedule at two different jobs. We were encouraged to schedule personal stuff on Fridays, such as Doctors appointments. The three day weekends were like having a mental health day every other week. And perhaps best, Fridays were declared no meeting days at both employers. The Fridays at the office were quiet, pleasantly productive days.

  151. 2-2-3 Schedule by technix4beos · · Score: 1

    I currently work for an ISP where our shifts are split into 4 12hour portions across 2 alternating weeks.

    Week 1 is: 2 days on, 2 days off, 3 days on.
    Week 2 is: 2 days off, 2 days on, 3 days off.

    Shifts go from 11am - 11pm (Day NOC), and 11pm - 11am (Night NOC).

    So on average you do end up working 42 hours per week but you get every second weekend off, and you only work at most 3 days in a row, with at least 2 days off bracketing that.

    It works fairly well for day noc's, but if you're not used to shift work, working nights can be killer.

    Wondering if anyone has ever heard of this style of split-week schedule before?

    --
    user@host$ diff /dev/urandom /dev/uspto
  152. 4x10s work for us by legLess · · Score: 2, Interesting

    I've worked four ten-hour days at several companies, and I love it. Recently I had a little boy, and with his sleep schedule I found it really hard to spend enough time with him after work, so I'm back to five eight-hour days. It feels like cheating, going home every day at 4pm. Until Friday morning :)

    Four other folks at our company work 4x10, including the CEO, and it works just fine. Friday is fucking sacrosanct: no emails, no phone calls, no contact of any kind. If a fire flares up, other people in the office deal with it.

    And when I say 4x10, I mean it. We track our time pretty religiously, and our most bust-ass employee has averaged about 42 hours a week over 18 months.

    And yes, we're a tech company :) Live in Portland? Want to move here? We're hiring.

    --
    This isn't as much "normalization" as it is "don't take so many drugs when you're designing tables."
  153. My company does this by sonciwind · · Score: 1

    There are 4 different schedules. 2 Fridays, and 2 Mondays. Nobody in my group does the Monday off schedule. Then the Friday off schedule is split about 50/50 so on Fridays, half the staff is there. Everyone seems to adapt well to it and they get a 3 day weekend every other week. It also works very nicely to extend holiday periods because people will shift that day off. Like if that Friday is actually a holiday, they get the Thursday as the 9/80 day. I think after a little while 9 hours seems like 8, as you see many people already work 10 regularly. I personally decline the 9/80s, though. Probably need to try it out.

  154. I loved the 9/80 work schedule by rwuest · · Score: 1

    I had a job with this kind of schedule. Loved it. Working an extra hour a day is no big deal. I didn't really notice it in my off-work personal life. If you're salaried, you probably already do that quite often, anyways. My boss always respected it (even if he didn't like it). We were an R&D engineering group, so if no one came in to work (thus potentially creating a crisis), there wasn't any reason anyone ever got pulled in on their off Fridays.

    In the winter, every other Friday was Ski-Friday and in the summer, every other Friday was camp-Friday. Beat the crowds both ways.

    I did work with one guy who didn't like being around his family and wanted to go back to the 10/80 schedule.

  155. It's called H1-B trickle down by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

    Gotta wuv doz publicans

  156. it might work... by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

    It might work in this case, everyone takes every other Friday off. Everyone comes in at the same time, takes the same lunch break, leaves at the same time.

    At my government job, the boss allows employees to pick what day they want off. Some pick Monday, some pick Friday, some pick Wednesday, etc. As confusing as that is (is Rhonda here today or is it her day off?) my boss allows people to work flex hours. Employees' work days starts anytime between ~4 and ~9 in the morning, meaning people are calling it a day at 3, 4, 5PM and so on. It creates a scenario you would expect from the government, high inefficiency.

  157. 100 hours?! Luxury!! by Arthur+Grumbine · · Score: 5, Informative

    Why, back in our day we would wake at quarter-to-ten, half-an-hour before we went to sleep, then we'd pay $10 to go work in the mines for 28 hours a day, 373 days a year, double-time on holidays. And we considered ourselves lucky!!

    --
    Now that I think about it, I'm pretty sure everything I just said is completely wrong.
    1. Re:100 hours?! Luxury!! by ross.w · · Score: 3, Funny

      You tell the young people today that, and they'll never believe you.

      --
      If my call is important, why am I talking to a recording?
    2. Re:100 hours?! Luxury!! by MMC+Monster · · Score: 1

      Damn time travelers.

      --
      Help! I'm a slashdot refugee.
    3. Re:100 hours?! Luxury!! by Fluffy+Bunnies · · Score: 5, Funny

      Getting modded informative was way funnier than the joke.

    4. Re:100 hours?! Luxury!! by MarkGriz · · Score: 1

      Why, back in our day we would wake at quarter-to-ten, half-an-hour before we went to sleep, then we'd pay $10 to go work in the mines for 28 hours a day, 373 days a year, double-time on holidays. And we considered ourselves lucky!!

      You had it easy. When we worked in the mines, we didn't have any fancy "elevators". We had to climb down, both ways!

      --
      Beauty is in the eye of the beerholder.
    5. Re:100 hours?! Luxury!! by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      I never knew climbing down was the hard part. I always though climbing up was.

    6. Re:100 hours?! Luxury!! by nordee · · Score: 0

      This one getting modded informative was way funnier than the second joke.

      --
      still no sig
    7. Re:100 hours?! Luxury!! by Endo13 · · Score: 1

      The one where I worked, the climbing was the good part. The bad part was at the bottom, where all the skeletons were. Well, the fresh ones weren't skeletons, but they would be eventually.

      --
      There is no -1 Disagree mod. Slashdot.org/faq defines mod options. USE IT.
  158. on call 24/7.. literally by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

    I normally work about 45-50 hours a week, however once every 5-6 weeks I get a pager that I have to carry around 24/7 for that week. I could get paged at any time and have to respond to any number of pages. Last night I had 5 pages alone and they started again before work in the morning.. let me remind you I am still expected to be at work on time. I for one think this is bullshit, but apparently the company thinks it's okay to only pay me under 100$ stipends for that week of on call time and say, "Well at least you get good benifits, right?" I call it slavery.

  159. Old stuff by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

    I started doing this in the early 90's. Things seem much more flexible now. Basically, I just have to get in 40+ hours a week no matter the hours I choose. The only condition is that I still have to make all meetings and be able to talk meet with others on the team when needed.

  160. salary by Joe+the+Lesser · · Score: 2, Insightful

    isn't for suckers, theoretically... It's supposed to mean you work whatever damn hours you like and they judge the result, not your exact attendance.

    I know things rarely work that way though.

    --
    "I only speak the truth"
    Karma: null(Mostly affected by an unassigned variable)
    1. Re:salary by geminidomino · · Score: 1

      Indeed... these days it means

      "We don't have to make you work overtime, but can still dock you for missing work."

    2. Re:salary by geminidomino · · Score: 1

      Err.... correction. Dropped a few words.

      "We don't have to pay you when we make you work overtime..."

  161. No good unless they're committed for a while by dpbsmith · · Score: 1

    My company tried it. For about a year it didn't do us that much good because my wife, who worked at a different company, still had to work Fridays.

    She called in some favors with coworkers and used some of her stock of goodwill with the boss, got her schedule somewhat reshuffled, we got other things arranged to take advantage of having Fridays free, and just as we were starting to like it... ...my company decided it wasn't working for them and went back to a conventional schedule.

    Infuriating. If they'd stuck to the 9/80 schedule it would have been pretty nice, but staying on it for a year-and-half and then dropping it was nothing but a royal nuisance.

  162. oblig office space by Joe+the+Lesser · · Score: 1

    Yeah, I just stare at my desk; but it looks like I'm working. I do that for probably another hour after lunch, too. I'd say in a given week I probably only do about fifteen minutes of real, actual, work.

    --
    "I only speak the truth"
    Karma: null(Mostly affected by an unassigned variable)
  163. What's so magic about 40 hours? by Anonymous+Brave+Guy · · Score: 2, Insightful

    It's interesting that everyone is implicitly assuming that keeping a 40-hour work week makes sense when it's divided into a different number of days. This almost certainly isn't true, because people's productivity drops after a certain amount of time at work in a single shift. Companies like Ford did a lot of research into this a long time ago, which is why we all work 40-hour weeks now. (Of course, these days, managers who naively assume that extra hours = extra work getting done have pushed it to 40 hours plus breaks, when it often used to be 40 hours including breaks, hence the expression "9–5".) And Ford's people were doing manual work, not jobs that depend primarily on thinking, where the number of productive hours per week, averaged over the long term, is lower for most people.

    I think it's both sad and quite telling that no-one seems to be considering that those extra few hours might not really be worth anything anyway, but employees who get an extra day off every couple of weeks are likely to be both better rested/more productive while at work and more loyal to the company. Businesses that have tried radically different working practices have sometimes seen counter-intuitive results, particularly when it came to working much lower hours. I'd like to see a company suck it up and have all their employees working only 9/10 Monday-Fridays over a two-week period without expecting them to turn up for an extra hour on most of those days, and see whether it made things more or less productive.

    --
    If you disagree, post your argument. (-1, Overrated) isn't your personal censorship tool for views you don't like.
  164. Rather nice with a catch... by Jaazaniah · · Score: 1

    My wife works at a company with that implemented, and it works out relatively well except for going in early (45 minute commute). We're done dinner by 6:30 most days, she misses most of the bulk of traffic by about 20 minutes in the evening, and the off Fridays are great for getting in extra errands to places that maintain similar hours to when we work, like our banks.

    The downside is she gets up at 5:15 every morning and gets into work at about 6:45, to leave around 4 and miss traffic. But she's gotten used to it now and enjoys the Fridays off.

  165. Results-Only Work Environment by Singularitarian2048 · · Score: 1

    Does anyone here work at Best Buy (corporate)? The Results-Only Work Environment they have implemented sounds ideal.

  166. short holidays by maken · · Score: 1

    The 9/80 isnt too bad, I really like 3 day weekends. the worst part is the middle of winter when youre arriving and leaving in the dark. also make sure your company changes the holidays to 9 hrs, my company screwed us that way 8hr holidays so if you want the full paycheck you have to use a vacation hr to make the difference :(

  167. I thought that you were working 80 hrs. a week by oktokie · · Score: 0

    I serious thought that your company was planning to over haul a new meaning to work hours by giving you 80 hrs. a week work. I think my work is getting pretty close there without any announcement. =(

  168. 8 nines + 8 by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

    I take every other Monday off, but most of my coworkers take every other Friday off. Working Friday at a nearly empty office is great because I actually get a lot of work done without interruption. Plus, I often miss the latest post weekend "crisis" and time wasting meetings that accompany the usual Monday schedule. Although, I was wrong about the convenience of running errands during this extra day off. I am still surprised to find so many local businesses closed on Mondays. My employer is quite flexible with comp time and sometimes overtime (budget permitting) if I have to work or travel on my normal day off. Sidenote, a coworker chose Wednesday as his day off. He also had enough vacation saved up to take off the other Wednesday. At most he worked 2 days in a row for nearly a year until management finally realized this schedule wasn't very productive.

  169. used to work an 8/80 schedule by Pfhreakaz0id · · Score: 1

    at a newspaper. I loved it. Worked wed-sat and had sunday, monday and tuesday off. 10 hour shifts.

    It was the only really good thing about that job. :)

  170. they always found a reason to make you work anyway by Uzik2 · · Score: 1

    there was always an emergency that required I come in on my day off.
    I was supposed to get comp time but that got forgotten about too...
    YMMV

    --
    -- Programming with boost is like building a house with lego. It's a cool but I wouldn't want to live in it
  171. Re: Don't forget AMT by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

    You have to figure that twice for the alternative minimum tax where deductions you might otherwise have taken are pulled out. It may still not have any points where you actually lose money by making more income but it comes a lot closer than the simple tables imply.

  172. Bad economy joke by binaryseraph · · Score: 0

    Work was so last year.

  173. arghhh by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

    Heads up to anyone in the medical field wandering across this post - stop reading right now before the urge to hit something or someone becomes unstoppable.

  174. This sounds nice... by GiMP · · Score: 1

    Compared to the 10/90 (5/45) schedule, 9/80 sounds pretty good! Basically, I'd get days off? Nice. When I was employed, this is the sort of schedule I'd run, if I was so lucky, whenever I didn't have an emergency keeping me at work overnight. Overtime? No chance. On rare occasions I might have gotten a bonus.

    The torture of the long hours and the long commute is why I took a big pay cut and started my own business.

  175. 9/80 is great by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

    I work for a large company (7000 employees) that has been offering optional 9/80 for years. I have never heard anyone complain about it, although participation is entirely optional, and most people really enjoy the extra day off. The Friday off is treated the same as a Saturday as far as getting called in goes, it is very rare that people get called in. It helps if you get on the same Friday off as your boss (so he/she is less likely to be there).

  176. Good if you have flexibility by Undead+Waffle · · Score: 1

    I love 9/80, but it really works best if you can work flexible hours. That way if you have to leave early some other day you can make it up on the off Friday. And since it's a 2 week period I can work a little extra every day and leave an hour or 2 early the other Friday. Many people also take vacation on weeks with a holiday on Monday and a Friday off. 3 days of vacation for a whole week off.

    I've heard of 8/80 failing because 10 hours is just too much for one day. I've also heard of companies going to 9/80, but people scheduling meetings on the off Friday and if you have to be at the meeting you have to come in. It only works if it's a general company policy not to schedule anything on the off Friday unless absolutely necessary.

    The only downside I've experienced with 9/80 is if you like to take long lunches or leave to do something in the middle of the day it could suck. This is where the flexibility comes in handy for making up time.

  177. Awesome! by Super+Jamie · · Score: 1

    I've worked with people who did 4/40 work schedules, and said it was great.

    I'm a big personal fan of the 4-day working week. An extra hour every day for an entire day off? I'd love the 9/80 option at my workplace!

    1. Re:Awesome! by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      I would love to do a 4/40 or even 4/55 or so ... but, my company would never go for it :(

  178. benefits by WhoCantTakeAJoke · · Score: 1

    Yeah, so you labor those 55 hours a week working hand-in-hand with idiot consultants earning twice as much money as you; all the while trying to meet that arbitrary deadline. So, what? You know that the Thank You email and the $10 bag of candy bars makes it totally worthwhile.

    Honestly, *krinkle* those consultants *crunch* are so *chew,chew,chew* stupid.

    --
    I have no direct experience or knowledge, but I'd imagine...
  179. Anonymous Coward by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

    My company works us on a 168/0 system.

    Yes, that's 168 hours per week at work, the rest you get to sleep.

    Ah crap, I just realized I'm working for less than minimum wage. I'll have to remember that in 18 months when it's time to negotiate a new contract!

  180. Re:first by Hal_Porter · · Score: 1

    This is your brain on a 7/100 work week.

    --
    echo -e 'global _start\n _start:\n mov eax, 2\n int 80h\n jmp _start' > a.asm; nasm a.asm -f elf; ld a.o -o a;
  181. It is working ok for me... by Just+Brew+It! · · Score: 1

    ...but it pisses my wife off because I'm always late for dinner. On the whole, I'd say it's a (slight) plus because I spend a couple of hours a month less on commuting, which saves time, gas, and money.

    Yes, I've occasionally been called in on the "off" Friday, but it has not happened often enough to really piss me off (yet).

    The comical aspect is our time reporting system. Since we do a lot of government contract work, we have to keep detailed time records. Furthermore, the time reporting system they've set up requires that we report at least 40 hours per *week* (including holiday/sick/vacation time). The way they've dealt with this is by decreeing that the end of the work week occurs at noon on Friday; so Friday afternoon of the "on" week has to be reported in the following week's time record. Explaining this to new employees is fun! :D

  182. Recent fad, actually by Capt.+Skinny · · Score: 1

    Agreed. Actually, lots of state agencies (in several states) and other companies have started offering this option recently to help employees save on fuel and transportation costs.

    On the other hand, if you're commuting far enough for the cost savings to amount to anything, those four days that you do work are pretty much shot: 10 hour day, 2+ hour round trip, 8 hours sleep, that leaves you with four hours to yourself each day.

    1. Re:Recent fad, actually by Super+Jamie · · Score: 1

      I live 15 minutes walk from work, and I still want more hours in the day. I used to live a 3 hour round commute away, no idea how I managed that for 9 months!

  183. 4/40 by anyaristow · · Score: 1

    I did 4/40 for years and loved it. The longer day allowed me to miss one rush-hour commute every single day, and one day every week to shop when traffic was light and stores were empty was nice. 20% less commuting. One more day to sleep in, though I rarely did.

    Management respected it and my schedule was overruled only when there was something scheduled outside my workgroup that I had to attend, which happened infrequently.

  184. I work a government job by Chasmyr · · Score: 1

    I work in a unionized government job in Canada, under the SGEU. We negotiated every second Friday off into our contract. My work hours are 8:30 - 5:00 with one fifteen minute breaks and half an hour for lunch. My previous job did not have every second Friday off, but offered the same schedule except with an hour fifteen for lunch and two 15 minute breaks. That 1 hour a day adds up. I feel it does not affect my workload or performance and I get another full day off a week! I couldn't be happier.

  185. Great Schedule by jdcope · · Score: 1

    I work this schedule now and it works great for me. We have a busy office, and I do work a lot of overtime too, but they dont hassle people about their Friday off. If you abuse it (ie: insist you get your day off when there is work to do), they would Im sure, but I havent seen it happen yet.

  186. Potentially Dangerous by PhysicsGeek42 · · Score: 1

    There's more to this than just personal convenience, which really hasn't been taken into account. 9/80, and other more extreme methods (like 12.5 hour days 3 times a week) are actually a fast way to decrease your performance on the job. Psychological studies have shown that extended hours, leading to reduced sleep, tend to have very adverse affects on attention span and reaction time. A very extreme example of this was acted out at a nuclear power facility, somewhere near (i.e. within blast radius of) New York. This happened during the early hours of the morning in the night shift. A cooling pipe had been plugged by a maintenance crew for cleaning, and they had forgotten to remove it. The monitoring crews noticed that this pipe had very little pressure in it. So, they decided that this could be remedied by shutting off all the other cooling pipes. Now, nobody there figured out that this might potentially not be the problem, and had it not been for the well rested daytime foreman who arrived during the shift change, who noticed this and immediately deduced that a blockage was to blame, well, the population of North America would be significantly smaller. I know that the plural of "anecdote" is not "data", but it's really necessary to take this kind of thing into consideration. It may sometimes be more convenient to have longer periods of free time, like an extend weekend, but really, making it up by adding more time to existing slots isn't always a realistic solution. That said of course, I've never done 9/80, so I can't really say how it affects your sleep cycle or job performance. Just please take caution when looking at this kind of thing.

    1. Re:Potentially Dangerous by Sobrique · · Score: 1
      I'd use the counter argument there - if it's important that your employees are well rested and alert, perhaps you should be looking at just making them work less hours :).

      In an office job though, I'm fairly sure people don't really notice that half the people here are actually zombies, and don't really do anything apart from say 'graah' and shuffle about a bit.

      But it's all headcount, right?

  187. In Montreal, most IT jobs require 37.5hours/week by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

    I'm a software developer in Montreal and most companies here only require to work 37.5 hours/week. There are a few exceptions, some people are lucky and only need to work 35 hours/week and other less lucky people that need to work 40 hours/week. There are no jobs in montreal (aside from people working in hospitals) that require to work more than 40hours/week. Some people do work more than 40 hours but they are not paid for it and are not required to.

    I prefer doing 7.5 hours every day and 5 days a week. I'm much more productive in those 7.5 hours. Working 9 hours a day doesn't work for me. I've done it a couple of times to catch up on some missing time for leaving early the day before and I ended up being very unproductive in the last 1.5 hour.

  188. It was utterly miserable by calmofthestorm · · Score: 1

    Disclaimer: This was on top of a 45 minute each way commute.

    I found it killed my day. I still ahd to get there at 8am, but had to stay until 6pm. Every. Day. That extra hour makes a HUGE difference, at least to me. Even though my job had decently flexible hours on top the 9/80, there are limits to that. It changes the time you get home from evening to night.

    The non-off fridays got out at 5pm instead of 6pm, and I felt so much better I couldn't even believe it. The off fridays were usually spent too exhausted from the week to do anything but sleep and catch up on errands.

    YMMV. I'm usually someone who likes to work long periods of time without interruption, but this was absolutely miserable.

    --
    93rd rule of Slashdot: No matter how obvious my sarcasm is, my comment will be taken seriously by someone.
  189. Ultimately inefficient and counterproductive by aristotle-dude · · Score: 1
    If your job requires a lot of creativity and original thinking, staying at work longer than 8 hours per day is really inefficient. You are basically only really productive 6 hours at the most out of eight hours. If you started work at 9am, your productivity by the time 4:30 rolls around would be almost nil. You could answer a few emails and possibly answer some questions but you are not going to be on the ball for coming up with a lot of original ideas.

    It is also very important to take the time to eat your lunch away from your desk if possible to recharge you batteries and allow for proper digestion.

    --
    Jesus was a compassionate social conservative who called individuals to sin no more.
  190. Only problem IMO by zuggy40 · · Score: 1

    The only downside from my experience working that schedule is that there is very little productivity on the work Friday

  191. 10/4 is the way to go by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

    I work a 10 hour day/ four day week and love my job. Four days on then 3 days off. It can't be beat. Weeks like Thanksgiving mean working Mon & Tuesday, then you are off until the following Monday using zero vacation time. Or, take Mon Tue as Vac and get 10 days off. "Enjoy what you do and you will never work another day in your life."

  192. AMT by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

    AMT?

  193. I hate your definition of "working poor" by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

    I hate your definition of "working poor"

    I think you are defining poor incorrectly by tying it to social services benefits rather than tying it to a fixed definition.

            #define INCOME_LEVEL_NOT_POOR ((52 * 5 * 8) * LIVING_WAGE))
            #define IS_POOR(INCOME) (INCOME) INCOME_LEVEL_NOT_POOR

    FWIW, I also think that taxes should be defined like this:

            #define TAXES MIN((INCOME - INCOME_LEVEL_NOT_POOR),0) * TAX_RATE

    and I might even be willing to live with something along the lines of a welfare state:

            #define GOVERNMENT_PAYOUT (TAXES ? 0 : (INCOME_LEVEL_NOT_POOR - INCOME))

    If you want to fund social services or pay off your politicall cronies, do it on the record and allocate money out of the budget for it so we can all see what you're doing and hold you accountable, rather than trying to find ways to hide it in the tax code.

    Thanks.

  194. not always true... by bendav · · Score: 1

    Oddly enough, in Australia there are certain scenarios where increasing your pay can make you earn less. The marginal rates work as described, but due to convoluted children's benefits and other concessions, there is a band of income, between low and medium, where you go backwards first. It affects students and low income parents the most, and is very frustrating.

    1. Re:not always true... by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      Also in Australia HECS (student loans from the government) kicks in at $38K, which can lower your after tax income significantly.

  195. Better for me than my employer by purduefan · · Score: 1

    I work the 9-80 schedule at a county government agency. I work an extra hour from 7-8 am, and it has improved my commute considerably. After adjusting to the slightly longer days, it isn't a big deal to get through it. The only issue I have is that I often have to adjust the day off to deal with important meetings or emergency responses. Not everyone in the agency works that schedule, so I get quite a bit done in the hour before everyone else shows up. The three-day weekends are great, and since you are only working a few extra hours each week, you don't get burned out. As for my employer, I am not sure what the benefit is to them. Because we have to have someone working to respond to the public from Monday through Friday, the office is actually open longer hours, so there is no savings on heat, lights etc. Considering that we are not officially open until 8, it doesn't provide a benefit to the community (the extra hours don't help them, and the number of employees is slightly reduced the rest of the week).

  196. Wells Fargo STOPPED doing 9/80's last year... by Taelron · · Score: 1

    My friend works for Wells Fargo's ATM computer/mainframe division and use to have a 9/80 work schedule. Last spring in an effort to reduce costs and "get more value" out of their employees they let go of a couple of people from his department and then switched everyone back to a traditional 40 hour week. Thus everyone lost their every other friday off.

  197. This ain't gonna work if you have kids by melted · · Score: 1

    You have to drop them off at daycare in the morning and pick them up in the evening. Therefore, no 9 hour workdays, unless your company provides on-site daycare.

  198. In many firm in europe we already have that long by aepervius · · Score: 1

    In all the firm I worked on there was some principle called "shifted time". You were supposed to work when you are needed naturally, but also with a lot of slack. The system allows you for example to work for the maximum allowed by law for a few days, then simply take the time off the next day, or even the day completely off. I know people which accumulate enough hours during normal time to have 10/12 week of holiday (instead of the 6 normal week). Me I did something cimilar to 80/9 , I worked ~10h a day during 4 days ,then took the last day off, or any combination allowing me a day off after 1 , 2 or 3 weeks. It LOOKS nice for a while, but after a long time of doing it, fatigue cumulate, and you see you easily are less productive working 4*10 rather than 5*8. Your brain function slowlier on the long term when you are tired. Nevertheless I like the system and would not want to lose it.

    --
    C. Sagan : A demon haunted world:
    http://www.amazon.com/gp/product/0345409469/
    visit randi.org
  199. screwed by delvsional · · Score: 1

    My supervisors work 9 nines. That's 81 hours every two weeks, and they're supposed to get every other friday off. The work more like 11-12 hours a day and my direct supervisor hasn't had one of those days off in 5 months. I would never work for a salary. I however get paid 1.5 hours for _every_ hour of overtime I work unless it's doubletime. Oh and the NRC actually regulates how much overtime each person can get. 16 in a 24, 24 in a 48 and 72 in a week. But that's all about to change. It's going to get alot tighter.

    --
    Oh Crap, I'm an optimist.....
  200. I like it by Quiet_Desperation · · Score: 1

    But as an engineer, I worked at least 9 hour days anyway. For me it was like getting 26 extra days off a year. I use the Friday off to get shopping done at the nearly empty stores in the mornings.

  201. Why "9/80"? by Sparr0 · · Score: 1

    "9/80" sounds like a buzzword. "8/80", more commonly known as "4 by 10", is almost certainly far more broadly adopted. I would guess that 5% of the people I know in the IT field (a total of maybe 50 out of 1000 people) work four ten-hour days per week, with a permanent three day weekend. Another 1% work esoteric schedules like 2*12+2*8, 3*12, or 3*13. I know zero people whose schedules alternate on a two-week period.

  202. Some public sector jobs in Australia have this by ross.w · · Score: 1

    My old company had a similar system, but it was based on a 35 hour work week squeezed into 70 hours over 9 days. You could also choose the day you wanted to take off within reason. Excellent for those doctors/dentists appointments and errands that could only be done on a weekday. Particularly when you worked on a remotish site and there was no nearby shops, or you had to commute to the other side of the city to work but needed to do some weekday errands near home. It's a system I greatly miss. Don't miss much else abou thtat job though... Most construction sites in Australia have a 19 day month (1 day of every 4 weeks)

    --
    If my call is important, why am I talking to a recording?
  203. Sounds great. by A_BSD_Dosser · · Score: 1

    It would be even better if this wonderful work practice was on a boat, say a galley, yes! With a great big oiled up chap banging a drum. HEAVE! HEAVE YOU DOGS!

  204. or more vacation instead by AliasMarlowe · · Score: 1

    Indeed, if your income is adequate and you have a high marginal tax rate, it's quite attractive to trade some pay for extra vacation. Living in Europe, my average deduction rate is about 45% (I get 55%), but the marginal deduction rate is about 65% (I get 35%). The deductions include income taxes, social taxes, UI contributions, etc. I usually trade a few weeks of pay for extra vacation every year.

    Due to the difference between average and marginal rates, each week of extra vacation costs me 0.636 average weeks of after tax pay (ratio is 0.35/0.55). That's a bargain, for those who can afford it. It may also help to explain to Americans why high taxes go hand-in-hand with long vacations in Europe.

    Last year, I took 7 weeks of vacation in total (paid and unpaid), and still had a 6-digit pre-tax income.

    --
    Those who can make you believe absurdities can make you commit atrocities. - Voltaire
  205. Work schedule in Spain by skzo · · Score: 1

    I'm currently working in Madrid and I have the common work schedule in here: 8.5/40 which means I work 8.5h a day and I get Friday afternoon off. I really enjoy this method and the Friday afternoon off is always respected with very few exceptions...

  206. NO. by unity100 · · Score: 1

    it will probably flop.

    as a self employed developer who runs his own small software shop, i can tell you that such shedules do not work out. there has been many periods in which we worked in cram sessions, overtime for long durations and took days off. doesnt work out. you cant let go of the cumulative stress and wear & tear easily.

    moreover it further imbalances the individual's work rhytm. imagine youre working 9 days, 10 hours a day. and then imagine you are suddenly off for 3 days in the next 3. and then again 9.

    it will be socially awkward too, you will lose step with the society. while people are resting all around the city, you will be working. and then occasionally while all people are working on a friday, you will be resting.

    i assure you the work done while all the world is resting will not be as efficient, and the rest done while all world is working will not feel like a healthy rest.

  207. It's Fantatsic by SnugBoy · · Score: 1

    I have worked for a company that does 9/80 weeks for a while now, and I have to say it is a completely great way to go. For one thing an extra hour a day really isn't that big of a deal. In my old job, I'd usually get sucked into something at the end of the day that made me stick around the office for a few minutes to an hour after normal working hours (if not more) so working 9 hours instead of 8 doesn't feel that unnatural. But what does feel unnatural (and fantastic) is having a three day weekend every other week! If you are worried about not having time to get things done in your personal life, I wouldn't. I used to have a real problem scheduling doctors appointments and visiting shops that had odd hours and such during the week, but having a totally free day (while everyone else works) during the week, every other week, is actually incredibly convenient. Plus the Friday that you do work is a normal 8 hour day, which oddly enough ends up feeling like a half day for some weird psychological reason...

    One caveat I will say, is that my company is pretty flexible on the start time that you work. Many people come in at 7 or 7:30 instead of the usual 8am and subsequently leave at 5 or 5:30 instead of 6pm. That kind of takes the edge off. I could see a company that expected you to work from say 9am to 7pm being kind of brutal. But overall I would NEVER voluntarily go back to a regular schedule again.

    Hope this helps.

  208. entrepreneurship by wikinerd · · Score: 1

    The best strategy when evaluating work regimes is always to ask yourself: "will this help me to eventually set up my own business?".

    If you believe the extra Friday off will enable you to pursue a self-employed career, then do it. If not, then you need to find another solution that would enable you to set up as self-employed, or do it immediatelly if you can.

  209. But you lose less pay and gain 100% time by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

    which is what he's on about.

    For the last few hours you may be getting "paid" $3/hr rather than $10/hr. Would you work for $3/hr?

    1. Re:But you lose less pay and gain 100% time by LordKronos · · Score: 1

      Wait....where are you at that you get taxed at more than 70%?

  210. Comment removed by account_deleted · · Score: 1

    Comment removed based on user account deletion

  211. I have a life, why should I do such a thing? by jotaeleemeese · · Score: 1

    Lets say I start at 9:00, if I take an hour lunch break I would need to stay until 19:00.

    If you commute one hour each way, that means my time devoted to working would start with my commute at 8:00 and will be back home at 20:00

    Now tell me, do you have a hobby? Do you want to go to the movies? To a concert? What about house chores?

    All that inconvenience for 8 days just so I get a frigging Friday off? Are you serious?

    I can hear already the "skip lunch hour" crowd. Well, I know people that have done that, now they have stomach ulcers or are anaemic. And that still would mean 11 hours devoted to work.

    Most people nowadays devote already between 10 and 11 hours to work, so these schedule extends that one more hour for most days.

    Now pray tell me, will your company at the very least respect your day off and your "shorter" 8 hour day? Or will it be a case of "hey, please be available just in case of an emergency".

    No way. 40hours/week (ore less) is actually much more flexible and allows you to actually have a life after work.

    It is very telling that so many here seem to like this, it seems like the stereotype of the geek with few social interests may be true after all.

    --
    IANAL but write like a drunk one.
    1. Re:I have a life, why should I do such a thing? by _Shad0w_ · · Score: 1

      This is what I'm thinking, for me it really wouldn't work. I already have a 13 hour day just working a normal 8/40 schedule. My daily commute runs to about five hours in total and if I end up having to stay late for some reason I don't get any overtime. Like I'm not getting any next Monday when I'm going to have to stay over night in London because I have to do some work on a server (you wouldn't think I'm a software developer).

      I can see it might work for people who live close to where they work; all they're really doing is coming close the working week for a commuter. For people who have long commutes to start off with, it would royally suck. You'd just spend that one Friday off in bed catching up on sleep.

      --

      Yeah, I had a sig once; I got bored of it.

  212. Seems to me 9 / 81 is better a ratio for squares. by Bob_Who · · Score: 1

    9/80 is sloppy. 9 x 9 = 81 is Square like the geeks we become at work.

  213. You get that when you bill by the hour by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

    n/t

  214. I call my Friday's "Betty Day" by Scranton · · Score: 1

    I get to spend a whole day with my wife, Betty, while the kids are at school. Oh yeah, By the way.... I was working those 9 hour days anyway, now I just get another Friday off. Secondary bonus - At the end of the year you may find you have a few extra vacation days.

  215. 9/80 = Awesome by FiveLights · · Score: 1

    I've been working 9/80 for the better part of 8 years now. It's fantastic. We actually have the ability to do 9/80 or 5/40 and switch back and forth whenever we like. I tend to do 5/40 in January and February just so I can go home when it's light out, but other than that I do 9/80. Two day weekends are not at all satisfying compared to three day weekends. You're off on Friday and you can run errands to anywhere you like, because everything is open, and then you can lay around on Saturday and just when you're thinking "man I don't want to go back to work" you realize it's Saturday night and you don't have to! Last Summer I actually switched to the 4/40 and had every Friday off. I think I'll be doing that again this Summer. For me it's very much about getting to see the Sun when I leave work. In the Summer I can do a 10 hour day and still have a couple of hours of daylight when I get home.

  216. 8/80 by Palindr0me · · Score: 1

    I've been doing 8/80 for a while now, and I love it! I do 10 hour days MTRF, and I have my "week-mid" on Wednesday - it's amazing how much you can do on a Wed when everyone else is at work. My manager and co-workers tend to respect my day off, with the occasional call, or need to switch my day off to another day. (Sometimes, if there is a holiday during the week, I'll switch my day off to coincide, so I get 4-day weekends). I would think how much you'd get bugged when your off would depend on how much your manager/co-workers respect your personal time in general

    Some benefits to this kind of schedule:
    - Your longer hours mean you're there when other people are not, so fewer distractions, more productivity

    - If parking is bad where you work, and your new schedule means getting there earlier, you may not have as much of a problem

  217. mikel by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

    You talk about your life. Dont let the disgusting dragon eat your soul.

    Working seven hours in three days each week for some company is more than enough, if you want to see your partner / wife / children and if you want to live.

    Everyone accepting work times like "80/9" or similar infamies, helps to prepare the road to even more abuse and exploitation of people.

  218. we have it, and it's great by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

    it's like getting 26 extra days off a year. lockheed martin has been doing it for quite a while and it been really good, good way to get new talent in the door too.

    in my dept they respect the day off and we dont get called in.

  219. I've heard it's great by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

    Girlfriend has a 4-10 work week (10-hour work days 4 days a week, with every Monday off). She loves it. Gets all of her appointments, errands, etc. done on Mondays. It takes the stress off of the entire week knowing that she has her Mondays to get things done. If at all possible, I am going to try to find a similar schedule.

  220. Our system by C4st13v4n14 · · Score: 1

    We have strong labour laws where I'm working. I'm a doctor at a medium-sized hospital in a city. This is one of the busier hospitals in the country. Our work weeks vary, but the law says a working week is 37.5 hours a week. We often work more than that, but our schedule is made so that the six of us who work together rotate. We each get a week of compensatory time off every sixth week. This means that the number of hours we work averages out to 37.5 a week during a six week period. Every hour of overtime we work beyond what we're required by the schedule, we either get paid 1.5x our hourly wage, or we can choose to take that time off later. If someone calls in sick, and one of us takes that shift, we get paid double our hourly wage. Our night shifts are 19 hours at a time, so that adds up to a lot of money if someone is sick. We all work a lot and we work overtime because the hospital is so busy, so we all get sick, and the cycle continues. I, personally, do not take many extra shifts because I don't like to be sick. Getting a headache after so many hours on the job, or getting a cold or worse isn't worth the extra money to me. Plus, the government taxes us 50% of our overtime earnings. Since I'm American, I'll never get used to that. I don't use the social services here, many of which are great, but there are just as many I don't agree with. So I prefer not to work extra shifts and give the government 50% of what I earn in tax. Furthermore, we each get 14 days of sick leave a year. The best part is that there's no pressure on you when you're sick. No one asks you about the reasons, gets suspicious, treats you differently, and it's illegal to do so. You get to stay home and recover, the way it should be. Short-term or long-term disability is possible after those 14 days are used up, and you will get paid 100% of your salary. We also each get 5 weeks of paid leave a year, on top of our weeks of compensatory time off. You can imagine how much this costs the state, as they have to employ additional people during the times that we're sick or take off, or pay our colleagues more. I left a life of only work in the States and I've never been happier since doing that. I'll never go back to work in the US, no matter how much doctors there earn.

  221. 9/80 didn't work too well for me by Orion+Blastar · · Score: 1

    I developed schizoaffective disorder from all of the stress and got fired for being sick on the job.

    --
    Remember, Slashdot does not have a -1 disagree moderation, and no, troll, flamebait, and overrated are not substitutes.
  222. 9/80 hrms by Veretax · · Score: 1

    I have never heard it called that before, but here they call it an Alternative Work Schedule (AWS). Not everyone (particularly managers) can take it due to the nature of what they do, but it works out well for those of us who can.

    So we work 9 hour days Monday-Thursday, and then eight hours every other Friday. Our team is split pretty evenly between people that work the first and last friday, and one or two work only 4 hours on Friday.

    Given that we live in a rural area and its difficult to get to 'civilization' for shopping or other events, this has really improved the quality of our life as a family. I for one like it, but I'll admit it isn't for everyone.

  223. Got it here by Thomas+Charron · · Score: 1

    We have a 9/80 work week, and it's *GREAT* 3 day weekends every other week make up for any sort of inconvenience of getting there a half an hour earlier, and leaving half an hour later.

    Another side benifit is, when extra work DOES need to be done, it's very easy to simply work the extra friday.

    --
    -- I'm the root of all that's evil, but you can call me cookie..
  224. Its Probably Illegal.... by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

    This is an hours-of-work labour violation by the employer in my jurisdiction (Ontario). I would be surprised if it is not illegal in most jurisdictions.

  225. 9/80 doesn't work for everyone by AmeerCB · · Score: 1

    I work at a place where we have a choice between 9/80 and 8/40. Almost everyone here does 9/80, but having tried it for awhile, it just does not work for me. I'm typically very busy after work (I have two large dogs that need exercise, and I work out myself, plus a few other hobbies take up the rest of my time). The extra hour/day is much more important to me than a day off every two weeks (I tended to sleep until noon on that day off anyway, due to the exhaustion of trying to get everything done around my 9 hour day the rest of the week). A lot of people here are claiming that they "never missed" that extra hour per day, but I think it's important to realize that it's personal preference. If you take part in a lot of daily activities, that extra hour a day may be more valuable to you than the day off every two weeks.

  226. Varying schedules/free overtime by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

    I used to work 3 12s and a 4, that was nice. But I agree, 12 hours of the same thing in one day would get very numbing. My role changed throughout the day so that helped.
    The only bad thing was that my 4 was on Monday, the 12s were W-F, but I could usually get Monday off and have a nice 4 day weekend (then nothing but workeatsleep for three and a half days.)
    I agree, one needs to be careful with salary. I'm salary now, and it's not huge, but it's pretty good, and while I am required to work "overtime" some, it's also pretty flexible with longer lunch hours or being able to do real-life things in the middle of the day, so it balances out. I do hear coworkers saying "I'm on email all night and all weekend" every weekend and whatnot; which to me is a big sign of something very wrong--either they have let the company/boss take advantage of them and can't make it stop, or their workload really needs to be reallocated. Or they have no life and this is voluntary, which is fine.

  227. It's not bad by sheph · · Score: 1

    We do it here. I'm currently working a 4-10s schedule, and I like it better. Sure, the days are longer, but I have every Friday off. It's nice in the summer time because I can go camping on a Thursday after work with the family, spend all day Friday hiking and fishing, and leave Saturday afternoon when it's starting to get crowded. Then I still have Sunday to rest. It's perfect.

    --
    I don't believe in karma, I just call it like I see it.
  228. The software industry is obsessed by hours! by forgoil · · Score: 0, Offtopic

    I say work 6 hour days instead, no overtime, no crisis, no nothing. Plan ahead and plan well, update your plans every week. If I work 6 hours, the next day I will be fully functioning and I will be very effective. Working 10+ hours will make me very ineffective and more mistakes will be made, less constructive solutions will be taken, and the quality of the code will be worse. High quality code is the key here, and it can't be created by tired, overworked, and worn out people. You can't keep up the intensity nor concentration if you don't get enough time away from it for personal stuff and sleep (not being able to get your personal stuff done / spend time with your friends and family will stress you out!).

    Btw, my quick definition of quality code:

    * Easily readable by everyone working with it
    * Documented (not the same as commented)
    * Unit tested fully before it is checked in and passing 100%, every time, all the time
    * 100% of all tests always passing on your "main line" so your software is always in shipping condition
    * Refactored and redesign on a continous basis to make sure adding to and changing the code is as painless as possible

    And you will not get that from stressing the shit out of people!

    (If in the zone, a 12h shift can be very effective, anyone doing so should get the next day off to rest up)

  229. Works if your partners are Israeli by ghoul · · Score: 1

    You would love working with an Israeli offsite team. Israel has Fri-Sat as the weekend and Sunday is a working day. Now when we worked with them we had Sat-Sun as our weekend so on Fridays we had no teleconferences or simple phone calls interrupting us and we got a lot done and when the Israelis started working on Sunday they would send off a bunch of emails with questions but as we didnt look at them till Monday half of them were already solved(as in on second thought that already makes sense) and did not even need responses to. One Monday morning I actually had more recall requests waiting then actual messages :)

    --
    **Life is too short to be serious**
  230. wadz by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

    haha i work like 10-15 hours a week :P charge around 40-80 an hour depending on my customer's circumstances - if you have more, pay more :D

    average out at like 600 in pocket per week enough for me!! and all the free time in the world. just got back from bondi beach (it pays to own your own business, btw im 21

    i dont get why people need so much extra money? life is for living!

  231. Worked great for me! by robotngineer · · Score: 1

    I had a 9/80 schedule for two summers, and I greatly enjoyed it. To me, once I get to 10 hours @ work per day, my productivity drops, so the 4/10 schedule could get a bit tiring. The 9/80 schedule is a great balance in providing every other Friday off. Plus, on the Fridays that I did work, the office was quieter, since others had the day off, so I was more productive. I'd imagine that the boss/environment would affect how successful such a schedule is, but I loved it, personally.

  232. I love my 9/80 by kria · · Score: 1

    I love my 9/80 schedule, and my company has been doing it for longer than I've been here (and I hired on in 1999). I work at a company that has a history of discouraging 'casual' overtime (we get paid for OT! We just need eight hours of it first. It's better than nothing.), so unless something has really gone veryvery bad, we're not coming in on that Friday.

    Everyone knows which Fridays are 9/80 ones, so typically very few meetings get scheduled on them.

    I find it's great for getting things done, particularly for scheduling doctor appointments.

  233. How it really works by supabeast! · · Score: 1

    The 9/80 work schedule is a scam. Youâ(TM)ll have worked the 80 hours, but on Friday there will be a big meeting and youâ(TM)ll need to work. The next off Friday some important maintenance task will come up and youâ(TM)ll need to work. After that there will be a client interaction and youâ(TM)ll need to work. Your company will not pay you overtime for any of these extra Fridays because youâ(TM)re a salaried professional.

    Itâ(TM)s a trap!

  234. Huh? by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

    I dont know anyone who isnt FORCED to work over 80 hours over two weeks - without pay.. What are you talking about?

  235. Great by internerdj · · Score: 1

    We tried it over the summer. I loved it so much that I begged my boss to let me continue on. What we did while everyone was doing it was have people familiar with a project alternate fridays so if the customer needed something it looked like there was someone knowledgable here all the time. The only difficult parts are making up time missed. Holidays cost you an hour of vacation if your company does 8hr(normal workday) holidays.

  236. Nothing wrong with 40 hour week... by CompMD · · Score: 1

    At a very large defense contractor we had 9/80s. I'm not a huge fan of them. Now, at the aviation and electronics company I'm at, we have regular 5/40s with an unofficial hour of flex time. I live about 30 miles away (all highway driving though) so after a 30-35 minute drive, I get to work around 7:00-7:30am and leave 4:00-5:00pm. I've only had to work late a couple times, the rest of the time I can just go home at the end of the day, no questions asked. If we are planning something that is going to run late and should be checked on, I can take my laptop home and VPN in, although that is a rare instance. Its the least stressful job I've ever had. We even get to carry over up to 14 weeks of vacation time from year to year. We get a staggering amount of job applications as we're also the most profitable company in the metro area.

  237. What can I say, better planning is needed then by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

    http://www.yutiti.com will help you out with that.

  238. Friday Off by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

    Our Director does honor the Fridays off. The Friday is nice to play or get things done. We still have time to get things done during the week. If there is a "crisis on somebodys part" and we have (or choose) to work on the Friday I get paid the hours for it.

  239. Totally works by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

    We do this at my company and it works out great. We do it dept by dept though with the manager having say on if/how it works. However, some of the departments don't do it as it gets harder to do the more people you have. Then half the staff is gone every Friday. Also, some of the hourly people get miffed because they can't do it because if they work 45 hours in one week and 35 in the next then they have to get paid overtime for that first week and our company isn't willing to pay out that much overtime as over half the company is hourly. But for those of us who are salary it is a great benefit. I know, it's not fair to the hourly people, but life sometime sucks, right?!

  240. Mod parent up! by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

    My points exactly!

  241. 90 hours by nomorecwrd · · Score: 0, Offtopic

    In Chile we work 45 hours/week... 80 hours in two weeks is actually less work for us, not squeezing anything.
    You insensitive clod!

  242. 9 hour days w/ 4 hour Friday by foniksonik · · Score: 1

    My work typically does a 40 hour work week in 5 days but does 9 hours M-Th then 4 hours on Friday.

    Everyone appreciates getting out early on Friday to get a head start on the weekend, either for local travel, weekend home improvements or just playing a round of golf while everyone else is in the office. We do sometimes have urgent projects that need some people to stay but we try to compensate them in some way later.

    I don't think taking a full work day off is workable as some things simply have to be done each day due to other companies schedules... so a half day works well as this type of phone call/paperwork can be done easily in a few hours.

    We just don't plan on getting anything 'completed' on a Friday. it's always due on Monday EOD or Tues morning. This is a good policy anyways as it's hard to find people toward the end of a Friday regardless of whether they are supposed to be there or not.

    --
    A fool throws a stone into a well and a thousand sages can not remove it.
  243. I work a 9/80... well technically a 9/76.5 by sputnikid · · Score: 1

    The energy sector in Canada (Calgary to be specific) has a number of companies that do this.

    I have been working with every other Friday off and think it is great.

    Pros
    - On the short weeks your vacation used is only 4 days.
    - The Fridays free up my Saturdays with my family because I can get stuff done that I normally would have done on the weekend.
    - My company closes completely so there is never the possibility of working that day (unless you are on an on-call rotation and something at the datacenter dies).
    - Long weekends are fantastic. Add that to another Monday holiday and you end up with a 4 day weekend or a 3 day week.

    I personally like having the extra day off. I find myself better rested and more productive at home.

  244. 9/80 is awesome. by KStrike155 · · Score: 1

    I work a 9/80 schedule right now. It's really good because:
    1) You can schedule your vacations to coincide with your 9/80 Friday, so you don't need to take a vacation day that day.
    2) You can schedule all sorts of doctor/dentist appointments for that day.
    3) Gives you a day to catch up on doing stuff around the house.
    4) It's super flexible, at least at my company. If I need to take a day off during the week for some reason I can just make it up on the 9/80 Friday I would usually have off. Or if I need to leave early for a few days out of the week, I can just come in on that Friday and make up the time.
    5) I have never been pulled into work on that Friday, unless it was by my own decision.
    6) On the Fridays that are not 9/80, it's exciting because you can leave an hour early!
    7) I still have time to do whatever. Yesterday I went to the gym and out to dinner.

  245. Monday instead of Friday? by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

    I'd rather them give us mondays off, especially since Fridays are usually the slowest days in the support department anyway. God knows, EVERYONE hates a Monday.

  246. Doesn't matter because you're already fucked by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

    "Do you find time to get personal stuff done during the week? Is Friday good for anything other than catching up on lost sleep? "

    Buddy. If the addition of less than one hour of extra work per day is causing you to lose any amount of sleep or not have time to do chores, you are doing something wrong. Sleep = 7 hours (if you sleep more than this you are in fact using your leisure time to sleep). Your work now = 9 hours, let's say, although it isn't quite 9. That's 16. Where are the other 8 hours in which you neither sleep nor work? Is that not enough? Take a time management class maybe?

  247. Use it here everyone Loves it by StrifeJester · · Score: 1

    We work an 8-7 Monday and Wednesday for one half of the staff. Tuesdays and Thursdays for the other half of the staff. Every other Friday you get off. This works well because then its only 2 days a week for a couple of extra hours to make up those 8. We work on a commission basis so a lot of people are still on their day off but it gives them free time to work on what they want.

  248. Harris 9/80 by Pointy+McButterpants · · Score: 1

    FTW. I don't work there anymore, but it was pretty sweet while it lasted. The Thursday before every off Friday is "Virtual Friday," and the Fridays you do work you get off at 4:30, and it's payday.

  249. 9/80 is great by LintMan · · Score: 1

    I love the 9/80 schedule that my employer has. The off Friday is really useful to get all those business hour things done that normally you'd need to take time off for, like having a repairman come or doctor's visits. And one less commute per two weeks is also great. Officially, my employer oddly does not allow flex time so everyone is supposed to work the same set hours, but I have never seen this enforced at all.

    The extra hour per day makes for a longer day (so you have to go in earlier or stay at work later), and if you have an unproductive day for some reason, more time is wasted. I see my kids a bit less in the evening because of this, which is one big downside.

    Coming here, I was skeptical that the "off friday" would really be a day off, and if I'd be expected to regularly work that day. But it is treated as a day off, and most people do not work it. On a crunch effort, people might work it, but that's rare, not "mandatory", and usually paid overtime would be available for that. And even if paid OT isn't available and you want to work a Friday, unpaid overtime is credited against any absent/sick time you take off.

  250. I have previously worked 8/80. by t-maxx+cowboy · · Score: 1

    In my place of work we have some labor board variances that allowed me to work flexible hours. A couple of years back I was working 4 days per week at 10hours per day excluding lunch break. This allowed me to have every Friday off. During the summer months, I was able to head out to go camping a full day earlier than most and get prime camping spots.

    I would rather go back to the 4 day week even now. So given an option to cram 80 work hours into less days in a two week period, I would jump at the idea given 10 hour days, if the solution was more than 10 hours per day I would still entertain the idea because of the extra full days off that would occur.

    --
    Regards,

    Ryan Pritchard
    Fun Extends All Basic Life Expectancies
  251. I enjoy my 9/80 by chappel · · Score: 1

    I work on a long-term government contract, out-of-town. The 9/80 gives me an extra day for travel home, and not being home during the week means I don't miss any family time. We do a split-shift, so a co-worker covers for me on my friday off, and since we only support internal folks who are also working 9/80, fridays tend to be really light anyway. I'd gladly work a 4/10, but haven't been able to convince anyone. I do get to be pretty flexible on when I work (I bill straight hourly - it just costs me billable time to not work).

    I love the fridays off that I end up staying out of town - it's like having an entire extra day free to do whatever.

  252. 9/80 rocks! by rocket+rancher · · Score: 2, Interesting

    I've been doing 9/80's for ten years in the IT department here at the rocket ranch. This schedule is the best schedule I've ever worked in the 30+ years I've been a wage slave, and I've worked a lot of schedules -- split shift, rotating, days, swings, mids - you name it, I've probably worked it. The number one benefit for me is the three-day weekend that 9/80 generates every other week. With some judicious use of vacation time, I can take a lot of on-Fridays off as well, so that I can have even more three-day weekends, or the occasional four-day weekend by taking a vacation day on the Thursday preceding an off-Friday, or on the Monday following one. 9/80s make taking frequent mini-vacations feasible, which definitely keeps my morale high.

    On a related note, working in IT means sometimes being available 24/7, but that goes with the territory. I don't think I'm being abused by management when they require me to be available on my off-Friday. As long as the compensation I receive from the company in return for being available is commensurate with the inconvenience of being on call, I have no problem with it. It is in my best interest, and the company's, to try to make sure that my services aren't needed on that off-Friday. The key here, as I see it, is that when I am on call, I get paid the same whether or not I get called in, and as long as that policy remains, I will remain with the company. I've worked on-call for companies that compensated me only if I actually was called in. My employer makes no distinction between being on call and actually being at work, when it comes to compensation. Recognizing that there is an opportunity cost for an employee on call is very important to me.

  253. They should just do 4/9 or better yet 3/10. by patjhal · · Score: 1

    Honestly the 40 hour work week is just ridiculous. There used to be an idea that science and technology was there to remove the burden from man. This was shown with the 40 hour week but since then no progress has been made. Worse yet from a nuclear family perspective the work week has jumped from 40 to 80+. Society should move to two weekly shifts of 3/10 so that one parent can be home to watch their kids when they are young and so people can shop, take classes, and upkeep their property if they do not have kids or the kids are older (in school). Really! Why do we have this society where the majority work at the same time, shop at the same time, and go out at the same time. Its ridiculous.

    1. Re:They should just do 4/9 or better yet 3/10. by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      What a dumb idea. Parents should make sure they can afford to have kids before having them. Asking employers to change people's work schedules because they were irresponsible is such a great idea.

  254. Tax brackets by Cassander · · Score: 1

    While I understand that the tax bracket system is very widely misunderstood in this manner, please note that there are some edge cases where a small raise can make your WITHHOLDING amount larger than your raise. For example (looking at 2007 tables because it's what I've got handy) someone making $449 weekly has $52 withheld from their check, but someone making $450 weekly has $54 withheld. I believe it all works out on April 15 though.

    --
    Knowledge != Intelligence
  255. I work four 10hr days a week by TravisO · · Score: 1

    A lot of simple minded posts against this 9/80 day concept. While I don't think any company should force this on it's employees, I like having 3 day weekends. So much that I work a 10hr per day schedule Mon-Thur.

    The extra 2hrs more at work per day isn't really noticeable but the extended weekends are well worth it. In a way, with a 2day weekend, you only have 1 really care-free day which is Saturday, because on Sunday you know when you go to bed that day, it's Monday. With a 3 day weekend I have two days where I don't need to care when I go to bed or when I wake up. In a way it doubles my weekend enjoyment.

  256. 4-40 by BlackSnake112 · · Score: 1

    How much sleep does everyone really need? Maybe this should be an ask slashdot thing. People are amazed that I get 3-4 hours of sleep a night. One Saturday a month I sleep on and off till noon. But unless I take a sleeping pill I never get 7-8 straight hours of sleep. I sleep for 1-2 hours then wake up. stair at the ceiling for a bit. Then hopefully fall sleep again. There has got to be others who do not need this 6-8 hours of sleep every night.

    I'd rather have the 4 day 10 (or 11 for lunch) hour shift and three day weekends all the time.

    1. Re:4-40 by Cornflake917 · · Score: 1

      How much sleep does everyone really need? Maybe this should be an ask slashdot thing.

      Yeah, I agree I think that would be a interesting discussion.

      I think the reason why you have trouble sleeping more then 4 hours a night is because your body's biological time-clock is schedule based. Since you've only slept 3-4 hours a night your body gets used to it. However, even if you feel okay, sleeping this sparingly weakens your immune system and probably has other long term health effects.

    2. Re:4-40 by dotmax · · Score: 1

      sleep == important!!

      Some news reports in the last week addressed the correlation between sleep and catching colds. A couple weeks ago there was a report (here maybe?) about how sleep allows cellular repair mechanims work better. There are numberous studies correlating sleep with obesity, depression and other mental and physical pathology.

      I'm a professional shift worker. Almost 30 years. I've found sleep to be very important.

  257. It works, give it a chance. by SleezyG · · Score: 1

    I work for a very large high technology company that has instituted a flex-time policy for about 10,000 people in California and Colorado. An employee may work traditional, 9/80, or 4/10 (4 ten hour days/week). Almost everyone from interns to senior management is on 9/80. The office is a ghost town on those "off-Fridays." I barely notice the extra hour per day and still have plenty of time for life outside of work. The three day weekends are priceless, whether you want to shop at the mall on an uncrowded day or go on a 3-day ski weekend. Even on the off-Fridays we're asked to work, management usually offers hour-for-hour vacation time reimbursement.

    The downside of the 9/80 (besides the resentment of my friends at other tech companies) is that you often waste your off-Friday waiting for your wife, buddies, or whoever to get off work before you can leave for weekend trips. I often lament that the only other people with off-Fridays are my co-workers.

  258. Re:Nobody knows how the US tax code works. by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

    All the more reason to adopt the Fair Tax!

  259. I work a 9/80 now by flablader · · Score: 1

    I work a 9/80 now, and have for the last 3 years. I love it, and my employer definitely respects the off Friday (the boss is generally off as well!). The biggest disadvantage I've found is that the off Friday isn't really a day off; it's when you do things that you'd otherwise take sick/personal/vacation time to do (Doctor visits, take the car to the shop, etc).

  260. 6/80 - 8/80 by evilnissan · · Score: 1

    I have never had a M-F 9-5 job so I really dont know what it would feel like. Current schedule is either 3 13 hour shifts a week or 4 10hour shifts and it rotates where we have to work every other weekend. It sucks but it does have its upsides. It really sucks when were short a couple of operators and have to fill in working 5-13 hour shifts a week.

    --
    This Sig for rent.
  261. Los Alamos National Labs does it by timbck2 · · Score: 1

    While I don't work there, I have friends and acquaintances who do. Their 9/80 schedule is optional, not mandatory (though once they choose it they pretty much have to stick with it).

    My friends seem to like the Friday off.

    --
    Absurdity: A statement or belief manifestly inconsistent with one's own opinion. -- Ambrose Bierce
  262. My Spouse Works Irregular Hours by Jonah+Bomber · · Score: 1

    So to spend time together, I flex time too. My employer is very flexible, and I can take a day off during the week and make it up on Saturday or work 10 hours a day for a 4 day work week. The 10 hours are rough, especially in the winter, until you get used to it.

  263. Been working this schedule for 7.5 years by iAlex · · Score: 1

    I have been working this schedule for the past 7.5 years and love it. I work on a military base and almost all of the base staff works this schedule. On non working Fridays the place is a ghosttown. An advantage of this is that there are savings in utility bills with no one coming into work on the off Fridays.

    --
    What's a Sig???
  264. Fire Dept is the ultimate post-geek job by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 1, Interesting

    I ditched the IT world after cashing out in dot.communism and joined the fire department as well. We work a killer schedule. Every other day for a week (4 x 24 hour shifts) then four days off, then another round of every other day for a week (another 4 x 24 hours) and then six days off. So we basically get a four day weekend and a week+ off every 28 days. AND we're allowed to freely trade amongst our ranks, so a guy that works opposite me at the same station and I have a deal where we trade one day each month, turning our six day into an eight day (and having to work one 72 hour shift).

    I can take four shifts of vacation and have 17 days off. We get 14 shifts a year combined vacation/sick time. Take 10 shifts off and I get 30 days. I spent an entire month in Australia last year, and still had vacation time left from the yearly allotment.

    The funny thing is, that when I left my consulting job (which I can still work during my off days), they all thought I was nuts. Now that the economy is in the crapper, they're all looking at my steady income and retirement package with covetous eyes. I'll retire at 57 with 90% of my highest years pay (assuming there is still a government in 20 years).

    All this and I get to ride around in big red. And for those of you thinking it's too late, I got hired on at age 32. A guy in my training class was 36. Just put down that jelly donut and see the light!

  265. Our entire site is on 9/80 by Pontiac · · Score: 1

    Our whole work site is run on a 9/80 work schedule..
    It works out great and you end up with a couple 4 day weekends around the holidays.
    We typically work 7am-4:30pm with 4 9's and an 8 on the full work then 4 9's on the off week.

    Christmas fell on the Friday off this year so we only had to work 2 days that week (2 paid days for Christmas, Christmas eve here)
    On the down side we had to work 10 hours for each of those 2 days. ( 2 - 8 hr holiday pay plus 4 hr rollover from last week left 20 hours to cover for the 40 hour week) Most people just burned a couple vacation hours and worked a 9 hour days.

    As for off day coverage.. We have a group who works the opposite schedule taking the other Friday off so we have coverage on the off weeks.

    My dad took a different twist on the schedule..
    4 9's and a 4 hour Friday every week.He figured all he did on the full day off was sleep in so half the day was wasted anyway.. Be having to get up and work a half day he could enjoy his afternoon off every week.

    --
    If you think it's expensive to hire a professional to do the job, wait until you hire an amateur. --Red Adair
    1. Re:Our entire site is on 9/80 by Pontiac · · Score: 1

      I forgot to say..
      I used to work 4 10's when I worked in Broadcast TV.
      The hours get a bit long and in the winter you don't see the sun unless you step outside in the middle of the work day.

      It's really nice having a week day off on a regular basis to get things done. Having to cram it all into a lunch break sucks.

      --
      If you think it's expensive to hire a professional to do the job, wait until you hire an amateur. --Red Adair
  266. I loved 9/80's by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

    I used to work a 9-9's work week and I loved it. I was able to get all
    of my normal errands done, mow the lawn, etc. on my off friday, leaving
    my Saturdays for fun.

    Now I'm working for a company with a standard 5-8 schedule and it seems
    like my Saturdays are wasted doing chores and errands.

  267. worked for 2 companies that did this... by Augmento · · Score: 1

    1. Generally, your managers always try to convince you to move your personal appointments to the off friday and start enforcing leave/sick leave/PTO if you don't. 2. IT workers usually have to do all their disruptive stuff on the off friday in return for future comp time that never materializes or ends up looking more like 5x8 anyway. Despite that, the occasional long weekend where you can get away to someplace on a friday that is usually way crowded on the weekends makes it worth it.

  268. Life is too short! Find another Job! by MrJerryNormandinSir · · Score: 1

    9/80 will burn you out! You work to live not live to work!

    1. Re:Life is too short! Find another Job! by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

      Um, dyou realize what a 9/80 is?

      4 days of 9 hours each per week = 72 hours in 2 weeks.

      Every *other* friday, you work an 8 hour day.

      Total = 80 hours, but you get every other friday off.

      Seems sort of the opposite of burning out to get 3-day weekends every other week, right?!

      Current contract position I'm working is for a governmental agency that does this. I like it.

      Of course, an officemate in grad school talked about his job in the late 80's in Germany: 36-hour weeks, plus comp time, plus generous common-in-europe holiday schedules and vacation amounts, plus a habit of working 4x10's (so comp time tended to pile up faster than he could use it!) It gave him a life/work balance that was awesome, with short bike-tour trips every month or so. 9/80's or 4/10's pale by comparison.

  269. Think Outside The Box by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

    My company (the one I work for :) ) has been working 9-80s for about 2 years now. The first year we had the option of which friday to have off. One Friday you'd have off, and the next half of the people would be in. The second year everyone was on the same schedule. There were very few (if any) meetings on the working Friday as the culture seems to be one that if you have a meeting it must recur weekly (as opposed to bi-weekly).

    The largest impact that 9-80 has had on me is that it made me realize that the work schedule is fairly flexible. Last year I would intentionally work my 9-80 off days, bank that time, then apply that time towards taking a week off. As long as I have the required time in the system during a particular accounting month I'm OK. I would typically take my vacations during long accounting months (July has 5 weeks on our system). By working 9 hr days I'm able to build up 5 excess hours a week (or 20 hrs during 4 of the 5 weeks) and apply that time toward my vacation on the fifth week. A weeks worth of time off may cost me 20 hrs of vacation (less if there is a holiday). Last year I was able to stretch 3 weeks of vacation into 5+ weeks of time off.

    This year I'm going push the envelope a little further. Assuming you can bank 5 hrs of working time every week by working 9 hr days, and you can carry hours from accounting month to accounting month, you can theoretically take one week off for every 9 calendar weeks without dipping into any of your vacation.

  270. I like it fine. by theophylact · · Score: 1

    I work at the US Environmental Protection Agency, and we have various flexible schedules open to us. I use the most common, the 9/80 with alternate Fridays off, and it works fine for me. It's very nice to be able to be home during the week for, say, a visit from the plumber, or to arrange for an appliance to be delivered and installed. It's especially good because it's optional. Others in my office, especially those with small children or difficult commutes, don't necessarily appreciate such a long day and so don't use the option, but I live in DC proper and it takes me under 45 minutes to get to and from work on public transit. An additional plus is that I can switch my day off on an ad hoc basis by advance request. It doesn't have to be a Friday, either; some of us have Monday off, and I know someone who chose Wednesday (why, I don't know).

  271. Not as great as I expected by Masters+Champion · · Score: 1

    I did 9/80 for awhile a few years ago when my employer offered it. At the time, my kids were younger and I ended up only seeing them an hour or less every work day. Even though I made up the clock time on the off Friday, I still felt I was missing too much of their lives by rarely seeing them for 9 days out of 14.

    Probably be different now that they're older and awake so much more of the day, but haven't tried it again.

  272. Long hours is sucking up the fun in this country by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

    Thats just the truth. I work 40 hours a week and go to college and I would gladly decrease an hour of work every day if I could. And I have a good job in my opinion. Definitely not tack another hour while making my personal time after work shorter during 4 straight days. People should be done at 3:00 PM... I think we would live healthier lives that way. Also considering all the time wasted while at work I can definitely see accomplishing everything that needs to be done within that time period.

  273. 7/12 by giemer · · Score: 0

    As a long term contractor, I always suggest the 7/12 paradigm.

    7 days, 12 hours per day is about 105 hours of billable time. Work a week, take 2 weeks off.

    Getting over time on its own is a pain in the ass these days... takes the fun out of contracting.

  274. "Compressed Days" by 0xG · · Score: 1

    Works terrific for us.
    We work(ed) a 35-hour week; that is (was) 7 hours per day.

    By adding 45 minutes per day (not much, I can assure you), the 9 x .75 works out to 6.75 hours; the employer kicks in the extra 15 minutes for the day off. This is known in our culture as a "compressed" day, or "CD".

    This gives everyone a "9-day fortnight", with a tenth day off - usually Monday or Friday, but could be any day.

    I can say it is one of the main reasons I work here. This is a unionized shop (although I am an "exempt" employee), so that explains the 35-hour week.

    I take Fridays, to hit the ski slopes a day before the maddening crowds.
    Life is sweet!

    Only downside is that the wife tries to "program" my compressed days.

    --
    A pox on web designers who feel that window.innerWidth == screen.availWidth
  275. Ease of correcting mistakes by Chmcginn · · Score: 2, Interesting

    Henry Ford did actually study the subject of working hours, and realised he got the same productivity when he went from 6 days/week, 12 hours shifts, to 5 days a week 8 hours shifts. He also had a workforce which didn't burn out as quickly.

    Factory work, specifically assembly, is very prone to an actual loss of work output with excessive hours. When you're working with a thousand dollars of parts, and a simple mistake can make them into ten dollars of scrap metal, making sure your workforce works as many hours as they can before their error rate begins to spike is crucial.

    Some would argue that, in the information age, it's easier to correct the mistakes that overwork & undersleep will lead you to. I'm not entirely sure this is correct... while fixing the extra '$' or misplaced ')' is an amazingly trivial task, finding it can be challenging.

    --
    Have you been touched by his noodly appendage?
  276. Hard jobs by sjbe · · Score: 1

    I think the point is more that if you're working at the kind of place where it's "up or out" and 80-hour weeks, you've probably made a bad decision somewhere along the line. If you WANT to work in that environment with those kinds of hours, you should probably see a shrink.

    Nearly every entrepreneur, doctor, investment banker, and more than a few young lawyers work those kind of hours. Some endeavors require that sort of time commitment. Not a life for everyone to be sure and you may be right with your "see a shrink" comment but that's what it takes sometimes. It's not wrong though it might be a bit pathological.

    I'm married to a physician and I generally tell people who are considering her profession that if you can imagine your self doing anything else you probably should do the something else. It has to be a calling because it is too hard otherwise. You'll basically give up a decade of your life just for training, work most holidays, work long and irregular hours, and miss a lot of "normal" life. The pay might be decent down the road but if helping people isn't something deep in your soul you'll probably burn out. Fortunately there seems to be enough people with that kind of commitment.

  277. Excuse meh, Have you seen my Stapler? by Phoenixhawk · · Score: 1

    Where I work 9-9-9-9-9 as the standard, and if I'm lucky I don't have to come in on the weekend, and if I'm really lucky I don't have to stay after the 9. which sucks during winter, its dark outside when I got in, and its dark outside when I go home, add in 30-60 mins for the going to and from work, and its closer to 10hrs to 11hrs (Winter traffic sucks) of your day gone. (Not counting remoting in from home, and crackberry time) Anything like Doctor Appointments and such that have to be scheduled usually end up having to become a PTO day. During the Summer they offer Flex Days, (They give they give us like 2 or 3) If we use one of them we only have to work for 10hrs a day for two weeks to get that 1 Friday off. And if its release time all bets are off, 116hrs is not unheard of.

  278. 9/80 work schedule by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

    We had this when I worked at an Air Force lab over 10 years ago. Our system was very flexible for which day off people took. I actually took alternate Tuesdays which was great for appointments. I think it was much less stressful than a 4/40 schedule.

  279. You've got it all wrong!!! by cyn1c77 · · Score: 3, Informative

    If someone needs to work 80 hours a week on average then I would say that their life doesn't have much quality to begin with. Unless by "maintain our quality of living" you mean "paying off the luxury goods and services you've purchased". But then again, as your work load stops you from benefiting from them, I seriously doubt that they do much good.

    Materialism and all that keeping up with the joneses is a bitch, isn't it?

    It's not 80 hours a week! It is an average of 40 hours a week. It is called a 9/80 because you work 80 hours over 9 work days and get the 10th day off.

    1. Re:You've got it all wrong!!! by GreatBunzinni · · Score: 1

      It appears that you failed to read the thread. If you had followed it you would realize that I was talking about metlin's post and not the 9/80 subject.

      --
      Slashdot, fix your code or at least hire someone who is competent at it to do it for you.
    2. Re:You've got it all wrong!!! by cyn1c77 · · Score: 1

      It appears that you failed to read the thread. If you had followed it you would realize that I was talking about metlin's post and not the 9/80 subject.

      Oh sorry, my bad. I thought the whole point of /. was to post without reading TFA or threads.

    3. Re:You've got it all wrong!!! by Billly+Gates · · Score: 1

      9/80 = 11 hour days.

      Still sucks and you have to work 9 straight days. Does not sound that much better ... it maybe worse.

      Any manager considering this is not worth his salt. Hire more people or stop bending over backwards for ridiculous requirements. Do you think any other profession would tolerate this? People would say no and quit.

  280. love the 9/80 by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

    I have been on a 9/80 schedule for years and love it! The friday I work we work 8 hours so it is not bad on Friday and having every other friday off is great.

    I want to go up to a 4/10 schedule now but no one else will go for it.

    I have no problem doing stuff after work either since my schedule is 5:30-3:30.

  281. Only partial implementation by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

    My company has a 9/80 work schedule and it works for the administrative and some of the design people. It's a lot more hit or miss for anyone associated with production, I'd guess only about 30% of them consistently work to that schedule.

  282. Re:TP Positioning and Cats... by CheapScott · · Score: 1

    The engineer in me says "over" for the oh-so-obvious reasons.

    The cat owner in me says "under", else the cats quickly find the "over" roll and unroll it all straight onto the floor!

  283. Why 9/80? by Red_Chaos1 · · Score: 1

    Why not 8/80? I'd rather work 4 10 hour days myself. Have 3 day weekends, or 6 full days off at a shot. ;)

  284. Use disambiguation: Clarus the Dogcow by GPS+Pilot · · Score: 1

    Use the disambiguation page, you insensitive clod!

    Clarus the Dogcow:

    http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dogcow

    --
    That that is is that that that that is not is not.
  285. Highly Recommend It! by roxy001 · · Score: 1

    I've worked a schedule that fits those parameters for years and it's WONDERFUL. Three-day weekends every other weekend... Make that a four-day when there's a holiday Monday. We work 9 hours M-Th, then 8 on alternate Fridays. Total 80 hrs every two weeks, no time and a half for the 44 hr week, but who cares? Mark up a calendar with alternate Fridays off. Worked four 10s and 12s also and I'd take those above 9/80, unless, and it's a big unless, you have a long commute. If you're working 12s and commuting an hour each way, your life on work days is GONE.

  286. You are clearly not a man. by EWAdams · · Score: 1

    We're not complaining about the long hours, we're bragging! It's a whose-penis-is-bigger contest. You can't win if you refuse to participate.

    --
    I piss off bigots.
  287. do you get paid weekly? by sgt+scrub · · Score: 1

    I have a little data that suggests there is a relationship between being required to "list your extra contributions" and your company working you to death for 80 hours then giving you shit if you don't work fridays too. If your boss isn't looking over you shoulder or asking you to justify your existence at the company you have a good change of relaxing long enough to do another 80 hour stretch.

    On a more serious note. If you get paid weekly, won't you miss going to the clubs every friday night?

    --
    Having to work for a living is the root of all evil.
  288. 9/80 by lsatenstein · · Score: 0

    I hate to bring human biorhythms into this, but we are made to work not more then 6 days, and rest on the 7th, except if you are a farmer with animals to tend. For the common religions (Christianity, Muslim, Jewish) one day has to be reserved for a Rest. I could accept 4*10 or 3*13 (with a free 1 hour). But not 9 consecutive days on the job.

    --
    Leslie Satenstein Montreal Quebec Canada
  289. 9/80 is Great by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

    I've been working for a company for 5 years with the 9/80 schedule. We work 8 hours every other Friday and then have the alternate Friday off. I really like it for the extra day to get errands done or take a long weekend out of town.

    I don't think I could go back to working 5 days a week every week!

  290. 9/80 by lwbrown · · Score: 1

    My wife has been doing it for years at the World Bank. She really loves it. No managers ever force her the work the extra day, which she uses for errands & personal stuff, and anyway extra work means overtime at her level. Of course the WB is non-profit, so there is little incentive for manager abuse, and a strong culture against it.

  291. Its use is completely correct by TrebleMaker · · Score: 1

    argh...take that extra ' out of your sig please, it burns me

    Its use is completely correct when it's a contraction.
    Hey, apostrophes aren't evil, they're just typed that way (even if some people do seem to think it means, "Look out! An 's' is coming!")

    --
    In Soviet Russia a beowulf cluster of these things imagines you welcoming your new, neural-network overlords.
  292. Wish I could experience 9/80's myself by Anonymous Coward · · Score: 0

    As an hourly employee of a major defense contractor, we're barred by a fucked-up union contract; thus we're on 5/40 - probably forever.

    My salaried co-workers are on 9/80, and they all love it. It's been with the company for several years; I see no reason for management to change. For them, 5/40 is available, and a small percentage of the population avails themselves to that schedule.

    Roughly 90% are on the preferred "A" schedule; the remaining 10% are on the "B" schedule, there to support us hourly heathen.

  293. www.ihatejobs.com by shnull · · Score: 0

    depends on how you look at it i guess ... do you want to spend 80 hours working for stuff that you don't need or would you rather have more free time to pursue self-enlightenment? i'd go for making myself better (that way i can maybe do in 40 hours what someone else can do in 80) then again, intellectual integrity prescribes that this is a personal choice. So no flaming me or anyone else please, just remember that the company is not your life (if you're american or japanese that might be a problem though) ...

    --
    beware he who denies you access to information for in his mind, he already deems himself to be your master (SMAC-ish)
  294. What does this do to Sunday? by Footsienabackyard · · Score: 1

    That's the first major question!

    What about Saturdays? The kids need their parents for a day.

    I worked 4/10's. This gave a personal day off to pursue personal interests like hobbies, self-employment, make-up days, or "overtime."

    --
    Don't you think...? Or don't you?
  295. I worked a 9/80 for 2 years... by ellenmgreene98 · · Score: 1

    ... and loved it. There were several really great benefits in my opinion. First, my company tried hard to match up the off Fridays with holidays so many times we were actually given 4 day weekends. Second, they always respected the off Friday. However, when I was working full time and going to school full time, I was permitted to come in on those Fridays to make up whatever time I needed -- knowing I didn't have to put in a super long day or come in on the weekend was also helpful while I was killing myself with my schedule otherwise. Third, it motivated me to actually schedule a vacation knowing I was using fewer work days when I scheduled them for weeks that contained off Fridays. And finally, considering mundane errands are a big hassle and boring anyway, off Friday became a great time to schedule them all and not have to worry about weekend business hours or about burdening an entire weekend with car appointments, dry cleaners, and all that crap. Plus, I'm a skier and I certainly enjoyed being able to ski a weekday and avoid the horror that is Saturday and Sunday on most mountains... I don't have a family but, of my coworkers that did, ALL of them appreciated the time they could spend at home on those Fridays at home. I work a normal 5 day, 9-5 schedule now and I really miss the 9/80. It was, in my opinion, one of the best things about my previous job.

  296. Los Angeles Smog in the 80's by jerel · · Score: 1

    I was a consultant at the Texaco refinery in Wilmington, California (near Long Beach) in the late 80's, and the Los Angeles "Air Quality Management District" folks mandated that they decrease the average number of cars going in and out of the main gate per month in an effort to improve the air quality in the LA basin. Not sure how that would have compared to, say, decreasing the smoke-stack emissions at the refinery, but I'll leave that for YASP. (Yet Another Slashdot Post) Anyway, their creative solution was to request everyone at the refinery, office staff as well as the operations guys, to work "nine nines" and they'd get every other friday off. This ended up working extremely well for everyone that did it, and it did not seem to have any negative impacts at the refinery, so... I'd say it was a success 20 years ago. I have no idea if they are still doing that. I guess if they had gotten everyone in LA to adopt this plan it would have reduced smog caused by car emissions by roughly 10%. I never heard of anybody else doing this, and we now know that smog caused by cars is a much smaller percentage than was once thought, so how much did this help the smog situation? I'd say it was bureaucrats wanting to look like they were doing something about a problem.

    --
    Some days it's just not worth chewing through the restraints.
  297. 4/10 by NerveGas · · Score: 1

    I used to work 4/10s, starting at 4AM - so with an hour lunch, I ended the day at 3PM. It was nice, because I had early afternoons off every day. It was also nice having a three-day weekend every week.

    The roughest part for me was the fact that I had to get up before 10AM.

    --
    Oh, you're not stuck, you're just unable to let go of the onion rings.
  298. I loved it while I had it by jasko · · Score: 1

    I had that schedule for about four years and found it invaluable. Once you've been at work for 8 hours, does 1 more really mean that much to you? As much as 26 additional (albeit inflexibly scheduled) days off per year? I have changed jobs (thanks Bush!) and no longer have the 9/80 schedule as an option. The three day weekends are great - I took a lot of short trips with my kid on those weekends.

    Sure, once in a while we had to come in on an "off" Friday, but usually were able to scoot another day around to make up for it. It rocks. I miss it. Enjoy it.

  299. I choose a 40 hours a week thank you by Billly+Gates · · Score: 1

    I prefer to keep my marriage and family intact and not so my company can exploit me and get a 2 -1 in keeping costs down.

    9/80 is 11 hours a day and this assumes no days off. Now you get only every other friday off??

    This kind of reminds me of the movie Little SHop of Horrors where Seamore claims he gets every other Sunday off as a joke.

    All the studies show that after 50 hours a week productivity goes down and at 60 a week you get negative return. SO how much time do the programmers now have to do to correct the mistakes they made during their last 13 hour day? Yeah real productive use of time there, not to mention the senior level developers will probably jump ship if this is considered the norm leaving the least producitive workers.

    Go get some balls guys and tell management to screw themselves. Do you see any other department putting in those hours? Are you appreciated at all?

  300. Bust up the drug company monopolies by Billly+Gates · · Score: 1

    ... and make patent reform and drugs and medical equipment. If you really want we should lower the standards of becoming a doctor or nurse to increase the supply which would lower their demand.

    Problem sovled. ...oh wait that is socialism. Sigh.

    Some businesses are in favor of universal health care for this reason. They can save a bundle but many employees who have true ppo (not hmos) will throw a fit and vote people out of office!

  301. Comment removed by account_deleted · · Score: 1

    Comment removed based on user account deletion

  302. Comment removed by account_deleted · · Score: 1

    Comment removed based on user account deletion